ABB Relion 615 series Technical Manual Download

Page: 953 / 1196

Table 850:

RDRE Non-group channel settings

Parameter

Values (Range) Unit

Step

Default

Description

Operation

1=on

5=off

1=on

Analog

channel is

enabled or

disabled

Channel

selection

0=Disabled

1=IG

2=IA-A

3=IB-A

4=IC-A

5=IG2-A

6=IA2-A

7=IB2-A

8=IC2-A

9=VG-A

10=VA-A

11=VB-A

12=VC-A

13=VG2-A

14=VA2-A

15=VB2-A

16=VC2-A

17=CI0
18=SI1

19=SI2

20=SU0
21=SU1

22=SU2

23=CI0B
24=SI1B

25=SI2B

26=SUoB
27=SU1B

28=SU2B

29=V12

30=V23

31=V31

32=VA

33=VB

34=VC

35=V12B

36=V23B

37=V31B

38=VA-B

39=VB-B

40=VC-B

0=Disabled

Select the

signal to be

recorded by

this channel.

Applicable

values for this

parameter are

product variant

dependent.

Every product

variant

includes only

the values that

are applicable

to that

particular

variant

Channel id text

0 to 64

characters,

alphanumeric

DR analog

channel X

Identification

text for the

analog channel

used in the

COMTRADE

format

Table continues on next page

1MAC059074-MB A

Section 8

Measurement functions

615 series ANSI

947

Technical Manual

Summary of Contents for Relion 615 series

Page 1: ... RELION PROTECTION AND CONTROL 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 2: ......

Page 4: ...t is furnished under a license and may be used copied or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license Trademarks ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Warranty Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB represent...

Page 5: ...cted and communicate data and information via a network interface which should be connected to a secure network It is the sole responsibility of the person or entity responsible for network administration to ensure a secure connection to the network and to take the necessary measures such as but not limited to installation of firewalls application of authentication measures encryption of data inst...

Page 6: ...e within specified voltage limits Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255 26 for the EMC directive and with the product standards EN 60255 1 and EN 60255 27 for the low voltage directive The product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series and AN...

Page 7: ... overview 45 Overview 45 Product series version history 46 PCM600 and relay connectivity package version 47 Local HMI 48 Display 49 LEDs 49 Keypad 50 Web HMI 50 Authorization 52 Communication 52 Self healing Ethernet ring 54 Ethernet redundancy 55 Section 3 Basic functions 59 General parameters 59 Self supervision 70 Internal faults 70 Warnings 73 LED indication control 74 Function block 74 Functi...

Page 8: ...on and Control mode 90 Authorization 91 LHMI indications 91 Signals 91 Fault recorder FLR 93 Function block 93 Functionality 93 Settings 94 Monitored data 95 Non volatile memory 103 Sensor inputs for currents and voltages 104 Binary input 105 Binary input filter time 105 Binary input inversion 106 Oscillation suppression 107 Binary outputs 107 Power output contacts 108 Dual single pole power outpu...

Page 9: ...chain supervision 116 Self supervision 117 Calibration 117 Limit value supervision 117 Deadband supervision 118 RTD temperature vs resistance 120 RTD mA input connection 120 RTD mA card variants 123 Signals 126 Settings 127 Monitored data 128 SMV function blocks 129 IEC 61850 9 2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER 129 Function block 129 Functionality 130 Settings 130 IEC 61850 9 2 LE sampled valu...

Page 10: ... function block 137 Function block 137 Functionality 137 Signals 137 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 137 Function block 137 Functionality 138 Signals 138 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 138 Function block 138 Functionality 138 Signals 139 GOOSERCV_CMV function block 139 Function block 139 Functionality 139 Signals 139 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block 140 Function block 140 Functionality 140 Signals 140 GOOS...

Page 11: ...ignals 144 T_F32_INT8 function block 145 Function block 145 Functionality 145 Signals 145 T_DIR function block 145 Function block 145 Functionality 146 Signals 146 T_TCMD function block 146 Function block 146 Functionality 146 Signals 147 T_TCMD_BIN function block 147 Function block 147 Functionality 147 Signals 148 T_BIN_TCMD function block 148 Function block 148 Functionality 148 Signals 149 Con...

Page 12: ...ulse timer 62TPS 166 Minimum pulse timer 62TPM 167 Pulse timer function block 62PT 168 Identification 168 Function block 169 Functionality 169 Signals 169 Settings 170 Technical data 170 Time delay off 8 pcs 62TOF 170 Identification 170 Function block 171 Functionality 171 Signals 171 Settings 172 Technical data 172 Time delay on 8 pcs 62TON 173 Identification 173 Function block 173 Functionality ...

Page 13: ...nction block 182 Functionality 182 L R control access 183 Station authority level L R 183 Station authority level L R L R 184 Station authority level L S R 185 Station authority level L S S R L S L S R 187 Signals 189 Settings 189 Monitored data 190 Generic control point 16 pcs SPC 191 Identification 191 Function block 191 Functionality 191 Signals 192 Settings 194 Generic up down counter CTR 196 ...

Page 14: ...Function block 206 Functionality 206 Signals 207 Settings 207 Monitored data 207 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH 208 Function block 208 Functionality 208 Signals 208 Settings 209 Monitored data 209 Section 4 Protection functions 211 Three phase current protection 211 Three phase non directional overcurrent protection 51P 50P 50P 3 211 Identification 211 Function block 211 Functionality 211 Op...

Page 15: ...pendent overcurrent protection 51V 258 Identification 258 Function block 258 Functionality 258 Operation principle 259 Application 264 Signals 265 Settings 266 Monitored data 267 Technical data 268 Three phase thermal protection for feeders cables and distribution transformers 49F 268 Identification 268 Function block 269 Functionality 269 Operation principle 269 Application 272 Signals 273 Settin...

Page 16: ...ttings 287 Monitored data 288 Technical data 288 Technical revision history 288 Loss of load supervision 37M 289 Identification 289 Function block 289 Functionality 289 Operation principle 289 Application 290 Signals 291 Settings 291 Monitored data 292 Technical data 292 Technical revision history 292 Loss of phase 37 293 Identification 293 Function block 293 Functionality 293 Operation principle ...

Page 17: ...ock 314 Functionality 314 Operation principle 315 Measurement modes 317 Timer characteristics 317 Application 319 Signals 319 Settings 321 Monitored data 324 Technical data 325 Technical revision history 325 Directional ground fault protection 67 51N 67 50N 326 Identification 326 Function block 326 Functionality 326 Operation principle 326 Directional ground fault principles 332 Measurement modes ...

Page 18: ...unctionality 371 Operation principle 371 Neutral admittance characteristics 386 Application 393 Signals 398 Settings 399 Monitored data 400 Technical data 400 Technical revision history 401 Harmonics based ground fault protection 51NHA 401 Identification 401 Function block 401 Functionality 401 Operation principle 402 Application 405 Signals 406 Settings 407 Monitored data 408 Technical data 408 T...

Page 19: ...Monitored data 436 Technical data 437 Multifrequency admittance based ground fault protection 67YN 437 Identification 437 Function block 438 Functionality 438 Operation principle 439 Application 457 Signals 458 Settings 458 Monitored data 459 Technical data 460 Differential protection 460 Line differential protection with in zone power transformer 87L 460 Identification 460 Function block 460 Func...

Page 20: ...dance restricted ground fault protection 87LOZREF 538 Identification 538 Function block 538 Functionality 538 Operation principle 538 Application 542 Signals 548 Settings 548 Monitored data 549 Technical data 549 Technical revision history 550 High impedance differential protection 87A 87B 87C 550 Identification 550 Function block 550 Functionality 551 Operation principle 551 Application 553 Examp...

Page 21: ...ple 588 Application 590 Signals 591 Settings 591 Monitored data 592 Technical data 593 Technical revision history 593 Phase discontinuity protection 46PD 593 Identification 593 Function block 594 Functionality 594 Operation principle 594 Application 596 Signals 597 Settings 598 Monitored data 598 Technical data 598 Technical revision history 599 Phase reversal protection 46R 599 Identification 599...

Page 22: ...Voltage protection 610 Three phase overvoltage protection 59 610 Identification 610 Function block 610 Functionality 610 Operation principle 610 Timer characteristics 614 Application 615 Signals 615 Settings 616 Monitored data 617 Technical data 617 Technical revision history 618 Three phase undervoltage protection 27 618 Identification 618 Function block 618 Functionality 618 Operation principle ...

Page 23: ...Application 634 Signals 634 Settings 635 Monitored data 635 Technical data 636 Technical revision history 636 Positive sequence undervoltage protection 47U 27PS 636 Identification 636 Function block 637 Functionality 637 Operation principle 637 Application 638 Signals 639 Settings 640 Monitored data 640 Technical data 641 Technical revision history 641 Overexcitation protection 24 641 Identificati...

Page 24: ...ion block 666 Functionality 667 Operation principle 667 Application 668 Signals 670 Settings 671 Monitored data 672 Technical data 672 Three phase remnant undervoltage protection 27R 672 Identification 672 Function block 673 Functionality 673 Operation principle 673 Application 675 Signals 676 Settings 676 Monitored data 677 Technical data 677 Frequency protection 678 Frequency protection 81 678 I...

Page 25: ...e phase underexcitation protection 40 696 Identification 696 Function block 696 Functionality 696 Operation principle 696 Application 700 Signals 703 Settings 704 Monitored data 705 Technical data 706 Three phase underimpedance protection 21G 706 Identification 706 Function block 706 Functionality 707 Operation principle 707 Application 710 Signals 715 Settings 715 Monitored data 716 Technical dat...

Page 26: ...hnical data 733 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection 32Q 27 733 Identification 733 Function block 734 Functionality 734 Operation principle 734 Application 737 Signals 739 Settings 739 Monitored data 740 Technical data 740 Arc protection AFD 740 Identification 740 Function block 741 Functionality 741 Operation principle 741 Application 743 Signals 747 Settings 748 Monitored data 748 ...

Page 27: ...gs 765 Monitored data 766 Technical data 766 Technical revision history 766 Section 5 Protection related functions 767 Three phase inrush detector INR 767 Identification 767 Function block 767 Functionality 767 Operation principle 768 Application 769 Signals 770 Settings 771 Monitored data 771 Technical data 772 Technical revision history 772 Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF 772 Identificat...

Page 28: ...tification 788 Function block 789 Functionality 789 Operation principle 789 Application 792 Signals 793 Settings 793 Monitored data 794 Technical revision history 794 Binary signal transfer BST 794 Identification 794 Function block 795 Functionality 795 Operation principle 795 Application 797 Signals 798 Settings 799 Technical data 800 Technical revision history 800 Emergency start up 62EST 800 Id...

Page 29: ...ded data 824 Measurement modes 825 Application 825 Signals 826 Settings 827 Monitored data 828 Technical data 831 Technical revision history 831 Switch onto fault SOTF 831 Identification 831 Function block 831 Functionality 832 Operation principle 832 Application 833 Signals 833 Settings 833 Monitored data 834 Technical data 834 Section 6 Supervision functions 835 Trip circuit supervision TCM 835 ...

Page 30: ...mpedance protection scheme MCS A MCS B MCS C 854 Identification 854 Function block 854 Functionality 854 Operation principle 855 Measuring modes 856 Application 856 Signals 858 Settings 859 Monitored data 860 Technical data 861 Technical revision history 861 Protection communication supervision PCS 861 Identification 861 Function block 861 Functionality 862 Operation principle 862 Application 864 ...

Page 31: ...cal data 877 Technical revision history 877 Section 7 Condition monitoring functions 879 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 52CM 879 Identification 879 Function block 879 Functionality 879 Operation principle 880 Circuit breaker status 881 Circuit breaker operation monitoring 881 Breaker contact travel time 882 Operation counter 885 Accumulation of Iyt 885 Remaining life of circuit breaker 887 C...

Page 32: ...0 Three phase voltage measurement VA VB VC 910 Identification 910 Function block 910 Signals 910 Settings 911 Monitored data 911 Technical data 913 Technical revision history 913 Residual current measurement IG 913 Identification 913 Function block 914 Signals 914 Settings 914 Monitored data 915 Technical data 915 Technical revision history 916 Residual voltage measurement VG 916 Identification 91...

Page 33: ...ence voltage measurement V1 V2 V0 924 Identification 924 Function block 924 Signals 924 Settings 924 Monitored data 925 Technical data 926 Three phase power and energy measurement P E 927 Identification 927 Function block 927 Signals 927 Settings 928 Monitored data 928 Technical data 930 Technical revision history 930 Single phase power and energy measurement SP SE 930 Identification 930 Function ...

Page 34: ... revision history 949 Tap changer position indication 84T 950 Identification 950 Function block 950 Functionality 950 Operation principle 950 Application 954 Signals 954 Settings 955 Monitored data 955 Technical data 956 Technical revision history 956 Section 9 Control functions 957 Circuit breaker control 52 Disconnector control 29DS and Grounding switch control 29GS 957 Identification 957 Functi...

Page 35: ... 977 Application 986 Signals 988 Settings 989 Monitored data 990 Technical data 991 Technical revision history 991 Autoreclosing 79 991 Identification 991 Function block 992 Functionality 992 Protection signal definition 992 Zone coordination 993 Master and slave scheme 993 Thermal overload blocking 994 Operation principle 995 Signal collection and delay logic 996 Shot initiation 1000 Shot pointer...

Page 36: ...dentification 1033 Function block 1033 Functionality 1033 Operation principle 1033 Application 1034 Signals 1035 Settings 1036 Monitored data 1036 Technical revision history 1037 Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH 1037 Identification 1037 Function block 1037 Functionality 1037 Operation principle 1038 Application 1039 Signals 1039 Settings 1039 Monitored data 1040 Technical revision history 1...

Page 37: ...finite time operation 1073 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 1077 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection 1077 Standard inverse time characteristics 1082 User programmable inverse time characteristics 1097 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics 1097 Reset in inverse time modes 1101 Inverse timer freezing 1110 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics...

Page 38: ...erential protection 1134 Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 1139 Module slot numbering 1139 Protective ground connections 1141 Binary and analog connections 1141 Communication connections 1142 Ethernet RJ 45 front connection 1142 Ethernet rear connections 1143 EIA 232 serial rear connection 1144 EIA 485 serial rear connection 1144 Line differential protection communication connecti...

Page 39: ...Section 17 Glossary 1181 Table of contents 615 series ANSI 33 Technical Manual ...

Page 40: ...34 ...

Page 41: ...l service 1 2 Intended audience This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel who use technical data during engineering installation and commissioning and in normal service The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems protection equipment protection functions and the configured functional logic in the protection relays The installat...

Page 42: ... 61850 engineering guide Point list manual Cyber security deployment guideline GUID 12DC16B2 2DC1 48DF 8734 0C8B7116124C V2 EN Figure 1 The intended use of documents during the product life cycle Product series and product specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http www abb com relion 1 3 2 Document revision history Document revision date Product series version History A 2018 04 ...

Page 43: ...f a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions The tip icon indicates advice on for example how to design your project or how to use a certain function Although warning hazards are related to personal injury it is necessary to understand that under certain operational conditions ope...

Page 44: ...and symbols All available functions are listed in the table All of them may not be applicable to all products Table 1 Functions included in the relays Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI C37 2 2008 RED615 REF615 REG615 REM615 RET615 Protection Three phase non directional overcurrent protection low stage PHLPTOC1 3I 1 51P 1 51P 1 51P 51P 1 PHLPTOC2 3I 2 51P 2 51P 2 Three phase non directional overcur...

Page 45: ...ction NSPTOC1 I2 1 46 1 46 1 46 1 NSPTOC2 I2 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 Phase discontinuity protection PDNSPTOC1 I2 I1 1 46PD 46PD Residual overvoltage protection ROVPTOV1 Uo 1 59G 59G 59G 59G 1 59G 1 ROVPTOV2 Uo 2 59N 1 59N 1 59N 1 59N 1 59N 1 ROVPTOV3 Uo 3 59N 2 59N 2 59N 2 Three phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV1 3U 1 27 1 27 1 27 1 27 1 27 1 2 PHPTUV2 3U 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 27 2 2 PHPTUV3 3U 3 27 3...

Page 46: ...IF1 dHi_C 1 87C 87C Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two winding transformers TR2PTDF1 3dI T 1 87T Numerically stabilized low impedance restricted ground fault protection LREFPNDF1 dIoLo 1 87LOZREF 87LOZREF 2 Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF1 3I Io BF 1 50BF 1 50BF 1 50BF 1 50BF 50BF 1 CCBRBRF2 3I Io BF 2 50BF 2 50BF 2 Three phase inrush detector INRPHAR1 3I2f 1 I...

Page 47: ...on with in zone power transformer LNPLDF1 3Id I 1 87L 1 High impedance fault detection PHIZ1 HIF 1 HIZ 1 HIZ 1 Third harmonic based stator ground fault protection H3EFPSEF1 dUo Uo3H 1 27 59THN Underpower protection DUPPDPR1 P 1 32U 1 32U 1 32U 1 DUPPDPR2 P 2 32U 2 32U 2 32U 2 Reverse power directional overpower protection DOPPDPR1 P Q 1 32R 32O 1 32R 32 32O 1 DOPPDPR2 P Q 2 32R 32O 2 32R 32 32O 2 ...

Page 48: ...YNC 1 25 25 25 25 2 Condition monitoring Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR1 CBCM 1 52CM 1 52CM 1 52CM 1 52CM 52CM 1 SSCBR2 CBCM 2 52CM 2 52CM 2 Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR1 TCS 1 TCM 1 TCM 1 TCM 1 TCM 1 TCM 1 TCSSCBR2 TCS 2 TCM 2 TCM 2 TCM 2 TCM 2 TCM 2 Current circuit supervision CCSPVC1 MCS 3I 1 CCM CCM CCM Current transformer supervision for high impedance protection scheme for ph...

Page 49: ... 4 Minimum pulse timer 2 pcs second resolution TPSGAPC1 TPS 1 62TPS 1 62TPS 1 62TPS 1 62TPS 1 62TPS 1 Minimum pulse timer 2 pcs minute resolution TPMGAPC1 TPM 1 62TPM 1 62TPM 1 62TPM 1 62TPM 1 62TPM 1 Pulse timer 8 pcs PTGAPC1 PT 1 62PT 1 62PT 1 62PT 1 62PT 1 62PT 1 PTGAPC2 PT 2 62PT 2 62PT 2 62PT 2 62PT 2 62PT 2 Time delay off 8 pcs TOFGAPC1 TOF 1 62TOF 1 62TOF 1 62TOF 1 62TOF 1 62TOF 1 TOFGAPC2 ...

Page 50: ...MVI4 1 MVI4 1 MVI4 1 MVI4 1 MVI4 1 Generic up down counters UDFCNT1 UDCNT 1 CTR 1 CTR 1 CTR 1 CTR 1 CTR 1 UDFCNT2 UDCNT 2 CTR 2 CTR 2 CTR 2 CTR 2 CTR 2 UDFCNT3 UDCNT 3 CTR 3 CTR 3 CTR 3 CTR 3 CTR 3 UDFCNT4 UDCNT 4 CTR 4 CTR 4 CTR 4 CTR 4 CTR 4 Section 1 1MAC059074 MB A Introduction 44 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 51: ...tomation devices The relays feature a draw out type design with a variety of mounting methods compact size and ease of use Depending on the product optional functionality is available at the time of order for both software and hardware for example autoreclosing and additional I Os The 615 series relays support a range of communication protocols including IEC 61850 with Edition 2 support process bu...

Page 52: ...nd COMB14A IRIG B CB interlocking functionality enhanced TCS functionality in HW enhanced Non volatile memory added Serial communications 2 0 New products REM615 RET615 Platform enhancements Support for DNP3 serial or TCP IP Voltage measurement and protection Power and energy measurement Disturbance recorder upload via WHMI Fuse failure supervision Table continues on next page Section 2 1MAC059074...

Page 53: ...r Load profile recorder High speed binary outputs Profibus adapter support Support for multiple SLD pages Import export of settings via WHMI Setting usability improvements HMI event filtering tool IEC 61850 Edition 2 Currents sending support with IEC 61850 9 2 LE Support for synchronism and energizing check with IEC 61850 9 2 LE Software closable Ethernet ports Report summary via WHMI Multifrequen...

Page 54: ...b site http www abb com substationautomation or directly with Update Manager in PCM600 2 2 Local HMI The LHMI is used for setting monitoring and controlling the protection relay The LHMI comprises the display buttons LED indicators and communication port A070704 ANSI V3 EN Figure 2 Example of the LHMI Section 2 1MAC059074 MB A 615 series overview 48 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 55: ...ze1 Rows in the view Characters per row Small mono spaced 6 12 pixels 10 20 1 Depending on the selected language The display view is divided into four basic areas 1 2 3 4 A070705 ANSI V3 EN Figure 3 Display layout 1 Header 2 Icon 3 Content 4 Scroll bar displayed when needed 2 2 2 LEDs The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display Normal Pickup and Trip 1MAC059074 MB A Section 2 6...

Page 56: ...buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms reset indications provide help and switch between local and remote control mode A071176 ANSI V1 EN Figure 4 LHMI keypad with object control navigation and command push buttons and RJ 45 communication port 2 3 Web HMI The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser The supported Web browser versions are Internet Explorer 9 0 10 0 a...

Page 57: ...rting Exporting parameters Report summary The menu tree structure on the WHMI is almost identical to the one on the LHMI A070754 V6 EN Figure 5 Example view of the WHMI The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front communication port Remotely over LAN WAN 1MAC059074 MB A Section 2 615 series overview 615 series ANSI 51 Technica...

Page 58: ...Clearing indications ENGINEER Changing settings Clearing event list Clearing DFRs and load profile record Changing system settings such as IP address serial baud rate or DFR settings Setting the protection relay to test mode Selecting language ADMINISTRATOR All listed above Changing password Factory default activation For user authorization for PCM600 see PCM600 documentation 2 5 Communication The...

Page 59: ...pplication in the standard COMTRADE format The protection relay can send and receive binary signals from other devices so called horizontal communication using the IEC 61850 8 1 GOOSE profile where the highest performance class with a total transmission time of 3 ms is supported Furthermore the protection relay supports sending and receiving of analog values using GOOSE messaging The protection re...

Page 60: ...rity increases towards the protection relay loop The end links of the protection relay loop can be attached to the same external switch or to two adjacent external switches A self healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays GUID AB81C355 EF5D 4658 8AE0 01DC076E519C ANSI V1 EN Figure 6 Self healing Ethernet ring solution The ...

Page 61: ... The HSR PRP option is available for all 615 series protection relays However RED615 supports this option only over fiber optics IEC 62439 3 2012 cancels and replaces the first edition published in 2010 These standard versions are also referred to as IEC 62439 3 Edition 1 and IEC 62439 3 Edition 2 The protection relay supports IEC 62439 3 2012 and it is not compatible with IEC 62439 3 2010 PRP Eac...

Page 62: ...connecting to PRP and normal networks By connecting the node directly to LAN A or LAN B as SAN By connecting the node to the protection relay s interlink port HSR HSR applies the PRP principle of parallel operation to a single ring treating the two directions as two virtual LANs For each frame sent a node DAN sends two frames one over each port Both frames circulate in opposite directions over the...

Page 63: ...GUID 207430A7 3AEC 42B2 BC4D 3083B3225990 V2 EN Figure 8 HSR solution 1MAC059074 MB A Section 2 615 series overview 615 series ANSI 57 Technical Manual ...

Page 64: ...58 ...

Page 65: ...se polarity 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the polarity of the phase CTs Angle Corr A 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A angle correction factor Angle Corr B 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase B angle correction factor Angle Corr C 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase C angle correction factor 1 Available for sensor analog inputs only Table 6 Analog input settings residual current P...

Page 66: ...ltage input type 1 Voltage trafo 3 CVD sensor 1 Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input Angle Corr A 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle correction of an external voltage transformer Angle Corr B 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle correction of an external voltage transformer Angle Corr C 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase C Voltage phaso...

Page 67: ...chars Local operator 4 8 chars 0 Set password 4 8 chars Local engineer 4 8 chars 0 Set password 4 8 chars Local admin 4 8 chars 0 Set password 4 8 chars 1 Authorization override disabled communication tools ask password to enter the protection relay 2 Authorization override enabled communication tools do not need password to enter the protection relay except for WHMI which always requires it 3 Aut...

Page 68: ...nnections 1 Xnnn Slot ID for example X100 X110 as applicable 2 m For example 1 2 depending on the serial number of the binary input in a particular BIO or AIM card Table 12 Binary output signals in card location Xnnn Name Type Default Description Xnnn Pmm1 2 BOOLEAN 0 False See the application manual for standard configuration specific terminal connections 1 Xnnn Slot ID for example X100 X110 as a...

Page 69: ...rent IDMT saturation point Frequency adaptivity3 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disable Enabling frequency adaptivity SMV Max Delay 0 1 90 1 58 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms 2 4 40 3 67 ms 3 5 65 4 71 ms 4 6 90 5 75 ms 1 3 15 2 62 ms SMV Maximum allowed delay 1 Used in the protection relay main menu header and as part of the disturbance recording identification 2 Depending on the product variant 3 Available only in REG...

Page 70: ...session This value has no effect if selected via the LHMI Table 19 Modbus settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 5 disable Enable or disable this protocol instance Port 1 COM 1 2 COM 2 3 Ethernet TCP 1 3 Ethernet TCP 1 Port selection for this protocol instance Select between serial and Ethernet based communication Mapping selection 1 2 1 1 Choose...

Page 71: ...tPWd 1 Password for control operations using Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 2 Password for control operations using Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 3 Password for control operations using Control Struct mechanism which is available on 4x memory area ControlStructPWd 4 Password for control operations usin...

Page 72: ...Period to set IIN need time bit Time format 0 UTC 1 Local 1 Local UTC or local Coordinate with master CROB select timeout 1 65535 s 1 10 Control Relay Output Block select timeout Data link confirm 0 Never 1 Only Multiframe 2 Always 0 Never Data link confirm mode Data link confirm TO 100 65535 ms 1 3000 Data link confirm timeout Data link retries 0 65535 1 3 Data link retries count Data link Rx to ...

Page 73: ...ent time 1 BI event 2 BI event with time Default Var Obj 03 1 1 DBI 2 2 DBI status 1 1 DBI 1 DBI 2 DBI with status Default Var Obj 04 1 1 DBI event 2 2 DBI event time 2 2 DBI event time 1 DBI event 2 DBI event with time Default Var Obj 20 1 1 32bit Cnt 2 2 16bit Cnt 5 5 32bit Cnt noflag 6 6 16bit Cnt noflag 2 2 16bit Cnt 1 32 bit counter 2 16 bit counter 5 32 bit counter without flag 6 16 bit coun...

Page 74: ...6 6 double AI evt 7 7 float AI evt time 8 8 double AI evt time 7 7 float AI evt time 1 32 bit AI event 2 16 bit AI event 3 32 bit AI event with time 4 16 bit AI event with time 5 float AI event 6 double AI event 7 float AI event with time 8 double AI event with time Default Var Obj 40 1 1 32bit AO 2 2 16bit AO 3 3 AO float 4 4 AO double 2 2 16bit AO 1 32 bit AO 2 16 bit AO 3 AO float 4 AO double D...

Page 75: ...4800 6 9600 7 19200 8 38400 9 57600 10 115200 6 9600 Baudrate Table 22 COM2 serial communication settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Fiber mode 0 No fiber 2 Fiber light OFF loop 0 No fiber Fiber mode Serial mode 1 RS485 2Wire 2 RS485 4Wire 3 RS232 no handshake 4 RS232 with handshake 1 RS485 2Wire Serial mode CTS delay 0 60000 ms 1 0 CTS delay RTS delay 0 60000 ms 1 0 RTS ...

Page 76: ...o indicate the fault type Different actions are taken depending on the severity of the fault The protection relay tries to eliminate the fault by restarting After the fault is found to be permanent the protection relay stays in the internal fault mode All other output contacts are released and locked for the internal fault The protection relay continues to perform internal tests during the fault s...

Page 77: ...put relay s in card located in slot X100 Internal Fault SO relay s X110 44 Faulty Signal Output relay s in card located in slot X110 Internal Fault SO relay s X120 45 Faulty Signal Output relay s in card located in slot X120 Internal Fault SO relay s X130 46 Faulty Signal Output relay s in card located in slot X130 Internal Fault PO relay s X100 53 Faulty Power Output relay s in card located in sl...

Page 78: ...Internal Fault Card error X110 74 Card in slot X110 is faulty Internal Fault Card error X120 75 Card in slot X120 is faulty Internal Fault Card error X130 76 Card in slot X130 is faulty Internal Fault LHMI module 79 LHMI module is faulty The fault indication may not be seen on the LHMI during the fault Internal Fault RAM error 80 Error in the RAM memory on the CPU card Internal Fault ROM error 81 ...

Page 79: ...e auxiliary supply voltage has dropped too low Warning IEC61850 error 20 Error when building the IEC 61850 data model Warning Modbus error 21 Error in the Modbus communication Warning DNP3 error 22 Error in the DNP3 communication Warning Dataset error 24 Error in the Data set s Warning Report cont error 25 Error in the Report control block s Warning GOOSE contr error 26 Error in the GOOSE control ...

Page 80: ...tected on the ARC light input 1 Warning ARC2 cont light 86 A continuous light has been detected on the ARC light input 2 Warning ARC3 cont light 87 A continuous light has been detected on the ARC light input 3 Warning RTD card error X130 96 Temporary error occurred in RTD card located in slot X130 Warning RTD meas error X130 106 Measurement error in RTD card located in slot X130 For further inform...

Page 81: ...PTRC collects and combines phase information from different protection functions available as output signals OUT_ST_A _B _C and OUT_OPR_A _B _C There is also combined ground fault information collected from all the ground fault functions available in the relay configuration available as output signals OUT_ST_NEUT and OUT_OPR_NEUT 3 4 Programmable LEDs 3 4 1 Identification Function description IEC ...

Page 82: ...with the Alarm colour setting the default value being Red The OK input corresponds to the color that is available with the default value being Green Changing the Alarm colour setting to Green changes the color behavior of the OK inputs to red The ALARM input has a higher priority than the OK input Each LED is seen in the Application Configuration tool as an individual function block Each LED has u...

Page 83: ...on LED 1 Programmable LEDs Alarm color Red Green Follow S Follow F Latched S LatchedAck F S Programmable LED description LED 2 General GUID 0DED5640 4F67 4112 9A54 E8CAADFFE547 V1 EN Figure 13 Menu structure Alarm mode alternatives The ALARM input behavior can be selected with the alarm mode settings from the alternatives Follow S Follow F Latched S and LatchedAck F S The OK input behavior is alwa...

Page 84: ...ight After acknowledgement by the local operator pressing any key on the keypad the alarm disappears Activating signal LED Acknow GUID 055146B3 780B 43E6 9E06 9FD8D342E881 V1 EN Figure 16 Operating sequence Latched S LatchedAck F S Latched Flashing ON This mode is a latched function At the activation of the input signal the alarm starts flashing After acknowledgement the alarm disappears if the si...

Page 85: ...m input for LED 3 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 3 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 4 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 4 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 4 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 5 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 5 RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for LED 5 OK BOOLEAN 0 False Ok input for LED 6 ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False Alarm input for LED 6 RESE...

Page 86: ...or for the alarm state of the LED Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 1 Description Programmable LEDs LED 1 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 2 Description Programmable LEDs LED 2 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S ...

Page 87: ... Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 8 Description Programmable LEDs LED 8 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedAck F S 0 Follow S Alarm mode for programmable LED 9 Description Programmable LEDs LED 9 Programmable LED description Alarm mode 0 Follow S 1 Follow F 2 Latched S 3 LatchedA...

Page 88: ...ammable LED 5 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programmable LED 5 Programmable LED 6 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programmable LED 6 Programmable LED 7 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programmable LED 7 Programmable LED 8 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programmable LED 8 Programmable LED 9 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 Alarm Status of programmable LED 9 Programmable LED 10 Enum 0 None 1 Ok 3 A...

Page 89: ...ynchronization method can be active at a time but SNTP provides time master redundancy The protection relay supports SNTP IRIG B IEEE 1588 v2 DNP3 and Modbus to update the real time clock IEEE 1588 v2 with GPS grandmaster clock provides the best accuracy 1 µs The accuracy using IRIG B and SNTP is 1 ms The protection relay s 1588 time synchronization complies with the IEEE C37 238 2011 Power Profil...

Page 90: ...he 200 04 IRIG B standard Older IRIG B standards refer to these as B000 B001 with IEEE 1344 extensions The synchronization time can be either UTC time or local time As no reboot is necessary the time synchronization starts immediately after the IRIG B sync source is selected and the IRIG B signal source is connected IRIG B time synchronization requires a COM card with an IRIG B input When using li...

Page 91: ...an integer the domainNumber in the range of 0 to 255 PTP priority 1 0 255 1 128 PTP priority 1 in the range of 0 to 255 PTP priority 2 0 255 1 128 PTP priority 2 in the range of 0 to 255 PTP announce mode 1 Basic IEEE1588 2 Power Profile 1 Basic IEEE1588 PTP announce frame mode Table 31 Time settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Date 0 Date Time 0 Time Local time offset 840...

Page 92: ...ay 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday 7 Sunday 0 reserved Daylight saving time on day of week DST off time hours 0 23 h 2 Daylight saving time off time hh DST off time minutes 0 59 min 0 Daylight saving time off time mm DST off date day 1 31 25 Daylight saving time off date dd mm DST off date month 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 April 5 May 6 June 7 July 8 August 9 September 10 October 11 November 12 ...

Page 93: ...pendent on the SG_x_ACT outputs Table 34 Optional operation modes for setting group selection SG operation mode Description Operator Default Setting group can be changed with the setting Settings Setting group Active group Value of the SG_LOGIC_SEL output is FALSE Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs BI_SG_2 BI_SG_6 The highest TRUE binary input defines the active setting g...

Page 94: ...RUE FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE 2 any TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3 any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4 any any any TRUE FALSE 5 any any any any TRUE 6 Table 36 SG operation mode Logic mode 2 Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE any any 1 TRUE FALSE FALSE any any 2 any TRUE FALSE any any 3 any any TRUE FALSE FALSE 4 any any TRUE TRUE FALSE 5 any any TRUE any TRUE 6 The settin...

Page 95: ...Table 37 Test mode Test mode Description Protection BEH_BLK Normal mode Normal operation FALSE IED blocked Protection working as in Normal mode but ACT configuration can be used to block physical outputs to process Control function commands blocked TRUE IED test Protection working as in Normal mode but protection functions are working in parallel with test parameters FALSE IED test and blocked Pro...

Page 96: ...trol mode parameter is available via the HMI or PCM600 path Configuration Control General By default Control mode can only be set locally through LHMI Control mode inherits its value from Test mode but Control mode On Blocked and Off can also be set independently Control mode is also available via IEC 61850 communication CTRL LLN0 Mod Table 38 Control mode Control mode Description Control BEH_BLK ...

Page 97: ...o be met Remote force is set to All levels Test mode is enabled Control position of the relay is in remote position Table 39 Remote test mode Remote test mode 61850 8 1 MMS WHMI PCM600 Off No access No access Maintenance Command originator category maintenance No access All levels All originator categories Yes 3 7 7 LHMI indications The yellow Start LED flashes when the relay is in IED blocked or ...

Page 98: ... 3 is active SG_4_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active SG_5_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active SG_6_ACT BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is active BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block status BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test status FRQ_ADP_FAIL BOOLEAN Frequency adaptivity status fail Table 43 CONTROL output signals Name Type Description OFF BOOLEAN Control OFF LOCAL BOOLEAN Control local STA...

Page 99: ...ecorded data Protection and Pickup duration is from the same protection function The Fault recorded data trip time shows the time of the actual fault period This value is the time difference between the activation of the internal pickup and trip signals The actual trip time also includes the pickup time and the delay of the output relay The Fault recorded data Breaker clear time is the time differ...

Page 100: ...t Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Trig mode 0 Trip or Pickup 1 Trip only 2 Pickup only 0 Trip or Pickup Triggering mode Table 45 FLR settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 94 615 series ANSI Technical Ma...

Page 101: ...HIPTOC2 17 EFLPTOC1 18 EFLPTOC2 19 EFLPTOC3 22 EFHPTOC1 23 EFHPTOC2 24 EFHPTOC3 25 EFHPTOC4 30 EFIPTOC1 31 EFIPTOC2 32 EFIPTOC3 35 NSPTOC1 36 NSPTOC2 7 INTRPTEF1 5 STTPMSU1 3 JAMPTOC1 41 PDNSPTOC 1 44 T1PTTR1 46 T2PTTR1 48 MPTTR1 50 DEFLPDEF1 51 DEFLPDEF2 53 DEFHPDEF 1 56 EFPADM1 57 EFPADM2 58 EFPADM3 59 FRPFRQ1 60 FRPFRQ2 61 FRPFRQ3 62 FRPFRQ4 63 FRPFRQ5 64 FRPFRQ6 Protection function Table conti...

Page 102: ...2 LREFPNDF1 94 MPDIF1 96 HREFPDIF1 100 ROVPTOV 1 101 ROVPTOV 2 102 ROVPTOV 3 104 PHPTOV1 105 PHPTOV2 106 PHPTOV3 108 PHPTUV1 109 PHPTUV2 110 PHPTUV3 112 NSPTOV1 113 NSPTOV2 116 PSPTUV1 118 ARCSARC 1 119 ARCSARC 2 120 ARCSARC 3 96 SPHIPTOC 1 93 SPHLPTOC 2 92 SPHLPTOC 1 89 SPHHPTOC 2 88 SPHHPTOC 1 87 SPHPTUV4 86 SPHPTUV3 85 SPHPTUV2 84 SPHPTUV1 Table continues on next page Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A ...

Page 103: ...3 38 NSPTOC4 45 T1PTTR2 54 DEFHPDEF 2 75 DPHHPDOC 2 89 LOFLPTUC2 103 ROVPTOV 4 117 PSPTUV2 13 PHPTUC3 3 PHLPTOC3 10 PHHPTOC5 11 PHHPTOC6 28 EFHPTOC7 29 EFHPTOC8 107 PHPTOV4 111 PHPTUV4 114 NSPTOV3 115 NSPTOV4 30 PHDSTPDI S1 29 TR3PTDF1 28 HICPDIF1 27 HIBPDIF1 26 HIAPDIF1 32 LSHDPFRQ 8 31 LSHDPFRQ 7 70 LSHDPFRQ 6 80 MAPGAPC4 81 MAPGAPC5 82 MAPGAPC6 Table continues on next page 1MAC059074 MB A Secti...

Page 104: ... 52 FDPHLPDO C1 50 FPHLPTOC 1 47 MAP12GAP C8 46 MAP12GAP C7 45 MAP12GAP C6 44 MAP12GAP C5 43 MAP12GAP C4 42 MAP12GAP C3 41 MAP12GAP C2 40 MAP12GAP C1 37 HAEFPTOC 1 35 WPWDE3 34 WPWDE2 33 WPWDE1 52 DEFLPDEF3 84 MAPGAPC8 93 LREFPNDF2 97 HREFPDIF2 117 XDEFLPD EF2 116 XDEFLPD EF1 Table continues on next page Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 98 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 105: ... PHPVOC1 63 H3EFPSEF 1 60 HCUBPTO C1 59 CUBPTOC1 72 DOPPDPR1 69 DUPPDPR1 61 COLPTOC1 106 MAPGAPC 16 105 MAPGAPC 15 104 MAPGAPC 14 103 MAPGAPC 13 76 MAPGAPC1 8 75 MAPGAPC1 7 62 SRCPTOC1 74 DOPPDPR3 73 DOPPDPR2 70 DUPPDPR2 58 UZPDIS1 36 UEXPDIS1 14 MFADPSDE 1 10 LVRTPTUV 1 8 LVRTPTUV2 6 LVRTPTUV3 Table continues on next page 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic functions 615 series ANSI 99 Technical Manu...

Page 106: ...d in pu Fault resistance FLOAT32 0 00 1000000 0 0 ohm Fault resistance Fault loop resistance FLOAT32 1000 00 1000 00 ohm Resistance of fault loop Fault loop reactance FLOAT32 1000 00 1000 00 ohm Reactance of fault loop Setting group INT32 1 6 Active setting group Shot pointer INT32 1 7 Autoreclosing shot pointer value Max diff current IA FLOAT32 0 000 80 000 pu Maximum phase A differential current...

Page 107: ...hase B current Current IC FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Phase C current Current IG FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Residual current Current IN FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Calculated residual current Current I1 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Positive sequence current Current I2 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Negative sequence current Max current IA2 FLOAT32 0 000 50 000 xIn Maximum phase A current b Max current IB2 FLOAT32 0...

Page 108: ...T32 0 000 4 000 xUn Residual voltage Voltage V0 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Zero sequence voltage Voltage V1 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Positive sequence voltage Voltage V2 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Negative sequence voltage Voltage VA2 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Phase A voltage b Voltage VB2 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Phase B voltage b Voltage VC2 FLOAT32 0 000 4 000 xUn Phase B voltage b Voltage VAB2 FLOAT32 0...

Page 109: ...to phase C voltage phase A current b Angle VCA2 IB2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle phase C to phase A voltage phase B current b Angle VAB2 IC2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle phase A to phase B voltage phase C current b 3 9 Non volatile memory The relay does not include any battery backup power If the auxiliary power is lost critical information such as relay configuration and settings events dis...

Page 110: ...tion has a 150 A nominal current In As the Rogowski sensor is linear and does not saturate the 80 A 0 150 V at 50 Hz sensor also works as a 150 A 0 28125 V at 50 Hz sensor When defining another primary value for the sensor also the nominal voltage has to be redefined to maintain the same transformation ratio However the setting in the protection relay Rated Secondary Value is not in V but in mV Hz...

Page 111: ...system phase to phase voltage rating is 10 kV Thus the Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV For protection relays with sensor measurement support the Voltage input type is always set to CVD sensor and it cannot be changed The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to WYE type The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000 1 Thus the Division ratio par...

Page 112: ...n the input state is detected and the time tag attached to the input change is t0 The high state starting from t1 is detected and the time tag t1 is attached Each binary input has a filter time parameter Input filter where is the number of the binary input of the module in question for example Input 1 filter Table 49 Input filter parameter values Parameter Values Default Input filter time 5 1000 m...

Page 113: ... is blocked that is its state depends on the condition before blocking The binary input is regarded as non oscillating if the number of valid state changes during one second is less than the set oscillation level value minus the set oscillation hysteresis value Note that the oscillation hysteresis must be set lower than the oscillation level to enable the input to be restored from oscillation When...

Page 114: ...reaker trip or close coils Using an external trip relay can require an external trip circuit supervision relay It can also require wiring a separate trip relay contact back to the protection relay for breaker failure protection function All contacts are freely programmable except the internal fault output IRF 3 12 1 Power output contacts Power output contacts are normally used for energizing the b...

Page 115: ...A power outputs with trip circuit supervision When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series they have the same technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty The trip circuit supervision hardware and associated functionality which can supervise the breaker coil both during closing and opening condition are also provided Contacts PO3 and PO4 are almost always used for energizing the ...

Page 116: ...crete and electromechanical output that is rated as a power output The outputs are normally used in applications that require fast relay output contact activation time to achieve fast opening of a breaker such as arc protection or breaker failure protection where fast operation is required either to minimize fault effects to the equipment or to avoid a fault to expand to a larger area With the hig...

Page 117: ...e signal output contacts are used for energizing for example external low burden trip relays auxiliary relays annunciators and LEDs A single signal contact is rated for a continuous current of 5 A It has a make and carry for 0 5 seconds at 15 A When two contacts are connected in parallel the relay is of a different design It has the make and carry rating of 30 A for 0 5 seconds This can be applied...

Page 118: ...s normally open form A or change over form C SO1 dual parallel form C and SO2 single contact form A are part of the power supply module of the protection relay 10 11 12 X100 SO1 14 13 X100 SO2 GUID 83F96C39 652F 494A A226 FD106568C228 V1 EN Figure 27 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 112 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 119: ...m A contact 14 16 15 17 19 18 X110 SO1 SO2 20 22 21 23 24 X110 SO3 SO4 GUID CBA9A48A 2549 455B 907D 8261E2259BF4 V1 EN Figure 28 Signal output in BIO0005 3 12 2 4 Signal outputs SO1 SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006 The optional card BIO0006 provides the signal outputs SO1 SO2 and SO3 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual parallel form C contacts SO3 is a single form C contact 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic f...

Page 120: ... deadband supervision functions including warning and alarm signals 3 13 2 Operation principle All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with individual protection reference and optical isolation for each input making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module However the RTD inputs share a common ground 3 13 2 1 Selection of input signal type...

Page 121: ... Value unit setting to Degrees celsius When Value unit is set to Degrees celsius the linear scaling is not possible but the default range 40 200 C can be set smaller with the Value maximum and Value minimum settings When the channel is used for DC milliampere signal and the application requires a linear scaling of the input range the Value unit setting value has to be Dimensionless where the input...

Page 122: ...hat is equivalent to the tap changer position from 36 to 36 respectively Input maximum Input minimum Input mode 0 20mA 4 mA 20 mA Value minimum 36 AI_VAL Value maximum 36 Value unit Dimensionless X130 Input GUID 85338A5E 3D2F 4031 A598 EA8A525190D3 V1 EN Figure 30 Milliampere input scaled to tap changer position information 3 13 2 4 Measurement chain supervision Each input contains a functionality...

Page 123: ...d measure status deactivates as soon as the measured input signal is within the measurement offset 3 13 2 6 Calibration RTD and mA inputs are calibrated at the factory The calibration circuitry monitors the RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of any channel 3 13 2 7 Limit value supervision The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of AI_INST exce...

Page 124: ...log input Out of range Value maximum High high limit Val high high limit High limit Val high limit Low limit Val low limit Low low limit Val low low limit Out of range Value minimum When the measured value exceeds either the Value maximum setting or the Value minimum setting the corresponding quality is set to out of range and a maximum or minimum value is shown when the measured value exceeds the...

Page 125: ...on 3 Example of X130 RTD analog input deadband supervision Temperature sensor Pt100 is used in the temperature range of 15 180 C Value unit Degrees Celsius is used and the set values Value minimum and Value maximum are set to 15 and 180 respectively Value deadband 7500 7 5 of the total measuring range 165 AI_VAL AI_DB 85 If AI_VAL changes to 90 the reporting delay is t s 180 15 7500 100000 90 85 2...

Page 126: ...1 2 133 44 278 9 807 30 111 67 279 175 117 1 140 52 292 75 40 115 54 288 85 123 147 6 307 5 10 58 50 119 4 298 5 129 1 154 92 322 75 60 123 24 308 1 135 3 162 36 338 25 11 352 70 127 07 317 675 141 7 170 04 354 25 80 130 89 327 225 148 3 177 96 370 75 12 124 90 134 7 336 75 154 9 185 88 387 25 100 138 5 346 25 161 8 194 16 404 5 12 897 120 146 06 365 15 176 211 2 440 13 669 140 153 58 383 95 190 9...

Page 127: ...Thus the wire resistance is automatically compensated GUID BC4182F7 F701 4E09 AB3D EFB48280F097 V1 EN Figure 33 Three RTD resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic functions 615 series ANSI 121 Technical Manual ...

Page 128: ...D resistance sensors connected according to the 2 wire connection X130 1 2 11 12 Transducer Sensor Shunt 44 Ω GUID 88E6BD08 06B8 4ED3 B937 4CC549697684 V1 EN Figure 35 mA wiring connection Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 122 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 129: ...are used for resistance type of measurements RTD mA input connection Resistance and temperature sensors can be connected to the 6RTD 2mA board with 3 wire and 2 wire connections Resistor sensor X110 mA mA1 mA mA2 RTD1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 RTD2 RTD3 GUID CEF1FA63 A641 4F5E 89A3 E1529307D198 V2 EN Figure 36 Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire conn...

Page 130: ...Transducer Sensor Shunt 44 Ω GUID FC23D8FC E9BF 4B62 B8AA 52B4EDE2FF12 V2 EN Figure 38 mA wiring connection for 6RTD 2mA card 2RTD 1mA card This type of card accepts one milliampere input two inputs from RTD sensors and five inputs from VTs The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from VT Section 3 1MAC0...

Page 131: ...15 46E7 A0D9 2B580F436B2E V2 EN Figure 39 Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 3 wire connection for RTD mA card Resistor sensor X130 mA mA RTD1 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 RTD2 5 GUID F939E7EE B932 4002 9D27 1CEA7C595E0B V2 EN Figure 40 Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2 wire connection for RTD mA card 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic functions 615 series ANSI 125 T...

Page 132: ... FLOAT32 mA input Connectors 3 4 instantaneous value AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 5 6 11c instantaneous value AI_VAL4 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 7 8 11c instantaneous value AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 9 10 11c instantaneous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 13 14 12c instantaneous value AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input Connectors 15 16 12c instantaneous value AI_VAL8 FLOAT32 R...

Page 133: ...r supervision Value high limit 10000 0 10000 0 1 10000 0 Output value high warning limit for supervision Value low limit 10000 0 10000 0 1 10000 0 Output value low warning limit for supervision Value low low limit 10000 0 10000 0 1 10000 0 Output value low alarm limit for supervision Value deadband 100 100000 1 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral calculation percentage of difference bet...

Page 134: ... 001 s 3 13 5 Monitored data Table 60 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 mA input Connectors 1 2 reported value AI_RANGE1 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low mA input Connectors 1 2 range AI_DB2 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 mA input Connectors 3 4 reported value AI_RANGE2 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low mA input Connectors...

Page 135: ...Connectors 15 16 12c range AI_DB8 FLOAT32 10000 0 10000 0 RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c reported value AI_RANGE8 Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low RTD input Connectors 17 18 12c range 3 14 SMV function blocks SMV function blocks are used in the process bus applications with the sending of the sampled values of analog currents and voltages and with the receiving of the sampled value...

Page 136: ...Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 on 5 off 1 on Operation 3 14 2 IEC 61850 9 2 LE sampled values receiving SMVRECEIVER 3 14 2 1 Function block UL1 SMVRECEIVER UL2 UL3 Uo GUID EB0B6F8A 724A 4090 A94B 0BD935BB03F4 V1 EN Figure 43 Function block 3 14 2 2 Functionality The SMVRECEIVER function block is used for activating the SMV receiving functionality 3 14 2 3 Signals ...

Page 137: ... 10 seconds after the synchronization accuracy returns within limits ALARM is activated when two or more consecutive SMV frames are lost or late A single loss of frame is corrected with a zero order hold scheme In this case the effect on protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated The output is held on for 10 seconds after the conditions return to normal ...

Page 138: ...s in the test mode it accepts SMV frames with test bit without activating the WARNING and ALARM outputs 3 14 3 4 Signals Table 63 ULTVTR Input signals Name Type Default Description UL1 INT32 UL1 0 IEC 61850 9 2 phase 1 voltage UL2 INT32 UL2 0 IEC 61850 9 2 phase 2 voltage UL3 INT32 UL3 0 IEC 61850 9 2 phase 3 voltage MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circu...

Page 139: ... 0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle correction of an external voltage transformer Angle Corr C 20 0000 20 0000 deg 0 0001 0 0000 Phase C Voltage phasor angle correction of an external voltage transformer 3 14 3 6 Monitored data Monitored data is available in three locations Monitoring I O status Analog inputs Monitoring IED status SMV traffic Monitoring IED status SMV accuracy 3 14 4 RESTVTR functi...

Page 140: ...elay parameter defines how long the receiver waits for the SMV frames before activating the ALARM output This parameter can be accessed via Configuration System Common Waiting of the SMV frames also delays the local measurements of the receiver to keep them correctly time aligned The SMV Max Delay values include sampling processing and network delay The WARNING output in the receiver is activated ...

Page 141: ...SE data to application They support BOOLEAN Dbpos Enum FLOAT32 INT8 and INT32 data types Common signals The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data which means in case of valid that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality bits if configured indicate good process data Invalid status is caused either by bad data quality bits or GOOSE communication failure See ...

Page 142: ... 3 Signals Table 69 GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals Name Type Description OUT BOOLEAN Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 3 15 2 1 Function block GUID 63C0C3EE 1C0E 4F78 A06E 3E84F457FC98 V1 EN Figure 47 Function block 3 15 2 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the application Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Ba...

Page 143: ... 3 15 3 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application 3 15 3 3 Signals Table 71 GOOSERCV_MV Output signals Name Type Description OUT FLOAT32 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 3 15 4 1 Function block GUID B4E1495B F797 4CFF BD19 AF023EA2D3D9 V1 EN Figure 49 Function block 1MAC059074 MB A Sec...

Page 144: ...used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal The OP output signal indicates that the position is open Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid status The CL output signal indicates that the position is closed Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid status The ...

Page 145: ...alue inputs to the application The MAG_IN amplitude and ANG_IN angle inputs are defined in the GOOSE configuration PCM600 The MAG output passes the received GOOSE amplitude value for the application Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid status The ANG output passes the received GOOSE angle value for the application Default value 0 is used if VALID output indicates invalid statu...

Page 146: ...7 3 Signals Table 75 GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals Name Type Description OUT Enum Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3 15 8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 3 15 8 1 Function block GUID 61FF1ECC 507D 4B6D 8CA5 713A59F58D5C V1 EN Figure 53 Function block 3 15 8 2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer inputs to the application Section 3 1MAC059074...

Page 147: ...or the application The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal logic function output binary input application function output or received GOOSE signal Due to application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal Input signals that have no quality bits set or only ...

Page 148: ...signal logic function output binary input application function output or received GOOSE signal Due to application logic quality bit propagation each simple and even combined signal has quality which can be evaluated The OUT output indicates quality bad of the input signal Input signals that have any other than test bit set will indicate quality bad status 3 16 2 3 Signals Table 79 QTY_BAD Input si...

Page 149: ...nnected to any GOOSE application logic output signal for example GOOSERCV_BIN The OUT output indicates the communication status of the GOOSE function block When the output is in the true 1 state the GOOSE communication is active The value false 0 indicates communication timeout 3 16 3 3 Signals Table 81 QTY_GOOSE_COMM Input signals Name Type Default Description IN Any 0 Input signal Table 82 QTY_G...

Page 150: ... OK WARNING and ALARM are extracted from the enumerated input value Only one of the outputs can be active at a time In case the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from the sending device or it is invalid the default value 0 is used and the ALARM is activated in the T_HEALTH function block 3 16 4 3 Signals Table 83 T_HEALTH Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 Any 0 ...

Page 151: ...Output value saturates if the input value is below the minimum or above the maximum value 3 16 5 3 Signals Table 85 T_F32_INT8 Input signals Name Type Default Description F32 FLOAT32 0 0 Input signal Table 86 T_F32_INT8 Output signal Name Type Description INT8 INT8 Output signal 3 16 6 T_DIR function block 3 16 6 1 Function block GUID BD31ED40 3A32 4F65 A697 3E7344730096 V1 EN Figure 59 Function b...

Page 152: ... the default value 0 is used in function outputs The outputs FWD and REV are extracted from the enumerated input value 3 16 6 3 Signals Table 87 T_DIR Input signals Name Type Default Description DIR Enum 0 Input signal Table 88 T_DIR Output signals Name Type Default Description FWD BOOLEAN 0 Direction forward REV BOOLEAN 0 Direction backward 3 16 7 T_TCMD function block 3 16 7 1 Function block GUI...

Page 153: ..._TCMD output signals Name Type Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3 16 8 T_TCMD_BIN function block 3 16 8 1 Function block GUID A5C813D8 399A 4FBC B1A0 E62E5C423EA5 V1 EN Figure 61 Function block 3 16 8 2 Functionality The T_TCMD_BIN function is used to convert 32 bit integer input signal to Boolean output signals 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic functions 615 serie...

Page 154: ...E BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3 16 9 T_BIN_TCMD function block 3 16 9 1 Function block GUID 54A013A3 E253 4A06 B033 01C7E11EC997 V1 EN Figure 62 Function block 3 16 9 2 Functionality The T_BIN_TCMD function is used to convert Boolean input signals to 32 bit integer output signals Table 95 Conversion from Boolean to integer RAISE LOWER OUT FALSE FALSE 0 FALSE TRUE 1 TRUE FALSE...

Page 155: ...le 97 T_BIN_TCMD output signals Name Type Description OUT INT32 Output signal 3 17 Configurable logic blocks 3 17 1 Standard configurable logic blocks 3 17 1 1 OR function block Function block GUID A845F2F1 DCC2 40C9 8A77 893EF5694436 V1 EN Figure 63 Function blocks 1MAC059074 MB A Section 3 Basic functions 615 series ANSI 149 Technical Manual ...

Page 156: ...l 2 Table 99 OR6 Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 B5 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 Table 100 OR20 Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 B3 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 3 B4 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 4 ...

Page 157: ...Input signal 18 B19 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 19 B20 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 20 Table 101 OR Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 102 OR6 Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Table 103 OR20 Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 1MAC059074 MB A Section...

Page 158: ...bles The default value in all inputs is logical true which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected AND has two inputs AND6 six inputs and AND20 twenty inputs Signals Table 104 AND Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 1 Input signal 2 Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 152 615 series ANSI Techni...

Page 159: ...0 Input signal 5 B6 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 6 B7 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 7 B8 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 8 B9 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 9 B10 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 10 B11 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 11 B12 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 12 B13 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 13 B14 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 14 B15 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 15 B16 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 16 B17 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 17 B18 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 18 B...

Page 160: ...25B9A V1 EN Figure 65 Function block Functionality The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are equal Signals Table 110 XOR Input signals Name Type Default Description B1 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 1 B2 BOOLEAN 0 Input signal 2 Table 111 XOR Output signal Name Type Des...

Page 161: ...iables NOT inverts the input signal Signals Table 112 NOT Input signal Name Type Default Description I BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 113 NOT Output signal Name Type Description O BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 5 MAX3 function block Function block GUID 5454FE1C 2947 4337 AD58 39D266E91993 V1 EN Figure 67 Function block 1MAC...

Page 162: ...3 Table 115 MAX3 Output signal Name Type Description OUT FLOAT32 Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 6 MIN3 function block Function block GUID 40218B77 8A30 445A 977E 46CB8783490D V1 EN Figure 68 Function block Functionality The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values Disconnected inputs and inputs who...

Page 163: ...tion block GUID 3D0BBDC3 4091 4D8B A35C 95F6289E6FD8 V1 EN Figure 69 Function block Functionality R_TRIGTrig is used as a rising edge detector R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input When the rising edge is detected the element assigns the output to TRUE At the next execution round the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input Signals Table 118 R_TRIG Inp...

Page 164: ...ts the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input When the falling edge is detected the element assigns the Q output to TRUE At the next execution round the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input Signals Table 120 F_TRIG Input signals Name Type Default Description CLK BOOLEAN 0 Input signal Table 121 F_TRIG Output signal Name Type Description Q BOOLEAN Output signal Setting...

Page 165: ...aker position Table 122 Cross reference between circuit breaker position and the output of the function block Circuit breaker position Output of the function block T_POS_CL T_POS_OP T_POS_OK Intermediate 00 FALSE FALSE FALSE Close 01 TRUE FALSE TRUE Open 10 FALSE TRUE TRUE Faulty 11 TRUE TRUE FALSE Signals Table 123 T_POS_CL Input signals Name Type Default Description POS Double binary 0 Input sig...

Page 166: ...ngs The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600 3 17 1 10 SWITCHR function block Function block GUID 63F5ED57 E6C4 40A2 821A 4814E1554663 V1 EN Figure 72 Function block Functionality SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs CTL_SW OUT FALSE IN2 TRUE IN1 Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A ...

Page 167: ...4385 9FA9 0F5EFD87304C V1 EN Figure 73 Function block Functionality SWITCHI32 switching block for 32 bit integer data type is operated by the CTL_SW input which selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs Table 131 SWITCHI32 CTL_SW OUT FALSE IN2 TRUE IN1 Signals Table 132 SWITCHI32 input signals Name Type Default Description CTL_SW BOOLEAN 1 Control Switch IN1 INT32 0 Input signal ...

Page 168: ... input has a higher priority over the R input Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory Table 134 Truth table for SR flip flop S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 Keep state no change Signals Table 135 SR Input signals Name Type Default Description S BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q output when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q output when...

Page 169: ...puts R input has a higher priority over the S input Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory Table 137 Truth table for RS flip flop S R Q 0 0 01 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 Keep state no change Signals Table 138 RS Input signals Name Type Default Description S BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q output when set R BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q outpu...

Page 170: ...vice number Minimum pulse timer 2 pcs TPGAPC TP 62TP Function block 62TP OUT2 OUT1 IN1 IN2 GUID 637103D5 5868 4D09 9229 F4FD68423519 V1 EN Figure 76 Function block Functionality The Minimum pulse timer function TP contains two independent timers The function has a settable pulse length in milliseconds The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the ...

Page 171: ...e 142 62TP Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings Table 143 62TP Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0 60000 ms 1 150 Minimum pulse time Technical revision history Table 144 62TP Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Outputs now visible in menu C Internal improveme...

Page 172: ...settable pulse length in seconds The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example the signal outputs Once the input is activated the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse time setting Both timers use the same setting parameter GUID 9BE17BA5 70D3 442B 8D24 8544C7A9441A V1 EN Figure 79 A Trip pulse is shorter than Cold load time setting B Trip pulse is longer than...

Page 173: ...mer 62TPM Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Minimum minute pulse timer 2 pcs TPMGAPC TPM 62TPM Function block 62TPM OUT2 OUT1 IN1 IN2 GUID 4B1768D1 AC32 4305 893F 9CEEFEA24AC8 V1 EN Figure 80 Function block Functionality The Minimum minute pulse timer function 62TPM contains two independent timers The function has a ...

Page 174: ...t 1 IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 Table 150 62TPM Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings Table 151 62TPM Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Cold load time 0 300 min 1 0 Cold load time 3 17 3 Pulse timer function block 62PT 3 17 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification I...

Page 175: ...delay time setting t0 t0 dt t1 t1 dt t2 t2 dt dt Pulse delay time GUID 08F451EE 5110 41D9 95ED 084D7296FA22 V1 EN Figure 83 Timer operation 3 17 3 4 Signals Table 152 62PT Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2 status IN3 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 3 status IN4 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 4 status IN5 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 5 status IN6 BOOLE...

Page 176: ...0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time Pulse delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time Pulse delay time 5 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time Pulse delay time 6 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time Pulse delay time 7 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time Pulse delay time 8 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Pulse delay time 3 17 3 6 Technical data Table 155 62PT Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accurac...

Page 177: ...the output is set immediately When the input is cleared the output stays on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed t0 t1 dt t2 t3 t5 dt dt Off delay time t1 t4 t5 GUID D45492E6 5FBC 420C B1BF B3A1F65ADF96 V1 EN Figure 85 Timer operation 3 17 4 4 Signals Table 156 62TOF Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 1 status IN2 BOOLEAN 0 False Input 2...

Page 178: ...ic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Off delay time 1 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 5 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 6 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay time Off delay time 7 0 3600000 ms 10 0 Off delay...

Page 179: ... Function block 3 17 5 3 Functionality The time delay on 8 pcs function 62TON can be used for example for time delaying the output related to the input signal 62TON contains eight independent timers The timer has a settable time delay Once the input is activated the output is set after the time set by the On delay time setting has elapsed t0 t0 dt t2 t3 t4 dt dt On delay time t1 t4 t5 GUID B74EE76...

Page 180: ...N Output 5 Q6 BOOLEAN Output 6 Q7 BOOLEAN Output 7 Q8 BOOLEAN Output 8 3 17 5 5 Settings Table 162 62TON Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description On delay time 1 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 2 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 3 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 4 0 3600000 ms 10 0 On delay time On delay time 5 0 3600000...

Page 181: ...ck GUID 3DD0D0F2 A477 4C73 B07C 089059EA3F26 V1 EN Figure 88 Function block 3 17 6 3 Functionality The set reset 8 pcs function SR is a simple SR flip flop with a memory that can be set or that can reset an output from the S or R inputs respectively The function contains eight independent set reset flip flop latches where the SET input has the higher priority over the RESET input The status of eac...

Page 182: ...se Resets Q3 output when set S4 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q4 output when set R4 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q4 output when set S5 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q5 output when set R5 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q5 output when set S6 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q6 output when set R6 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q6 output when set S7 BOOLEAN 0 False Set Q7 output when set R7 BOOLEAN 0 False Resets Q7 output when set S8 BOOLEAN 0 False Set ...

Page 183: ...cel Resets Q3 output when set Reset Q4 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q4 output when set Reset Q5 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q5 output when set Reset Q6 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q6 output when set Reset Q7 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q7 output when set Reset Q8 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets Q8 output when set 3 17 7 Move 8 pcs MV 3 17 7 1 Function block MV Q2 Q1 Q3 Q4 Q7 Q5...

Page 184: ...N 0 False IN6 status IN7 BOOLEAN 0 False IN7 status IN8 BOOLEAN 0 False IN8 status Table 169 MV Output signals Name Type Description Q1 BOOLEAN Q1 status Q2 BOOLEAN Q2 status Q3 BOOLEAN Q3 status Q4 BOOLEAN Q4 status Q5 BOOLEAN Q5 status Q6 BOOLEAN Q6 status Q7 BOOLEAN Q7 status Q8 BOOLEAN Q8 status 3 17 7 4 Settings Table 170 MV Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default De...

Page 185: ...1 EN Figure 90 Function block 3 17 8 2 Functionality The integer value move function MVI4 is used for creation of the events from the integer values The integer input value is received via IN1 4 input The integer output value is available on OUT1 4 output The integer input range is from 2147483648 to 2147483647 3 17 8 3 Signals Table 171 MVI4 Input signals Name Type Default Description IN1 INT32 0...

Page 186: ...Figure 91 Function block 3 17 9 2 Functionality The analog value scaling function SCA4 is used for scaling the analog value It allows creating events from analog values The analog value received via the AIn_VALUE input is scaled with the Scale ratio n setting The scaled value is available on the AOn_VALUE output Analog input range is from 10000 0 to 10000 0 Analog output range is from 2000000 0 to...

Page 187: ...gnals Name Type Description AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 after scaling AO2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 2 after scaling AO3_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 3 after scaling AO4_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 4 after scaling 3 17 9 4 Settings Table 175 SCA4 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Scale ratio 1 0 001 1000 000 0 001 1 000 Scale ratio for analog value 1 S...

Page 188: ...ss with separate station control access level is not supported by other protocols than IEC 61850 The actual Local Remote control state is evaluated by the priority scheme on the function block inputs If more than one input is active the input with the highest priority is selected The priority order is off local station remote all The actual state is reflected on the CONTROL function outputs Only o...

Page 189: ...ing Control command with the LR state parameter or from the IEC 61850 data object CTRL LLN0 LocKeyHMI IEC 61850 command originator category is always set by the IEC 61850 client The relay supports station and remote IEC 61850 command originator categories depending on the selected station authority level 3 17 10 4 Station authority level L R Relay s default station authority level is L R In this s...

Page 190: ...iginator category check is not performed 3 17 10 5 Station authority level L R L R Station authority level L R L R adds multilevel access support Control access can also be simultaneously permitted from local or remote location Simultaneous local or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previous...

Page 191: ... is not performed Table 180 Station authority L R L R using CONTROL function block L R Control L R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL LLN0 LocSta CTRL LLN0 MltLev L R state CTRL LLN0 LocKeyHMI Local user IEC 61850 client 1 CTRL_OFF N A FALSE 0 CTRL_LOC N A FALSE 1 x CTRL_STA N A FALSE 0 CTRL_REM N A FALSE 2 x CTRL_ALL N A TRUE 4 x x 1 Client IEC 61850 command originator category c...

Page 192: ...ion control access can be reserved by using R L button or CONTROL function block together with IEC 61850 data object CTRL LLN0 LocSta Table 181 Station authority level L S R using R L button L R Control L R Control status Control access R L button CTRL LLN0 LocSta 1 CTRL LLN0 MltLev L R state CTRL LLN0 LocKeyHMI Local user IEC 61850 client 2 IEC 61850 client 3 Local FALSE FALSE 1 x Remote FALSE FA...

Page 193: ...l different multilevel access scenarios Control access can also be simultaneously permitted from local station or remote location Simultaneous local station or remote control operation is not allowed as one client and location at time can access controllable objects and they remain reserved until the previously started control operation is first completed by the client IED IEC 61850 remote IEC 618...

Page 194: ...nt IEC61850 command originator category is station Table 184 Station authority level L S S R L S L S R using CONTROL function block L R Control L R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL LLN0 LocSta 1 CTRL LLN0 MltLev L R state CTRL LLN0 LocKeyHMI Local user IEC 61850 client 2 IEC 61850 client 3 CTRL_OFF FALSE FALSE 0 CTRL_LOC FALSE FALSE 1 x CTRL_STA FALSE FALSE 3 x CTRL_REM 4 TRUE T...

Page 195: ...Station REMOTE BOOLEAN Control output Remote ALL BOOLEAN Control output All BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL block status BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL test status 3 17 10 9 Settings Table 187 Control settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description LR control 1 LR key 2 Binary input 1 LR key LR control through LR key or binary input Station authority 1 L R 2 L S R 3 L R L R ...

Page 196: ... RL local allowed 14 RL remote allowed 15 RL off 16 Function off 17 Function blocked 18 Command progress 19 Select timeout 20 Missing authority 21 Close not enabled 22 Open not enabled 23 Device in IRF 24 Already close 25 Wrong client 26 RL station allowed 27 RL change 28 Maximum 3 seconds unbalance voltage Latest command response LR state Enum 0 Disable 1 Local 2 Remote 3 Station 4 L R 5 L S 6 L ...

Page 197: ...inputs and the remote control request through communication The rising edge of the input signal is interpreted as a control request and the output operation is triggered When remote control requests are used the control points behave as persistent The Loc Rem restriction setting is used for enabling or disabling the restriction for SPC to follow the R L button state If Loc Rem restriction is True ...

Page 198: ... BLOCK input resets the outputs to the False state and further control requests are ignored while the BLOCK input is active From the remote communication point of view SPC toggled operation mode is always working as persistent mode The output O follows the value written to the input IN 3 17 11 4 Signals Table 189 SPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal fo...

Page 199: ...ntrol point 16 Table 190 SPC Output signals Name Type Description O1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status O2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status O3 BOOLEAN Output 3 status O4 BOOLEAN Output 4 status O5 BOOLEAN Output 5 status O6 BOOLEAN Output 6 status O7 BOOLEAN Output 7 status O8 BOOLEAN Output 8 status O9 BOOLEAN Output 9 status O10 BOOLEAN Output 10 status O11 BOOLEAN Output 11 status O12 BOOLEAN Output 12 status O13 ...

Page 200: ...ription SPCGAPC1 Output 3 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 4 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 ...

Page 201: ...n mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 11 Generic control point description Operation mode 0 Pulsed 1 Toggle 1 Off 1 Off Operation mode for generic control point Pulse length 10 3600000 ms 10 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Ou...

Page 202: ...R 3 17 12 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Generic up down counter UDFCNT UDCNT CTR 3 17 12 2 Function block GUID 222CC574 D72D 4426 876C 526D7C264C1E V1 EN Figure 99 Function block 3 17 12 3 Functionality The multipurpose generic up down counter function CTR counts up or down for each positive edge of the corresp...

Page 203: ... The counter value CNT_VAL is stored in a nonvolatile memory The range of the counter is 0 2147483647 The count of CNT_VAL saturates at the final value of 2147483647 that is no further increment is possible The value of the setting Counter load value is loaded into counter value CNT_VAL either when the LOAD input is set to True or when the Load Counter is set to Load in the LHMI Until the LOAD inp...

Page 204: ...cription Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Counter load value 0 2147483647 1 10000 Preset counter value Reset counter 0 Cancel 1 Reset 0 Cancel Resets counter value Load counter 0 Cancel 1 Load 0 Cancel Loads the counter to preset value 3 17 12 7 Monitored data Table 195 CTR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description CNT_VAL INT64 0 2147483647 Output counte...

Page 205: ...ettable demand interval parameter and the amount of quantities selected The record output is in the COMTRADE format 3 19 1 1 Quantities Selectable quantities are product dependent Table 196 Quantity Description Quantity Sel x Description Disabled Quantity not selected IA Phase A current IB Phase B current IC Phase C current IG Neutral ground residual current IA2 Phase A current B side IB2 Phase B ...

Page 206: ...ase B PC Real power phase C QA Reactive power phase A QB Reactive power phase B QC Reactive power phase C PFA Power factor phase A PFB Power factor phase B PFC Power factor phase C SA2 Apparent power phase A B side SB2 Apparent power phase B B side SC2 Apparent power phase C B side PA2 Real power phase A B side PB2 Real power phase B B side PC2 Real power phase C B side QA2 Reactive power phase A ...

Page 207: ...nt of quantities Recording capability in days 1 15 2 75 8 151 6 227 4 454 9 909 7 2729 2 2 11 4 56 9 113 7 170 6 341 1 682 3 2046 9 3 9 1 45 5 91 0 136 5 272 9 545 8 1637 5 4 7 6 37 9 75 8 113 7 227 4 454 9 1364 6 5 6 5 32 5 65 0 97 5 194 9 389 9 1169 6 6 5 7 28 4 56 9 85 3 170 6 341 1 1023 4 7 5 1 25 3 50 5 75 8 151 6 303 2 909 7 8 4 5 22 7 45 5 68 2 136 5 272 9 818 8 9 4 1 20 7 41 4 62 0 124 1 2...

Page 208: ...file record file naming 3 19 1 4 Clearing of record The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI communication or the ACT input in PCM600 Clearing of the record is allowed only on the engineer and administrator authorization levels The load profile record is automatically cleared if the quantity selection parameters are changed or any other parameter which affects the...

Page 209: ...t of the Bay name setting are both included in the COMTRADE configuration file for identification purposes The memory consumption of load profile record is supervised and indicated with two signals MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM which could be used to notify the customer that recording should be backlogged by reading the recorded data from the protection relay The levels for MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM are set...

Page 210: ...3 19 4 Settings Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic functions 204 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 211: ... VB 14 VC 15 VAB2 16 VBC2 17 VCA2 18 VA2 19 VB2 20 VC2 21 S 22 P 23 Q 24 PF 25 S2 26 P2 27 Q2 28 PF2 29 SA 30 SB 31 SC 32 PA 33 PB 34 PC 35 QA 36 QB 37 QC 38 PFA 39 PFB 40 PFC 41 SA2 42 SB2 43 SC2 44 PA2 45 PB2 46 PC2 47 QA2 48 QB2 49 QC2 50 PFA2 51 PFB2 52 PFC2 0 Disabled Select quantity to be recorded Mem warning level 0 100 1 0 Set memory warning level Table continues on next page 1MAC059074 MB...

Page 212: ...cording memory is currently used 3 20 ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks 3 20 1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH 3 20 1 1 Function block GUID CD9E923F 7B50 45C0 AE3E 39F576E01906 V1 EN Figure 102 Function block 3 20 1 2 Functionality Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH represents LAN A and LAN B redundant Ethernet channels Section 3 1MAC059074 MB A Basic function...

Page 213: ... Redundant mode is set to HSR or PRP REDLNKLIV Up Down Link status of redundant port LAN B Valid only when Redundant mode is set to HSR or PRP 3 20 1 4 Settings Table 202 Redundancy settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Redundant mode None PRP HSR None Mode selection for Ethernet switch on redundant communication modules The None mode is used with normal and Self healing Et...

Page 214: ... SCHLCCH1 output signals Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description CH1LIV True False Status of Ethernet channel X1 LAN Value is True if the port is receiving Ethernet frames Valid only when Redundant mode is set to None or port is not one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B LNK1LIV Up Down Link status of Ethernet port X1 LAN Table 204 SCHLCCH2 output signals Parameter Values Range Uni...

Page 215: ...al communication Port 2 Mode Off On On Mode selection for rear port s If port is not used it can be set to Off Port cannot be set to Off when Redundant mode is HSR or PRP and port is one of the redundant ports LAN A or LAN B Port 3 Mode Off On On Mode selection for rear port s If port is not used it can be set to Off Port cannot be set to Off when Redundant mode is HSR or PRP and port is one of th...

Page 216: ...210 ...

Page 217: ...50P 3 4 1 1 2 Function block TRIP PICKUP I_B 51P I_C I_A BLOCK ENA_MULT TRIP PICKUP I_B 50P I_C I_A BLOCK ENA_MULT TRIP PICKUP I_B 50P 3 I_C I_A BLOCK ENA_MULT GUID 5CFFB25F 7DB5 4683 B405 03CE02826062 V1 EN Figure 104 Function block 4 1 1 3 Functionality The three phase non directional overcurrent protection function 51P 50P 50P 3 is used as one phase two phase or three phase non directional over...

Page 218: ...ule diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections A070552 ANSI V1 EN Figure 105 Functional module diagram Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Pickup value If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic If the ENA_MULT input is active the Pickup...

Page 219: ...on timer has reached the value of Trip delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve the TRIP output is activated When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a ...

Page 220: ...s at least the value of the Minimum trip time setting For more information see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking f...

Page 221: ...he Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings When the DT characteristic is selected it is only affected by the Trip delay time and Reset delay time settings The protection relay provides 16 IDMT characteristics curves of which seven comply with the IEEE C37 112 and six with the IEC 60255 3 standard Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI an...

Page 222: ...rse x 14 IEC Long Time Inverse x 15 IEC Definite Time x x 17 User programmable x x 18 RI type x 19 RD type x 50P 3 supports only definite time characteristic For a detailed description of timers see the General function block features section in this manual Table 209 Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type 51P 50P Note 1 Immediate x x Available for all reset time ...

Page 223: ...ection Typically overcurrent protection is used for clearing two and three phase short circuits Therefore the user can choose how many phases at minimum must have currents above the pickup level for the function to trip When the number of pickup phase settings is set to 1 out of 3 the operation of 51P 50P 50P 3 is enabled with the presence of high current in one phase When the setting is 2 out of ...

Page 224: ... fault current is typically lower than 12xIn depending on the fault location and transformer impedance Consequently the protection must operate as fast as possible taking into account the selectivity requirements switching in currents and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the transformer and outgoing feeders Traditionally overcurrent protection of the transformer has been arranged as shown i...

Page 225: ...sbar and transformer LV side faults without impairing the selectivity Also the security degree of busbar protection is increased because there is now a dedicated selective and fast busbar protection functionality which is based on the blockable overcurrent protection principle The additional time selective stages on the transformer HV and LV sides provide increased security of backup protection fo...

Page 226: ...high LV 50P DT time selective low high LV 50P 3 DT blockable high high In case the bus tie breaker is open the operating time of the blockable overcurrent protection is approximately 100 ms relaying time When the bus tie breaker is closed that is the fault current flows to the faulted section of the busbar from two directions the operation time becomes as follows first the bus tie relay unit trips...

Page 227: ...tivity and speed of the current selective stages become as good as possible due to the fact that the transient overreach is very low Also the effects of switching inrush currents on the setting values can be reduced by using the protection relay s logic which recognizes the transformer energizing inrush current and blocks the operation or multiplies the current pickup value setting of the selected...

Page 228: ...erical overcurrent protection where the low set stage 51P operates in IDMT mode and the two higher stages 50P and 50P 3 in DT mode Also the thermal withstand of the line types along the feeder and maximum expected inrush currents of the feeders are shown Faults occurring near the station where the fault current levels are the highest are cleared rapidly by the instantaneous stage in order to minim...

Page 229: ...on characteristics All the points mentioned earlier required to define the overcurrent protection parameters can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan In Figure 110 the coordination plan shows an example of operation characteristics in the LV side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 223 Technical Manual ...

Page 230: ...0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for current multiplier Table 212 50P Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for current multiplier Section 4...

Page 231: ...A_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for current multiplier Table 214 51P Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 215 50P Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 216 50P 3 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 22...

Page 232: ...9 RD Type 15 IEC DT Selection of time delay curve type Table 218 51P Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 219 51P Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable...

Page 233: ...e 221 50P Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0 10 40 00 xIn 0 01 0 10 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Trip delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext Inv 3 ANSI Norm Inv 5 ANSI DT ...

Page 234: ...group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum trip time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Table 225 50P 3 Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 1 00 40 00 xIn 0 01 1...

Page 235: ...ed 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Table 229 50P Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 50P Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Table 230 50P 3 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 50P 3 Enum 1 Enabled 2 b...

Page 236: ...ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 30 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms 3 Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression P to P backup No suppression 1 Measurement mode default depends on stage current before fault 0 0...

Page 237: ...ultiplier setting E Internal improvement F Internal improvement Table 234 51P Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Trip delay time setting C Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting D Internal improvement E Internal improvement 4 1 2 Three phase directional overcurrent protection 67 51P 67 50P 4 1 2 1...

Page 238: ...stics for low stage 67 51P and high stage 67 50P can be selected to be either definite time DT or inverse definite minimum time IDMT In the DT mode the function trips after a predefined trip time and resets when the fault current disappears The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers o...

Page 239: ...ltage self polarizing faulted voltage and cross polarizing voltages healthy voltages The polarizing method is defined with the Pol quantity setting Table 235 Polarizing quantities Polarizing quantity Description Pos seq volt Positive sequence voltage Neg seq volt Negative sequence voltage Self pol Self polarization Cross pol Cross polarization The directional operation can be selected with the Dir...

Page 240: ...e fictive voltage is calculated using the positive phase sequence voltage measured before the fault occurred assuming that the voltage is not affected by the fault The memory function enables the function to trip up to a maximum of three seconds after a total loss of voltage This time can be set with the Voltage Mem time setting The voltage memory cannot be used for the Negative sequence voltage p...

Page 241: ...on operate zone Min trip voltage Min trip current Polarizing quantity Operating quantity GUID C30CD1A2 93E2 4A92 9FF3 58B7B2A98458 V1 EN Figure 113 Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Pickup value If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase ...

Page 242: ... and the directional calculation the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting If the phase information matches the Num of pickup phases setting the phase selection logic activates the timer module Timer Once activated the timer activates the PICKUP output Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting the time characteristics a...

Page 243: ...curs during the drop off situation The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT trip and reset times The setting parameter Minimum trip time defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum trip time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least ...

Page 244: ...ard angle and Max forward angle settings The reverse operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings The sector limits are always given as positive degree values In the forward operation area the Max forward angle setting gives the counterclockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting gives the corresponding clockwise sector measured from the Characteristic ...

Page 245: ... value for DIR_A _B _C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors or the direction cannot be defined due too low amplitude 0 unknown The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 forward The ANGLE_X is in the reverse sector 2 backward The ANGLE_X is in both forward and reverse sectors that is when the sectors are overlapping 3 both 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 239 ...

Page 246: ...ent Used polarizing voltage Angle difference A IA VA ANGLE A V I A A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID 97073FAF B617 4ECD A4E9 752AFA1F7B89 ANSI V1 EN B IB VB ANGLE B V I B B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID 624E8145 C8F3 4831 A45C AD47D4A77A83 ANSI V1 EN C IC VC ANGLE C V I C C RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID 7E8BA4E2 4CAE 453C ADEA D0BF05EE3ED8 ANSI V1 EN A B IA IB VAB ANGLE A V I I AB A B RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID 90E82618 DEB6 4949 A968 C2FE034FBE79...

Page 247: ...lt is between phases B and C the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity VBC and operating quantity IB IC in the self polarizing method GUID 7CBA5DD4 CABC 4365 A4E3 4B5F73527ECA ANSI V1 EN Figure 117 Two phase short circuit short circuit is between phases B and C 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 241 Technical Manual ...

Page 248: ...ANGLE A V V I I BC CA A B RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 GUID FA1C82F1 94F6 4669 8303 D465948F0611 ANSI V1 EN B C IB IC VCA VAB ANGLE B V V I I CA AB B C RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 GUID 6D5785FC 2D25 48F9 B5D6 BD4E12A440E8 ANSI V1 EN C A IC IA VAB VBC ANGLE C V V I I AB BC C A RCA o _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 90 GUID B1524B24 5D74 4E0F 9432 7D19AC5A18C3 ANSI V1 EN The angle difference between the polarizing quantity VBC and operating quant...

Page 249: ...an example of the phasors in a two phase short circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity VAB and operating quantity IB IC marked as φ 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 243 Technical Manual ...

Page 250: ...quations are valid when network rotating direction is counter clockwise that is ABC If the network rotating direction is reversed 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference This is done automatically with a system parameter Phase rotation Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 244 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 251: ...t circuit phases B and C when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative sequence voltage V2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 241 Equations for calculating angle difference for positive sequence quantity polarizing method Faulted phases Used fault current Used polarizing voltage Angle difference A IA V1 ANGLE A V I A RCA _ ϕ ϕ ϕ 1 GUID 7BCB8B12 2484 49AD 92A3 839A39BE5...

Page 252: ...the network rotating direction is counter clockwise and defined as ABC If the network rotating direction is reversed meaning clockwise that is ACB the equations for calculating the angle difference needs to be changed The network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter Phase rotation The change in the network rotating direction affects the phase to phase voltages polarization method ...

Page 253: ...current time characteristic for all overcurrent protection relays in the network This includes the overcurrent protection of transformers and other equipment The phase overcurrent protection can also be used in closed ring systems as short circuit protection Because the setting of a phase overcurrent protection system in closed ring networks can be complicated a large number of fault current calcu...

Page 254: ...ault Otherwise there is a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de energize the whole system connected to the LV side GUID E92DF9EA D7AD 4866 B426 08533D5E2973 ANSI V1 EN Figure 123 Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays 67 51P 67 50P can be used for parallel operating transformer applications In these applications there is a poss...

Page 255: ...an be varied The time grading between the network level stages is challenging without unnecessary delays in the time settings In this case it is practical to use the directional overcurrent protection relays to achieve a selective protection scheme Directional overcurrent functions can be used in closed ring applications The arrows define the operating direction of the directional functionality Th...

Page 256: ...ent V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA V1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage V2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False En...

Page 257: ...OLEAN 0 False Enable signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0 False Forces protection to non directional Table 244 67 51P Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 245 67 50P Output signals Name Type Description PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup TRIP BOOLEAN Trip 4 1 2 9 Settings Table 246 67 51P Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Desc...

Page 258: ... 80 Maximum phase angle in forward direction Max reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse direction Min forward angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction Min reverse angle 0 90 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Table 247 67 51P Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time...

Page 259: ...es Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum trip time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Allow Non Dir 0 False 1 True 0 False Allows prot activation as non dir when dir info is invalid Min trip current 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum trip current Min ...

Page 260: ...1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Voltage Mem time 0 3000 ms 1 40 Voltage memory time Pol quantity 1 Self pol 4 Neg seq volt 5 Cross pol 7 Pos seq volt 5 Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault direction Table 252 67 50P Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Curve parameter A...

Page 261: ... Table 254 67 51P Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction information DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 b...

Page 262: ...n 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction information DIR_A Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase A DIR_B Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase B DIR_C Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 1 both Direction phase C ANGLE_A FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase A ANGLE_B FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Calculated angle difference Phase B ANGLE_C...

Page 263: ...e or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms3 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Measurement mode and Pol quantity default current before fault 0 0 In voltage before fault 1 0 Vn fn 50 Hz fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measure...

Page 264: ...TRIP PICKUP I_B 51V I_C V_BC V_AB V_CA I_A BLOCK ENA_MULT ENA_U_MULT GUID 6290E1B0 0380 40DD A5AF 60D789C30DF2 V1 EN Figure 126 Function block 4 1 3 3 Functionality The three phase voltage dependent overcurrent protection function 51V is used for single phase two phase or three phase voltage dependent time overcurrent protection of generators against overcurrent and short circuit conditions The fu...

Page 265: ... overcurrent protection picks up is set through the Pickup value setting The Effective pickup value of the current may need to be changed during certain conditions like magnetizing inrush or when the terminal voltages drop due to a fault Hence the effective pickup value calculator module dynamically calculates the effective pickup value above which the overcurrent protection picks up Four methods ...

Page 266: ...ltage low limit settings The voltage step characteristic is achieved when the Voltage high limit setting is equal to the Voltage low limit setting The effective pickup value is calculated based on the equations Voltage level Effective pickup value I effective V Voltage high limit Pickup value low V Voltage high limit Pickup value In this example V represents the measured input voltage This voltage...

Page 267: ...ive A A I C D C V GUID 4236A6A6 504B 4A1B B91D 263066A187B4 V1 EN Equation 6 A set Pickup value low I set Pickup value C set Voltage high limit D set Voltage low limit Here V represents the measured input voltage The voltage slope characteristic is graphically represented Voltage low limit Pickup value V Voltage high limit Starting current Pickup value low GUID E3667B8C 7352 4970 BE53 56EA702DAA47...

Page 268: ...FALSE Effective pickup value Pickup valu ue GUID 32BD51B9 7EE5 4FCB B576 709044E6E188 V1 EN Equation 8 Voltage and input control mode If Control mode is set to Voltage and input Ctrl both the Voltage control and Input control modes are used However the Input control functionality is dominant over the Voltage control mode when ENA_V_MULT is active No voltage dependency mode When Control mode is set...

Page 269: ...meter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E In a drop off situation that is when a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The functionality of the Timer in the reset state depends on the combination of the Operating curve type Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings When the DT characteristic ...

Page 270: ...re reset In the Block TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 1 3 5 Application The three phase voltage dependent overcurrent protection is used as a backup protection for the generators and system from damage due to the phase faults which are not cleared by primary protection and associated breakers In case of a short circuit the sustained fault curr...

Page 271: ...etter coordination and fault detection than plain overcurrent protection The voltage slope method provides an improved sensitivity of overcurrent operation by making the overcurrent pickup value proportional to the terminal voltage The current pickup value varies correspondingly with the generator terminal voltages between the set voltage high limit and voltage low limit ensuring the operation of ...

Page 272: ...rm Inv 10 IEC Very Inv 11 IEC Inv 12 IEC Ext Inv 13 IEC ST Inv 14 IEC LT Inv 15 IEC DT 17 Programmable 18 RI Type 19 RD Type 15 IEC DT Selection of time delay curve type Trip delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Trip delay time Table 262 51V Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection o...

Page 273: ... mode 1 Voltage control 2 Input control 3 Voltage and input Ctl 4 No Volt dependency 1 Voltage control Type of control Minimum trip time 40 60000 ms 1 40 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 1 3 8 Monitored data Table 265 51V Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time EFF_ST_V...

Page 274: ...nics 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Measurement mode default current before fault 0 0 In fn 50 Hz fault current in one phase with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 1 4 Three phase thermal protection for feeders cables and distribution transformers 49F 4 1 4 1 Ident...

Page 275: ...ent measuring function using a thermal model with first order thermal loss with the settable time constant If the temperature rise continues the function operates based on the thermal model of the line Re energizing of the line after the thermal overload operation can be inhibited during the time the cooling of the line is in progress The cooling of the line is estimated by the thermal model 4 1 4...

Page 276: ...set Temperature rise The ambient temperature is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation and the ambient temperature value used in the calculation is also available in the monitored data as TEMP_AMB in degrees If the final temperature estimation is larger than the set Maximum temperature the PICKUP output is activated Current reference and Temperature raise setting values are used...

Page 277: ...ure When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level Alarm value the output signal ALARM is set When the component temperature reaches the set trip level Maximum temperature the TRIP output is activated The TRIP signal pulse length is fixed to 100 ms There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current This calculation is only performed if the final tempe...

Page 278: ...ion to the AMB_TEMP input of 49F The Env temperature set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input The Env temperature set setting is also used when the ambient temperature measurement connected to 49F is set to Not in use in the X130 RTD function The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defi...

Page 279: ...ng a thermal model of the line cable that is based on the current measurement If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level a signal is given to the operator This enables actions in the power system to be done before dangerous temperatures are reached If the temperature continues to increase to the maximum allowed temperature value the protection initiates a trip of the pr...

Page 280: ...r Values Range Unit Step Default Description Current multiplier 1 5 1 1 Current multiplier when function is used for parallel lines Table 271 49F Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 272 49F Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Initial temperatur...

Page 281: ...0 In Trip time accuracy1 2 0 of the theoretical value or 0 50 s 1 Overload current 1 2 Trip level temperature 4 1 4 10 Technical revision history Table 275 49F Technical revision history Technical revision Change C Removed the Sensor available setting parameter D Added the AMB_TEMP input E Internal improvement F Internal improvement 4 1 5 Three phase thermal overload protection two time constants ...

Page 282: ...rmer After a thermal overload operation the re energizing of the transformer is inhibited during the transformer cooling time The transformer cooling is estimated with a thermal model 4 1 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 49T can be described using a module diagram A...

Page 283: ... Temperature rise setting temperature rise C with the steady state current Iref The ambient temperature value is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation If the total value of temperature is higher than the set trip temperature level the PICKUP output is activated The Current reference setting is a steady state current that gives the steady state end temperature value Temperature ...

Page 284: ... t2 the set value of the Long time constant setting the long heating cooling time constant The warming and cooling following the two time constant thermal curve is a characteristic of transformers The thermal time constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time constant settings The Short time constant setting describes the warming of the tran...

Page 285: ...value of the Env temperature Set setting or measured ambient temperature The ambient temperature can be measured with RTD measurement The measured temperature value is connected for example from the AI_VAL3 output of the X130 RTD function to the AMB_TEMP input of 49T The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the ambient temperature measurement value is not connec...

Page 286: ...lation of the present time to trip with the present current T_TRIP calculation is only monitored if the final temperature is calculated to be above the trip temperature The value is available in the monitored data view After tripping there can be a lockout to reconnect the tripped circuit due to the thermal overload protection function The BLK_CLOSE lockout output is activated when the device temp...

Page 287: ...action that needs to be taken in the power systems before the temperature reaches a high value If the temperature continues to rise to the trip value the protection initiates the trip of the protected transformer After the trip the transformer needs to cool down to a temperature level where the transformer can be taken into service again 49T continues to estimate the heat content of the transforme...

Page 288: ...ure in long time loading the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months which may produce the winding temperature of 140 C Therefore 105 C is a safe maximum temperature value for a transformer if the Max temperature setting value is not given by the transformer manufacturer 4 1 5 6 Signals Table 277 49T Input signals Name Type Default Descr...

Page 289: ...ure 40 0 100 0 0 1 60 0 Temperature for reset of block reclose after trip Short time constant 6 60000 s 1 450 Short time constant in seconds Long time constant 60 60000 s 1 7200 Long time constant in seconds Weighting factor p 0 00 1 00 0 01 0 40 Weighting factor of the short time constant Table 280 49T Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Current reference ...

Page 290: ...Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 1 5 9 Technical data Table 284 49T Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz Current measurement 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 x In at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 x In Trip time accuracy1 2 0 of the theoretical value or 0 50 s 1 Overload current 1 2 x Tr...

Page 291: ...R is normally blocked during the startup period When the motor has passed the starting phase 51LR monitors the magnitude of phase currents The function picks up when the measured current exceeds the breakdown torque level that is above the set limit The operation characteristic is definite time The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs 4 1 6 4 Oper...

Page 292: ... reset timer is activated If the drop off time exceeds the set Reset delay time the operation timer is reset The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are cont...

Page 293: ...ed and is greater than the producing motor torque due to the bearing failures This condition develops a motor current almost equal to the value of the locked rotor current 51LR is designed to protect the motor in stall or mechanical jam situations during the running state To provide a good and reliable protection for motors in a stall situation the temperature effects on the motor have to be kept ...

Page 294: ...ked 5 Disabled Status 4 1 6 9 Technical data Table 291 51LR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 1 6 10 Technical revision history Table 292...

Page 295: ...t is less than the set limit It operates with the definite time DT characteristics which means that the function operates after a predefined trip time and resets when the fault current disappears The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function itself if desired 4 1 7 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and dis...

Page 296: ... activates the PICKUP output The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time the TRIP output is activated If the fault disappears before the module trips the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated The timer calculates the pi...

Page 297: ...rrent If the current drawn is below the lower pickup value current the motor is disconnected from the power supply 37M detects this condition and interprets that the motor is de energized and disables the function to prevent unnecessary trip events 4 1 7 6 Signals Table 293 37M Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase ...

Page 298: ... Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 1 7 9 Technical data Table 299 37M Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Pickup time Typically 300 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 1 04 Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0...

Page 299: ...s considered as a fault condition 37 picks up when the current is less than the set limit Operation time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs and reset the definite timer if desired 4 1 8 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding par...

Page 300: ... disabled after all the phase currents have exceeded the set Pickup value value of the element The protection relay does not accept the Pickup value to be smaller than Current block value Level detector 2 This is a low current detection module that monitors the de energized condition of the protected object The module compares the phase currents RMS value to the Current block value setting If all ...

Page 301: ...wn of the transformer insulation Knowledge of this condition when it occurs allows for a quick fuse replacement and saves the asset The Current block value setting can be set to zero to not block 37 with a low three phase current However this results in an unnecessary event sending when the transformer or protected object is disconnected Phase specific pickup and trip can give a better picture abo...

Page 302: ...urrent setting to block internally Pickup value 0 01 1 00 xIn 0 01 0 50 Current setting to pickup Trip delay time 50 200000 ms 10 2000 Trip delay time Table 304 37 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Operation mode 1 Three Phase 2 Single Phase 1 Three Phase Number of phases needed to pickup Tab...

Page 303: ...he current measured fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Pickup time Typically 55 ms Reset time 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 1 04 Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 1 9 Thermal overload protection for motors 49M 4 1 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device nu...

Page 304: ...9M prevents an electric motor from drawing excessive current and overheating which causes the premature insulation failures of the windings and in worst cases burning out of the motors 4 1 9 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 49M can be described using a module diagram ...

Page 305: ...han the nominal 40 C the motor can be slightly overloaded For calculating thermal level it is better that the FLC values are scaled for different temperatures The scaled currents are known as internal FLC An internal FLC is calculated based on the ambient temperature shown in the table The Env temperature mode setting defines whether the thermal level calculations are based on FLC or internal FLC ...

Page 306: ... output Thermal level calculator The module calculates the thermal load considering the TRMS and negative sequence currents The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value of the load current However in case of unbalanced phase currents the negative sequence current also causes additional heating By deploying a protection based on both current components abnormal heating of the motor...

Page 307: ...r calculates the value of θB in background and when the overload ends the thermal level is brought linearly from θA to θB with a speed of 1 66 percent per second For the motor at standstill that is when the current is below the value of 0 12 x Ir the cooling is expressed as θ θ τ 02 e t GUID 2C640EA9 DF69 42A9 A6A8 3CD20AEC76BD V2 EN Equation 18 θ02 initial thermal level when cooling begins GUID A...

Page 308: ...he Clear menu The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level the TEMP_RL output is available through the monitored data view The activation of the BLOCK input does not affect the calculated temperature The thermal level at the beginning of the start up condition of a motor and at the end of the start up condition is available in the monitored data view at the THER...

Page 309: ...restart inhibit level When the thermal content reaches 100 percent the TRIP output is activated The TRIP output is deactivated when the value of the measured current falls below 12 percent of Current reference or the thermal content drops below 100 percent The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM BLK_RESTART and TRIP outputs 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI ...

Page 310: ...480 320 160 80 s GUID F3D1E6D3 86E9 4C0A BD43 350003A07292 V1 EN Figure 144 Trip curves when no prior load and p 20 100 Overload factor 1 05 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 304 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 311: ...60 320 480 640 s GUID 44A67C51 E35D 4335 BDBD 5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN Figure 145 Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p 100 Overload factor 1 05 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 305 Technical Manual ...

Page 312: ...480 320 160 80 s GUID 5CB18A7C 54FC 4836 9049 0CE926F35ADF V1 EN Figure 146 Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p 50 Overload factor 1 05 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 306 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 313: ...urves one which characterizes the short time loads and long time overloads and which is also used for tripping and another which is used for monitoring the thermal condition of the motor The value of the Weighting factor p setting determines the ratio of the thermal increase of the two curves When the Weighting factor p setting is 100 percent a pure single time constant thermal unit is produced wh...

Page 314: ...d to follow the characteristics of the object to be protected more closely and the thermal capacity of the object is very well known a value between 50 and 100 percent is required For motor applications where for example two hot starts are allowed instead of three cold starts the value of the setting Weighting factor p being 40 percent has proven to be useful Setting the value of Weighting factor ...

Page 315: ...1A 68DADE785BF2 V1 EN Figure 147 The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC timeconstant 640 s and Overload factor 1 05 Setting the overload factor The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load The recommended value is 1 05 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 309 Technical Manual ...

Page 316: ...ased on the highest TRMS value of the phase current the additional heating in stator winding is automatically taken into account For more accurate thermal modeling the Negative Seq factor setting is used for taking account of the rotor heating effect NegativeSeq factor R R R R 2 1 GUID EA5AD510 A3CA 47FB 91F0 75D7272B654E V1 EN Equation 19 RR2 Rotor negative sequence resistance RR1 Rotor positive ...

Page 317: ...or alarm The value of Alarm thermal value is set to a level which allows the use of the full thermal capacity of the motor without causing a trip due to a long overload time Generally the prior alarm level is set to a value of 80 to 90 percent of the trip level 4 1 9 6 Signals Table 310 49M Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SI...

Page 318: ...ng the start of motor Time constant stop 80 60000 s 1 500 Motor time constant during the standstill condition of motor Env temperature mode 1 FLC Only 2 Use input 3 Set Amb Temp 1 FLC Only Mode of measuring ambient temperature Env temperature Set 20 0 70 0 C 0 1 40 0 Ambient temperature used when no external temperature measurement available Table 313 49M Non group settings Basic Parameter Values ...

Page 319: ...32 0 99999 s Estimated time to reset of block restart 49M Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Therm Lev FLOAT32 0 00 9 99 Thermal level of protected object 1 00 is the trip level 4 1 9 9 Technical data Table 316 49M Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz Current measurement 1 5 of the set value ...

Page 320: ...ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Non directional ground fault protection low stage EFLPTOC Io 51N 51G Non directional ground fault protection high stage EFHPTOC Io 50N 50G Non directional ground fault protection instantaneous stage EFIPTOC Io 50N 3 50G 3 4 2 1 2 Function block 51N 51G IG TRIP BLOCK PICKUP ENA_MULT 50N 50G IG TRIP BLOCK PICKUP ENA_MULT 50N 3 50G 3 IG TRIP BLOCK PICKUP ENA_MULT GUID 7E...

Page 321: ...setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable A070437 ANSI V1 EN Figure 149 Functional module diagram Level detector The operating quantity can be selected with the setting IG I0 signal Sel The selectable options are Measured IG and Calculated I0 The operating quantity is compared to the set Pickup value If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value the level detector send...

Page 322: ... depends on the Reset delay time setting With the reset curve type Inverse reset the reset time depends on the current during the drop off situation The PICKUP output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed The Inverse reset selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves If another operating curve type is selected an immediate reset occurs dur...

Page 323: ...k to Peak x x x For a detailed description of the measurement modes see the Measurement modes section in this manual 4 2 1 6 Timer characteristics 51N 51G 50N 50G supports both DT and IDMT characteristics The user can select the timer characteristics with the Operating curve type and Type of reset curve settings When the DT characteristic is selected it is only affected by the Trip delay time and ...

Page 324: ...14 IEC Long Time Inverse x 15 IEC Definite Time x x 17 User programmable curve x x 18 RI type x 19 RD type x 50N 3 50G 3 supports only definite time characteristics For a detailed description of timers see the General function block features section in this manual Table 320 Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type 51N 51G 50N 50G Note 1 Immediate x x Available for ...

Page 325: ...several steps using different current pickup levels and time delays 51N 51G 50N 50G 50N 3 50G 3 consists of three different protection stages Low 51N 51G High 50N 50G Instantaneous 50N 3 50G 3 51N 51G contains several types of time delay characteristics 50N 50G and 50N 3 50G 3 are used for fast clearance of serious ground faults 4 2 1 8 Signals Table 321 51N 51G Input signals Name Type Default Des...

Page 326: ...al for current multiplier Table 324 51N 51G Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 325 50N 50G Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 326 50N 3 50G 3 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 320 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 327: ...curve type Table 328 51N 51G Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Table 329 51N 51G Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Curve parameter A 0 0086 120...

Page 328: ...ves Trip delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext Inv 3 ANSI Norm Inv 5 ANSI DT 9 IEC Norm Inv 10 IEC Very Inv 12 IEC Ext Inv 15 IEC DT 17 Programmable 15 IEC DT Selection of time delay curve type Table 332 50N 50G Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Imme...

Page 329: ... Calculated I0 1 Measured IG Measured IG or calculated I0 Table 335 50N 3 50G 3 Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 1 00 40 00 xIn 0 01 1 00 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Trip delay time 20 200000 ms 10 20 Trip delay time Table 336 50N 3 50G 3 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range...

Page 330: ... Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 50N 50G Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Table 340 50N 3 50G 3 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 50N 3 50G 3 Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Section 4 1MA...

Page 331: ...n Change B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Trip delay time setting C Added a setting parameter for the Measured IG or Calculated I0 selection D Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting E Internal improvement F Internal improvement Table 343 51N 51G Technical revision history Technical revision Change B The minimum and default values changed to 40 ms ...

Page 332: ...cks up and trips when the operating quantity current and polarizing quantity voltage exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set operating sector The trip time characteristic for low stage DEFLPDEF and high stage DEFHPDEF can be selected to be either definite time DT or inverse definite minimum time IDMT In the DT mode the function trips after a predefined trip time and rese...

Page 333: ...is given in Configuration Analog inputs Current IG CT If Calculated I0 is selected the current ratio is obtained from the phase current channels given in Configuration Analog inputs Current 3I CT The operating quantity residual voltage can be selected with the setting Vg or V0 The options are Measured VG and Calculated V0 If Measured VG is selected the voltage ratio for VG channel is given in Conf...

Page 334: ... is set to True the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is checked even if the Directional mode was set to Non directional or Allow Non Dir to True The protection relay does not accept the Pickup value or Pickup value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Pickup value setting range Typically the ENA_MULT input is connected to the inrush detection function INR In case of inrush...

Page 335: ...rse angle are settable Phase angle 88 The sector maximum values are frozen to 88 degrees Otherwise as Phase angle 80 mode Polarizing quantity selection Neg seq volt is available only in the Phase angle operation mode The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting The alternatives are Non directional Forward and Reverse operation The operation criterion is selected with...

Page 336: ...CTL RCA_CTL affects the Characteristic angle setting The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the inaccuracies in the measurement transformers The setting decreases the operation sector The correction can only be used with the IoCos or IoSin modes The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be reversed by setting the Pol reversal to True which turns the polarizing quanti...

Page 337: ...e time curve the TRIP output is activated When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation happens that is a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is exceeded the timer reset state is activated The function...

Page 338: ...on input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole functi...

Page 339: ...aracteristic angle 0 deg maximum torque line Characteristic angle 0 deg Non tripping zone Min forward angle Min reverse angle Min trip current Max forward angle Max reverse angle IG tripping quantity Forward tripping zone Backward tripping zone VG polarizing quantity zero torque line GUID D491B874 769D 4D2F 9E74 2788A829E7E3 V1 EN Figure 152 Definition of the relay characteristic angle RCA 0 degre...

Page 340: ...torque line VG polarizing quantity IG tripping quantity GUID 7F29880D 18AB 4B4C 9953 6D186760D35A V1 EN Figure 153 Definition of the relay characteristic angle RCA 60 degrees in a solidly grounded network Example 3 The Phase angle mode is selected isolated network φRCA 90 deg Characteristic angle 90 deg Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 334 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 341: ... the phase to ground capacitances C0 of phases and leakage resistances R0 This means that the residual current is mainly capacitive and has a phase shift of 90 degrees compared to the polarizing voltage Consequently the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 90 degrees and the operation criteria to IoSin or Phase angle The width of the operating sector in the phase angle criteria can be s...

Page 342: ... is based on the measurement of the active current component The magnitude of this component is often small and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in the compensation equipment When measuring the resistive part of the residual current the relay characteristic angle RCA should be set to 0 degrees and the operation criteria to IoCos or Phase angle Figure 156 illustrates a simplified e...

Page 343: ...done with the Characteristic angle setting In an ungrounded network Characteristic angle is set to 90 degrees and in a compensated network Characteristic angle is set to 0 degrees In case the grounding method of the network is temporarily changed from compensated to ungrounded due to the disconnection of the arc suppression coil the Characteristic angle setting should be modified correspondingly T...

Page 344: ...The function operates on three alternative measurement modes RMS DFT and Peak to Peak The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting Table 348 Measurement modes supported by 67 51N 67 50N stages Measurement mode 67 51N 67 50N RMS x x DFT x x Peak to Peak x x For a detailed description of the measurement modes see the Measurement modes section in this manual Section 4 1MAC059074...

Page 345: ... The following characteristics which comply with the list in the IEC 61850 7 4 specification indicate the characteristics supported by different stages Table 349 Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type 67 51N 67 50N 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse x x 2 ANSI Very Inverse x 3 ANSI Normal Inverse x x 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse x 5 ANSI Definite Time x x 6 Long Time Extremely...

Page 346: ...ation area is limited with the Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings The reverse operation area is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings The sector limits are always given as positive degree values In the forward operation area the Max forward angle setting gives the clockwise sector and the Min forward angle setting correspondingly the counterclockwise secto...

Page 347: ...tion The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is not in any of the defined sectors 0 unknown Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is in the forward sector 1 forward Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is in the reverse sector 2 backward Angle between the polarizing and operating quantity is in both the forward and the reverse sector...

Page 348: ...Cos respectively The angle correction setting can be used to improve selectivity The setting decreases the operation sector The correction can only be used with the Iosin φ or Iocos φ criterion The RCA_CTL input is used to change the IG characteristic Table 352 Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria Operation mode RCA_CTL False RCA_CTL True IoSin Actual operat...

Page 349: ...criteria Example 1 Iosin φ criterion selected forward type fault FAULT_DIR 1 IG IGsin Forward tripping zone Backward tripping zone VG Correction angle non tripping zone Min operating current RCA 90 deg GUID BC040813 ECB4 4D8C 9329 6CA29EE239C7 V1 EN Figure 159 Operating characteristic Iosin φ in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction that is the operating sector is 180 d...

Page 350: ... Min operating current RCA 90 deg GUID 20659C27 4886 497F 82E3 6EE27C8B9984 V1 EN Figure 160 Operating characteristic Iosin φ in reverse fault Example 3 Iocos φ criterion selected forward type fault FAULT_DIR 1 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 344 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 351: ...pping zone Min operating current GUID 5D6DC72B 7B8F 4B8B B345 767CC1302BC2 V1 EN Figure 161 Operating characteristic Iocos φ in forward fault Example 4 Iocos φ criterion selected reverse type fault FAULT_DIR 2 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 345 Technical Manual ...

Page 352: ...ences The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have a fixed value of 80 degrees The sector limits of the fixed sectors are rounded The sector rounding is used for cancelling the CT measurement errors at low current amplitudes When the current amplitude falls below three percent of the nominal current the sector is reduced to 70 degrees at the fixed sector side Th...

Page 353: ...ward area 1 nominal amplitude IG VG GUID 2F0D9869 85AD 400A 97EC 8295D06D4F9E V1 EN Figure 163 Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 80 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 of 0 90 45 30 15 75 60 90 45 30 15 75 60 Min forward angle 1 80 deg 70 deg Forward area Non operating area 3 of 1 of 0 I n I n I n I GUID 49D23ADF 4DA0 4F7A 8020 757F32928E60 ANSI V1 EN Figure 164 Phase angle classic 80 amplitude 1MAC...

Page 354: ...ed Sector rounding in the phase angle 88 consists of three parts If the current amplitude is between 1 20 percent of the nominal current the sector limit increases linearly from 73 degrees to 85 degrees If the current amplitude is between 20 100 percent of the nominal current the sector limit increases linearly from 85 degrees to 88 degrees If the current amplitude is more than 100 percent of the ...

Page 355: ...12023841 V1 EN Figure 165 Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 88 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of 0 90 45 30 15 75 60 90 45 30 15 75 60 Min forward angle 10 88 deg Forward area Non operating area 85 deg 73 deg 100 of 20 of 1 of 0 I n I n I n I n I GUID F9F1619D E1B5 4650 A5CB B62A7F6B0A90 ANSI V1 EN Figure 166 Phase angle classic 88 amplitude 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functio...

Page 356: ...orks the phase angle criterion with extended operating sector can also be used When the relay characteristic angle RCA is 0 degrees the negative quadrant of the operation sector can be extended with the Min forward angle setting The operation sector can be set between 0 and 180 degrees so that the total operation sector is from 90 to 180 degrees In other words the sector can be up to 270 degrees w...

Page 357: ...rs in directional ground fault applications The residual current IG can be measured with a core balance current transformer or the residual connection of the phase current signals If the neutral of the network is either isolated or grounded with high impedance a core balance current transformer is recommended to be used in ground fault protection To ensure sufficient accuracy of residual current m...

Page 358: ...rrent VG SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence current U2 SIGNAL 0 Negative phase sequence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0 False Enable signal for current multiplier RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 352 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 359: ...ion TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup Table 356 67 50N Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 4 2 2 11 Settings Table 357 67 51N Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0 010 5 000 xIn 0 005 0 010 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Directional mode 1 Non d...

Page 360: ... reverse angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Maximum phase angle in reverse direction Min forward angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in forward direction Min reverse angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Voltage pickup value 0 010 1 000 xUn 0 001 0 010 Voltage pickup value Table 358 67 51N Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset cur...

Page 361: ...000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Minimum trip time 50 60000 ms 1 50 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Allow Non Dir 0 False 1 True 0 False Allows prot activation as non dir when dir info is invalid Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Min trip current 0 005 1 000 xIn 0 001 0 005 Minimum trip current Min trip voltage 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum trip voltag...

Page 362: ...nimum phase angle in forward direction Min reverse angle 0 180 deg 1 80 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Voltage pickup value 0 010 1 000 xUn 0 001 0 010 Voltage pickup value Table 362 67 50N Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Operation mode 1...

Page 363: ...001 0 005 Minimum trip current Min trip voltage 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum trip voltage Correction angle 0 0 10 0 deg 0 1 0 0 Angle correction Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity IG I0 signal Sel 1 Measured IG 2 Calculated I0 1 Measured IG Measured IG or calculated I0 Vg or V0 1 Measured VG 2 Calculated V0 1 Measured VG Selection for used Uo signal Pol quantity 3 Ze...

Page 364: ...ription FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time DIRECTION Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Direction information ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between polarizing and operating quantity ANGLE FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle between operating angle and characteristic angle I_OPER...

Page 365: ...alue 58 ms 62 ms 66 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 30 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms 3 Suppression of harmonics RMS No suppression DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 Peak to Peak No suppression 1 Measurement mode default depends on sta...

Page 366: ...orward angle setting Pickup value step changed to 0 005 C Added a setting parameter for the Measured IG or Calculated I0 selection and setting parameter for the Measured VG Calculated V0 or Neg seq volt selection for polarization The sector default setting values are changed from 88 degrees to 80 degrees D Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting E Unit added to calcula...

Page 367: ...ing to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 2 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 67NIEF can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram...

Page 368: ...dual voltage nominal value is always phase to phase voltage Thus the valid maximum setting for residual voltage pickup value is 0 577 Vn Calculated V0 requires that all three phase to ground voltages are connected to the protection relay V0 cannot be calculated from the phase to phase voltages Transient detector The Transient detector module is used for detecting transients in the residual current...

Page 369: ...is kept activated until the VG level exceeds the set value or in case of a drop off the drop off duration is shorter than the set Reset delay time In the Intermittent EF mode when the start transient of the fault is detected and the VG level exceeds the set Voltage pickup value the Timer 1 is activated When a required number of intermittent ground fault transients set with the Peak counter limit s...

Page 370: ...exceeds the Peak counter limit setting the timer has reached the time set with the Trip delay time and one additional transient is detected during the drop off cycle The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient peak In case there is no TRIP activation for example the fault disappears momentarily PICKUP stays activated until the Reset delay time elapses that is reset takes pla...

Page 371: ... the function is used in the directional mode and an opposite direction transient is detected the BLK_EF output is activated for the fixed delay time of 25 ms If the PICKUP output is activated when the BLK_EF output is active the BLK_EF output is deactivated Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global ...

Page 372: ...s a special type of fault that is encountered especially in compensated networks with underground cables A typical reason for this type of fault is the deterioration of cable insulation either due to mechanical stress or due to insulation material aging process where water or moisture gradually penetrates the cable insulation This eventually reduces the voltage withstand of the insulation leading ...

Page 373: ...rs that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients such as the fault moment on the voltage wave fault location fault resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers In the fault initiation the voltage of the faulty phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is discharged to ground discharge transients At the same time the voltages of the healthy phase...

Page 374: ... mode Table 371 67NIEF Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup BLK_EF BOOLEAN Block signal for EF to indicate opposite direction peaks 4 2 3 7 Settings Table 372 67NIEF Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 1 Non directional 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Non directional Forward Reverse Trip d...

Page 375: ... xIn 0 01 0 01 Minimum operating current for transient detector 4 2 3 8 Monitored data Table 375 67NIEF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 67NIEF Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 2 3 9 Technical data Table ...

Page 376: ...ltage pickup value since the pickup value is effective in both operation modes Added support for calculated V0 Vg or V0 source measured calculated can be selected with Vg or V0 Voltage pickup value setting minimum changed from 0 10 to 0 05 E Min trip current setting scaling corrected to RMS level from peak level 4 2 4 Admittance based ground fault protection 21YN 4 2 4 1 Identification Function de...

Page 377: ...irectional and the boundary lines can be tilted if required by the application This allows the optimization of the shape of the admittance characteristics for any given application The function supports two calculation algorithms for admittance The admittance calculation can be set to include or exclude the prefault zero sequence values of IG and VG Furthermore the calculated admittance is recorde...

Page 378: ... V In this case Measured VG is selected The nominal values for residual voltage is obtained from the VT ratios entered in Residual voltage VG Configuration Analog inputs Voltage VG VT 11 547 kV 100 V The residual voltage pickup value of 1 0 Vn corresponds to 1 0 11 547 kV 11 547 kV in the primary Example 2 V0 is calculated from phase quantities The phase VT ratio is 20 sqrt 3 kV 100 sqrt 3 V In th...

Page 379: ...ss than 0 1 s from fault initiation Otherwise the collected pre fault values are overwritten with fault time values If it is slower Admittance Clc mode must be set to Normal Neutral admittance is calculated as the quotient between the residual current and residual voltage polarity reversed fundamental frequency phasors The Admittance Clc mode setting defines the calculation mode Admittance Clc mod...

Page 380: ...everse direction that is outside the protected feeder Yo Y Fdtot GUID B6E3F720 1F9F 4C11 A5DC 722838E8CCDA V1 EN Equation 26 j I V gFd ph GUID 135FBF62 1C0B 4327 9FA5 E8EC5F215B29 V1 EN Equation 27 YFdtot Sum of the phase to ground admittances YFdA YFdB YFdC of the protected feeder IgFd Magnitude of the ground fault current of the protected feeder when the fault resistance is zero ohm Vph Magnitud...

Page 381: ...culated neutral admittance may appear as positive which brings the measured admittance in the fourth quadrant in the admittance plane This should be considered when setting the admittance characteristic 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 375 Technical Manual ...

Page 382: ...on coil Rn Resistance of the neutral grounding resistor YFd Phase to ground admittance of the protected feeder YBg Phase to ground admittance of the background network For example in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the ground fault current in the protected feeder being 10 A Rf 0 Ω the theoretical value for the measured admittance during a ground fault in the reverse direction tha...

Page 383: ...his should be considered in the setting of the admittance characteristic Fault in the forward direction that is inside the protected feeder Ungrounded network Yo Y Bgtot GUID 5F1D2145 3C0F 4F8F 9E17 5B88C1822566 V1 EN Equation 29 j I I V gTot gFd ph GUID A59B653A E421 4A65 BD70 77512A1106BE V1 EN Equation 30 Compensated network Yo Y Y Bgtot CC GUID F3810944 D0E1 4C9A A99B 8409F4D3CF05 V1 EN Equati...

Page 384: ...d the coil including the parallel resistor Basically the compensation degree determines the imaginary part of the measured admittance and the resistive part is due to the parallel resistor of the coil and the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil Theoretically the measured admittance is located in the first or fourth quadrant in the admittance plane depending on the c...

Page 385: ...der comp K 1 Resonance K 1 Over comp K 1 Reverse fault Yo j IeFd Uph Forward fault high resistance earthed network Yo IRn j IeTot IeFd Uph A B C EA EB EC Io Forward Fault Lcc Rcc IeFd IeTot IeTot IeFd Uo Rn Protected feeder Background network YFd YBg VG Vph Vph Vph Vph IG GUID 99A93925 B7EF 4154 A90B AE3DFC3ABFA1 V1 EN Figure 177 Admittance calculation during a forward fault 1MAC059074 MB A Sectio...

Page 386: ... 1 15 100 1 1 1 10 15 k kV j 3 1 73 2 31 milliSiemens GUID 0A181CF5 7EBC 4DF6 BB02 FC76290044D1 V1 EN Equation 35 Before the parallel resistor is connected the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network and the losses of the coil As they are typically small the resistive part may not be sufficiently large to secure the discrimination of the fau...

Page 387: ...tance criterion Yo Go Admittance criterion combined with the conductance criterion Yo Bo Admittance criterion combined with the susceptance criterion Go Bo Conductance criterion combined with the susceptance criterion Yo Go Bo Admittance criterion combined with the conductance and susceptance criterion The options for the Directional mode setting are Non directional Forward and Reverse Figure 178 ...

Page 388: ...e Admittance setting in the secondary is 5 00 milliSiemens The CT ratio is 100 1 A and the VT ratio is 11547 100 V The admittance setting in the primary can be calculated Y milliSiemens A V milliSiemens pri 5 00 100 1 11547 100 4 33 GUID 9CFD2291 9894 4D04 9499 DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN Equation 37 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 382 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 389: ... Im Yo Settings Susceptance forward Susceptance reverse Susceptance tilt Ang Re Yo Im Yo Settings Conductance forward Conductance reverse Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance forward Susceptance reverse Susceptance tilt Ang Re Yo Im Yo Settings Circle conductance Circle susceptance Circle radius Conductance forward Conductance reverse Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance forward Susceptance reverse Suscep...

Page 390: ...orward Conductance tilt Ang Settings Circle conductance Circle susceptance Circle radius Susceptance forward Susceptance tilt Ang Settings Conductance forward Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance forward Susceptance tilt Ang Settings Circle conductance Circle susceptance Circle radius Conductance forward Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance forward Susceptance tilt Ang Im Yo Im Yo Re Yo Im Yo Re Yo Im Yo ...

Page 391: ...s Susceptance reverse Susceptance tilt Ang Settings Conductance reverse Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance reverse Susceptance tilt Ang Settings Circle conductance Circle susceptance Circle radius Conductance reverse Conductance tilt Ang Susceptance reverse Susceptance tilt Ang Im Yo Im Yo Re Yo Im Yo Re Yo Re Yo Im Yo Re Yo GUID B6939383 152A 4EE8 9C1A 3DFD01F6EA89 V1 EN Figure 180 Admittance chara...

Page 392: ...all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 2 4 5 Neutral admittance characteristics The applied characteristic should always be set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a suitable margin However more detailed setting value selection principles depend on the...

Page 393: ...fined with two overconductance boundary lines with the Conductance forward and Conductance reverse settings For the sake of application flexibility the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting By default the tilt angle is zero degrees that is the boundary line is a vertical line in the admittance plane A positive tilt value rotates the boundary line c...

Page 394: ...rion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to Go and Directional mode set to Forward The characteristic is defined by one overconductance boundary line with the Conductance forward setting For the sake of application flexibility the boundary line can be tilted with the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting By default the tilt angle is zero degrees that is the boundary line i...

Page 395: ...Operation mode setting set to Bo and Directional mode to Forward The characteristic is defined by one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward setting For the sake of application flexibility the boundary line can be tilted by the angle defined with the Susceptance tilt Ang setting By default the tilt angle is zero degrees that is the boundary line is a horizontal line in the admi...

Page 396: ...tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang setting By default the Circle conductance and Circle susceptance are 0 0 mS and Conductance tilt Ang equals zero degrees that is the characteristic is a combination of an origin centered circle with two vertical overconductance boundary lines A positive tilt value for the Conductance tilt Ang setting rotates boundary lines counterclockwise ...

Page 397: ...l the characteristic is a combination of four boundary lines with the settings Conductance forward Conductance reverse Susceptance forward and Susceptance reverse See Figure 187 For the sake of application flexibility the boundary lines can be tilted by the angle defined with the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings By default the tilt angles are zero degrees that is the boundary...

Page 398: ... tilt Ang 0 TRIP Re Yo Im Yo Susceptance forward TRIP TRIP Conductance forward TRIP Susceptance tilt Ang 0 GUID 60D007C4 2B08 41FC A30B 580B3DF37361 V1 EN Figure 186 Combined forward directional overconductance and forward directional oversusceptance characteristic Left figure the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero degrees Right figure the setting Conductance tilt An...

Page 399: ...to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin The sign of the admittance characteristic settings should be considered based on the location of characteristic boundary in the admittance plane All forward settings are given with positive sign and reverse settings with negative sign 4 2 4 6 Application Admittance based ground fault protection provides a selective ground f...

Page 400: ...protection enables a multistage protection principle For example one instance of 21YN could be used for alarming to detect faults with a high fault resistance using a relatively low value for the Voltage pickup value setting Another instance of 21YN could then be set to trip with a lower sensitivity by selecting a higher value of the Voltage pickup value setting than in the alarming instance stage...

Page 401: ...or of the compensation coil is assumed to be disconnected 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total ground fault current A Rf 0 ohm Resonance K 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total ground fault current A Rf 0 ohm Over Under Compensated K 1 2 0 8 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total ground fault cu...

Page 402: ...m is 100 A The maximum ground fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A Rf 0 Ω The applied active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor at 15 kV which is connected in parallel to the coil during the fault after a 1 0 second delay Solution As a pickup condition for the admittance based ground fault protection the internal residual overvoltage condition of 21YN is used The Voltage pickup v...

Page 403: ...f protection settings to different feeder and network configurations Conductance forward This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil It must be set to a lower value than the conductance of the parallel resistor in order to enable dependable operation The selected value should move the boundary line from origin to include some margin for the admittance operation poin...

Page 404: ...r the admittance operating point during outside fault it is recommended to use the same value as for setting Susceptance reverse Conductance reverse 1 73 mS 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Bo mS Go mS Backward fault Yo j 1 15mS Forward fault Y o 1 73 j Bo mS 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Bo mS Go mS 1 73 mS 1 73 mS 0 1mS TRIP TRIP TRIP TRIP 0 35mS GUID 1E9D7C77 63A6 40BF ...

Page 405: ... Admittance circle midpoint susceptance Conductance forward 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Conductance threshold in forward direction Conductance reverse 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Conductance threshold in reverse direction Susceptance forward 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Susceptance threshold in forward direction Susceptance reverse 500 00 500 00 mS 0 01 1 00 Susceptance threshold in reverse direction ...

Page 406: ...2 4 9 Monitored data Table 385 21YN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backward 3 both Detected fault direction Y0_REAL FLOAT32 1000 00 1000 00 mS Real part of calculated neutral admittance Y0_IMAG FLOAT32 1000 00 1000 00 mS Imaginary part of calculated neutral admittance 21YN Enu...

Page 407: ...ovement 4 2 5 Harmonics based ground fault protection 51NHA 4 2 5 1 Identification Description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Harmonics based ground fault protection HAEFPTOC Io HA 51NHA 4 2 5 2 Function block 51NHA I_REF_RES BLOCK PICKUP TRIP IG GUID 9A831169 A6A0 4689 9715 A61794979C12 V1 EN Figure 192 Function block 4 2 5 3 Functionality The harm...

Page 408: ... and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 51NHA can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections PICKUP Harmonics calculation BLOCK TRIP IG I_REF_RES Current comparison Level detector Blocking logic t Timer t GUID D9185AD6 2682 46EE B6A8 5DB16FB2AC9A V1 EN Figure 193 F...

Page 409: ...ling signal to the Timer module Current comparison The maximum of the harmonics currents reported by other parallel feeders in the substation that is in the same busbar is fed to the function through the I_REF_RES input If the locally measured harmonics current is higher than I_REF_RES the enabling signal is sent to Timer If the locally measured harmonics current is lower than I_REF_RES the fault ...

Page 410: ...function switches to use the Operation curve type setting and if DT is selected Trip delay time is used If the IDMT curve is selected the time characteristics are according to the selected curve and the Minimum trip time setting is used for restricting too fast an operation time In case of a communication failure the pickup duration may change substantially depending on the user settings When the ...

Page 411: ...ither according to DT or IDMT The value is available in the monitored data view More information can be found in the General function block features Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlle...

Page 412: ...ceive Analogue GOOSE receive MAX Analogue GOOSE send 51NHA I_REF_RES BLOCK PICKUP TRIP IG I_HARM_RES BLKD_I_REF GUID BC6D478E 223B 48C1 BF0B 918B10CDBDB8 V1 EN Figure 195 Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication with three analog GOOSE receivers 4 2 5 6 Signals Table 389 51NHA Input signals Name Type Default Description IG SIGNAL 0 Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block sign...

Page 413: ...roup settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum trip time 100 200000 ms 10 500 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Type of reset curve 1 Immediate 2 Def time reset 3 Inverse reset 1 Immediate Selection of reset curve type Enable reference use 0 False 1 True 0 False Enable using current reference from other IEDs instead of stand alone Table 393 51NHA Non group sett...

Page 414: ...iption PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time I_HARM_RES FLOAT32 0 0 30000 0 A Calculated harmonics current BLKD_I_REF BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Current comparison status indicator 51NHA Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 2 5 9 Technical data Table 396 51NHA Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the ...

Page 415: ... Wattmetric based ground fault protection 32N 4 2 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Wattmetric based ground fault protection WPWDE Po 32N 4 2 6 2 Function block TRIP PICKUP IG 32N VG BLOCK RCA_CTL GUID 4C60F4EA 02BE 4E2A AEE4 CFC5B15A4B08 V1 EN Figure 196 Function block 4 2 6 3 Functionality The wattmetric based ...

Page 416: ...is recommended that a core balance CT is used for measuring the residual current The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 2 6 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable For 32N certain notations and defini...

Page 417: ... the module sends an enabling signal to Level detector The directional operation is selected with the Directional mode setting Either the Forward or Reverse operation mode can be selected The direction of fault is calculated based on the phase angle difference between the operating quantity IG or I0 and polarizing quantity VG or V0 and the value ANGLE is available in the monitored data view In the...

Page 418: ...stic angle setting also known as Relay Characteristic Angle RCA or Relay Base Angle or Maximum Torque Angle MTA The Characteristic angle setting is done based on the method of grounding employed in the network For example in case of an ungrounded network the Characteristic angle setting is set to 90 and in case of a compensated network the Characteristic angle setting is set to 0 In general Charac...

Page 419: ... be done automatically with the RCA_CTL input which results in the addition of 90 in the Characteristic angle setting The value ANGLE_RCA is available in the monitored data view VG Polarizing quantity Forward area IG Operating quantity RCA 90 Maximum torque line Backward area Minimum operate current Forward area Backward area GUID 75AA11D4 D05D 4B07 9A0C 83F2D87DC1E2 V1 EN Figure 199 Definition of...

Page 420: ...her than their respective limit a valid angle is calculated and the residual power calculation module is enabled The Correction angle setting can be used to improve the selectivity when there are inaccuracies due to the measurement transformer The setting decreases the operation sector The Correction angle setting should be done carefully as the phase angle error of the measurement transformer var...

Page 421: ...wer to the set Current pickup value In Voltage pickup value Vn and Power pickup value Pn respectively When all three quantities exceed the limits Level detector enables the Timer module When calculating the setting values for Level detector it must be considered that the nominal values for current voltage and power depend on whether the residual quantities are measured from a dedicated measurement...

Page 422: ... CT and VT ratios Residual current IG Configuration Analog inputs Current IG CT 100 A 1 A Residual voltage VG Configuration Analog inputs Current VG VT 11 547 kV 100 V Residual Current pickup value of 1 0 In corresponds then 1 0 100 A 100 A in primary Residual Voltage pickup value of 1 0 Vn corresponds then 1 0 11 547 kV 11 547 kV in primary Residual Power pickup value of 1 0 Pn corresponds then 1...

Page 423: ... setting Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which select...

Page 424: ...etric IDMT for Sref set at 0 15 xPn 4 2 6 6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes RMS DFT and Peak to Peak The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting 4 2 6 7 Application The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting the ground faults especially in compensated networks The protection uses the resi...

Page 425: ... lines together with the system leakage resistances R0 Often a resistor RL in parallel with the coil is used for increasing the fault current When a single phase to ground fault occurs the capacitance of the faulty phase is bypassed and the system becomes unsymmetrical The fault current is composed of the currents flowing through the ground capacitances of two healthy phases The protection relay i...

Page 426: ...transformer should preferably have a transformation ratio of at least 70 1 Lower transformation ratios such as 50 1 or 50 5 are not recommended unless the phase displacement errors and current transformer amplitude are checked first It is not recommended to use the directional wattmetric protection in case of a ring or meshed system as the wattmetric requires a radial power flow to operate The rel...

Page 427: ... power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by the inverse time power characteristics 4 2 6 8 Signals Table 399 32N Input signals Name Type Default Description IG SIGNAL 0 Residual current VG SIGNAL 0 Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode RCA_CTL BOOLEAN 0 False Relay characteristic angle control Table 400 32N Output signals N...

Page 428: ... disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 403 32N Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used current measurement mode Correction angle 0 0 10 0 deg 0 1 2 0 Angle correction Min trip current 0 010 1 000 xIn 0 001 0 010 Minimum trip current Min trip voltage 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 01 Minimum trip...

Page 429: ... 32N Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz Current and voltage 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Power 3 of the set value or 0 002 Pn Pickup time 1 2 Typically 63 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in IDMT mode 5 ...

Page 430: ...identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Third harmonic based stator ground fault protection H3EFPSEF dUo Uo3H 27 59THN 4 2 7 2 Function block TRIP PICKUP V_3H_A 27 59THN V_3H_B INT_BLKD V_3H_C V_3H_N BLOCK GCB_CLOSED V_3H_RES GUID EDBB2CBA B779 4B3B 97D1 497219FDB813 V1 EN Figure 204 Function block 4 2 7 3 Functionality The third harmonic based stator ground fault protection 27 59THN is used ...

Page 431: ...rminal side 3rd harmonic calculation calculates the magnitude and phase angle of the third harmonic voltage at the generator terminal V3H T _ Calculation of the third harmonic voltage depends on the availability of terminal side voltage and is specified by the Voltage selection setting Voltage selection setting is set to No voltage if phase to ground voltages are not available at the terminal side...

Page 432: ...e equal to the third harmonic voltage of the phase available V V or V or V 3 3 3 3 H T H A H B H C _ _ _ _ GUID EC492C5F 586D 465F A591 CEEB5095C6CE V1 EN Equation 46 The function is internally blocked if the magnitude of calculated V3H T _ is lower than the set Voltage block value this also activates the INT_BLKD output Differential calculation The amplitude of the third harmonic differential vol...

Page 433: ...setting with the set constant CB open factor setting VB Beta H H N 3 3 CB open factor V _ GUID C9813B89 E86E 4E07 8848 648E88F92EE6 V1 EN Equation 49 Neutral side third harmonic voltage is measured via a voltage transformer between the generator neutral point and the ground The magnitude of the third harmonic biased voltage UB_3H is available in the Monitored data view Level detector In the third ...

Page 434: ...r When a phase to ground fault occurs the residual voltage increases and the current flows through the neutral The simplest way to protect the stator winding against a ground fault is by providing residual overvoltage protection or residual neutral overcurrent protection However at best these simple schemes can protect only 95 of the stator winding leaving 5 of the neutral end unprotected This is ...

Page 435: ...fect sinusoidal wave but contains triplen harmonics voltages These triplen harmonics appear in each phase with the same magnitude and angle due to which they do not sum to zero and thus also appear in the neutral side of the generator as a zero sequence quantity Among all the triplen harmonics voltages generated the third harmonic voltage has the highest magnitude with the magnitude varying betwee...

Page 436: ...minals under different conditions The operating equation of the protection is described in the following equation V V V 3 3 3 0 H T H N H N Beta _ _ _ GUID 50A69B54 0D20 45BE 92BB DE939C62A1C5 V1 EN Equation 50 The third harmonic voltages V3H T _ and V3H N _ are the phasor with its real and imaginary parts V3H T _ is approximately in the opposite direction to that of the V3H N _ however the actual...

Page 437: ...H N V V V 3 3 3 _ _ _ GUID 57727225 84D4 4B41 B618 05351CE22A7E V1 EN Equation 52 K is the security factor for example K 1 5 Equation 52 must be satisfied in the normal healthy condition of the protected generator with a high enough value for K so that no unwanted operation of the protection should be expected regardless the load on the generator To assure a reliable functioning of the protection ...

Page 438: ...the generator are to be made during commissioning 1 The value of the Beta setting must be set to 1 00 2 Loading of the generator is done at 5 to 10 different load points and the third harmonic differential and bias voltage are measured Both quantities can be obtained from the Monitored data view of the function 3 A graph indicating differential and bias voltages as a functions of the load on the g...

Page 439: ...ion of the bias voltage and differential voltage with a change in the active generated load the angle between the third harmonic terminal and neutral voltage is 150 Calculating CB Open factor One of the factors though not major governing the magnitude of the generated third harmonic voltage is the generator terminal capacitance If there is no generator breaker the capacitive coupling to ground is ...

Page 440: ...en there is a generator breaker the capacitive coupling to ground differs between the operating conditions when the generator is running with the generator breaker open before synchronization and with the circuit breaker closed With the generator breaker open the total capacitance is smaller compared to normal operating conditions This means that the neutral side third harmonic voltage is reduced ...

Page 441: ...IGNAL 0 Third harmonic of phase C voltage V_3H_N SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of neutral voltage V_3H_RES SIGNAL 0 Third harmonic of residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode GCB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0 False Generator CB in closed position Table 408 27 59THN Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Protection inte...

Page 442: ...Description Voltage block value 0 010 0 100 xUn 0 001 0 010 Low level blocking for 3rd harmonic differential protection Generator CB used 0 No 1 Yes 0 No Defines if generator circuit breaker exists Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 2 7 8 Monitored data Table 413 27 59THN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time tri...

Page 443: ...e or 0 004 Vn Pickup time1 2 Typically 35 ms Reset time Typically 35 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 differential mode Typically 1 04 under voltage mode Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms 1 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 2 8 Multifrequency admittance based ground fault protection 67YN 4 2 8 1 I...

Page 444: ...eved is comparable with traditional fundamental frequency based methods such as IoCos IoSin 67 51N 67 50N Watt Varmetric 32N and neutral admittance 21YN 67YN is capable of detecting faults with dominantly fundamental frequency content as well as transient intermittent and restriking ground faults 67YN can be used as an alternative solution to transient or intermittent function 67NIEF 67YN supports...

Page 445: ...t in the network and it is based on the value of the fundamental frequency zero sequence voltage defined as the vector sum of fundamental frequency phase voltage phasors divided by three V V V V A B C 0 1 1 1 1 3 GUID BF09651A 0D05 4805 9560 011B279495EC V1 EN Equation 54 When the magnitude of V o 1 exceeds setting Voltage pickup value a ground fault is detected The GFC module reports the exceeded...

Page 446: ... zero sequence voltage The following admittances are calculated if the magnitude of a particular harmonic in residual current and zero sequence voltage are measurable by the protection relay Fundamental frequency admittance conductance and susceptance Y I V G j B o o 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 3 GUID 24706434 ECF8 40C5 8F88 27DD2BB84699 V1 EN Equation 55 Y0 1 The fundamental frequency neutral admittance phas...

Page 447: ...n the calculated sum admittance phasor Yosum obtained from the Multi frequency admittance calculation module To obtain dependable and secure fault direction determination regardless of the fault type transient intermittent restriking permanent high or low ohmic the fault direction is calculated using a special filtering algorithm Cumulative Phasor Summing CPS technique This filtering method is adv...

Page 448: ...ure 212 Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing CPS The CPS technique provides a stable directional phasor quantity despite individual phasors varying in magnitude and phase angle in time due to a non stable fault type such as restriking or intermittent ground fault This is also true for harmonic components included in the sum admittance phasor Harmonics have typically a highly fluctuating characte...

Page 449: ...ult outside the protected feeder assuming that the admittance of the protected feeder is dominantly capacitive The result is valid regardless of the fault type low ohmic high er ohmic permanent intermittent or restriking In case harmonic components are present in the fault quantities they would turn the phasor align to the negative Im Yo axis Phasor 2 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admit...

Page 450: ... This is especially important when high sensitivity of protection is targeted The characteristic Tilt angle should reflect the measurement errors that is the larger the measurement errors the larger the Tilt angle setting should be Typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended The detected fault direction is available in the Monitored data view as parameter DIRECTION Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A ...

Page 451: ...urrent magnitude threshold The trip current used in the magnitude supervision is measured with a special filtering method which provides very stable residual current estimate regardless of the fault type This stabilized current estimate is the result from fundamental frequency admittance calculation utilizing the CPS technique The stabilized current value is obtained after conversion from the corr...

Page 452: ...gnitude supervision is based on either the Adaptive or Amplitude methods When Adaptive is selected the method adapts the principle of magnitude supervision automatically to the system grounding condition In case the phase angle of accumulated sum admittance phasor is greater than 45 degrees the set minimum trip current threshold is compared to the amplitude of Io stab 1 see Figure 214 In case the ...

Page 453: ...t thresholds are given below In case the Adaptive operating quantity is selected the setting Min trip current should be set to value pu p IRtot GUID 77CF1715 3730 414C BC8E 075792F791FB V1 EN Equation 65 IRtot The total resistive ground fault current of the network corresponding to the resistive current of the parallel resistor of the coil and the natural losses of the system typically in order of...

Page 454: ...ound network in case of a solid ground fault with a security margin The main task of the current magnitude supervision module is to secure the correct directional determination of a ground fault so that only the faulty feeder is disconnected or alarmed Therefore the threshold values should be selected carefully and not set too high as this can inhibit the disconnection of the faulty feeder The res...

Page 455: ...ntermittent fault creates repetitive transients The practical sensitivity of transient detection is limited to approximately few hundreds of ohms of fault resistance Therefore the application of transient detection is limited to low ohmic ground faults GFC release INTR_EF PEAK_IND Reset timer Reset delay time IG VG Reset delay time GUID A5B0DD30 710A 4E95 82F8 1D2692452239 V2 EN Figure 215 Example...

Page 456: ...ee conditions is not valid In case fault is transient and self extinguishes PICKUP output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer setting Reset delay time After TRIP output activation PICKUP and TRIP outputs are reset immediately if any of the above three conditions is not valid The pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR available in the Monitored data view indicates the percentage ratio of the ...

Page 457: ...It is intended to detect ground faults regardless of their type transient intermittent or restriking permanent high or low ohmic The setting Voltage pickup value defines the basic sensitivity of the 67YN function In Alarming EF mode the operate timer is started during the following conditions Ground fault is detected by the GFC Fault direction equals Directional mode setting Estimated stabilized f...

Page 458: ...y time In case detection of temporary ground faults is not desired the activation of PICKUP output can be delayed with setting Pickup delay time To keep the operate timer activated between current spikes during intermittent or restriking ground fault the Reset delay time should be set to a value exceeding the maximum expected time interval between fault spikes obtained at full resonance condition ...

Page 459: ...ermittent ground fault transients set with the Peak counter limit setting must be detected for operation Therefore transient faults or permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in Intermittent EF mode The application of Intermittent EF mode is limited to low ohmic intermittent or restriking ground faults In the Intermittent EF mode the operate timer is started wh...

Page 460: ... is detected by the GFC fault direction matches the Directional mode setting and estimated stabilized fundamental frequency residual current exceeds set Minimum trip current setting The Reset delay time starts to elapse from each detected transient Function is reset if time between current peaks is more that Reset delay time or if the General Fault Criterion release is reset After TRIP output acti...

Page 461: ... setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the op...

Page 462: ...ault Criterion release that is when zero sequence voltage falls below Voltage pickup value BLK_EF is reset once the reset delay time elapses Activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the BLK_EF output and resets Timer GFC release Reset timer BLK_EF Pickupt delay time Pickup delay time Reset delay time Reset delay time IG VG GUID A2A55E4C 395C 43BB A942 2991EA37E3A4 V1 EN Figure 219 Activation of B...

Page 463: ...uency content as well as transient intermittent or restriking ground faults 67YN can be used as an alternative solution to transient or intermittent function 67NIEF 67YN supports Fault direction indication in operate and non operate direction which may be utilized during fault location process The inbuilt transient detector can be used to identify restriking or intermittent ground faults and discr...

Page 464: ...or EF to indicate opposite direction peaks INTR_EF BOOLEAN Intermittent ground fault indication PEAK_IND BOOLEAN Current transient detection indication 4 2 8 7 Settings Table 417 67YN Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2 Forward 3 Reverse 2 Forward Directional mode Voltage pickup value 0 01 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 10 Voltage pickup value Trip delay t...

Page 465: ...k counter limit for restriking EF Pickup delay time 30 60000 ms 1 30 Pickup delay time Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 500 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Rotate polarizing quantity 4 2 8 8 Monitored data Table 421 67YN Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time FAULT_DIR Enum 0 unknown 1 forward 2 backwar...

Page 466: ... Line differential protection with in zone power transformer 87L 4 3 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Line differential protection with in zone power transformer LNPLDF 3Id I 87L 4 3 1 2 Function block 87L I_LOC_C BLOCK BLOCK_LS TRIP PICKUP STR_LS_LOC I_LOC_B I_LOC_A STR_LS_REM I_REM_C I_REM_B I_REM_A OPR_LS_LOC...

Page 467: ... tapped or in zone transformer The high stage provides a very fast clearance of severe faults with a high differential current regardless of their harmonics The operating time characteristic for the low stage can be selected to be either definite time DT or inverse definite time IDMT The direct inter trip ensures both ends are always operated even without local criteria 4 3 1 4 Operation principle...

Page 468: ...happens on normal operation or during external faults When an internal fault occurs the currents on both sides of the protected object flow towards the fault and cause the stabilizing current to be considerably lower This makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults The low stage includes a timer delay functionality The characteristic of the low stage taking the apparent differential ...

Page 469: ...pe section 2 S2 Low trip value Id_lim TRIP AREA LS NON TRIP AREA LS HS End section 1 B1 High trip value TRIP AREA LS HS Slope section 3 S3 End section 2 B2 TRIP AREA HS NON TRIP AREA LS GUID 193E5367 5910 4F1E A6B1 7D5E8A35C94C V1 EN Figure 223 Operating characteristics of the protection LS stands for the low stage and HS for the high stage The slope of the operating characteristic curve of the di...

Page 470: ...hen the second harmonic blocking is selected and the inrush is detected The inrush detector calculates the ratio of the second harmonic currentI_2H_LOC_A and the fundamental frequency current I_1H_LOC_A If the line differential protection is used in normal mode Winding selection is Not in use the calculated value is compared with the parameter value of the Pickup value 2 H setting If the calculate...

Page 471: ...tion is phase segregated and the differential currents are calculated separately on both ends Communication INCOMING INCOMING PROTECTED ZONE RED 615 RED 615 GUID E9D80758 16A2 4748 A08C 94C33997E603 V3 EN Figure 225 Basic protection principle The differential current I Id of the protection relay is obtained on both ends with the formula I I I d LOC REM GUID 9C08695B 8241 4B74 AA2A B64783F9C288 V2 ...

Page 472: ...ence in the nominal levels can be presented Another example for differential application without in zone transformer where line rated current is 400 A The ratio of CTs are 800 1 and 400 1 800A 1 400A 1 P1 S1 P2 S2 P2 S2 P1 S1 Rated current primary 400A A B CT Ratio Correction 800A 400A 2 000 CT connection type Type 1 CT Ratio Correction 400A 400A 1 000 CT connection type Type 1 N IC IB IA IA IB IC...

Page 473: ...a CT ratiocorrection I I n nT GUID F950DE9C 6AFB 4DF9 B299 6631693C55C0 V1 EN Equation 69 In nominal primary current of the CT After the CT ratio correction the measured currents and corresponding setting values of 87L are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current Ir Ir or percentage value of Ir Ir An example shows how the CT ratio correction settings are calculated when the ra...

Page 474: ...y current transformers are designated as Type 1 and Type 2 If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite the CT connection type setting parameter is Type 1 The connection examples of Type 1 are as shown in the Figure 228 and Figure 229 If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents equate the CT connection type...

Page 475: ...5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC X120 P1 P2 P1 P2 S1 S2 S1 S2 7 8 9 10 11 12 A B C GUID 022848B7 518F 4410 939D B6646E7419D2 V1 EN Figure 228 Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 469 Technical Manual ...

Page 476: ...5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC P2 P1 P2 P1 S1 S1 S2 S2 7 8 9 10 11 12 X120 A B C GUID C42E6AC5 E9A4 45DD AFF4 BF6F8D40B42E V1 EN Figure 229 Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 470 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 477: ...5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC P1 P2 P1 P2 S1 S2 S1 S2 7 8 9 10 11 12 X120 A B C GUID FD0C1731 3D13 4317 9B84 86DA2434E3B9 V1 EN Figure 230 Connection example of current transformers of Type 2 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 471 Technical Manual ...

Page 478: ...CD4B3 V1 EN Figure 231 Connection example of current transformers of Type 2 Transformer vector group matching Before differential and bias currents can be calculated the phase difference of the currents must be vector group matched based on the transformer connection type The vector group Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 472 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 479: ...he phase shifting and the numerical delta connection inside the protection relay The Winding 1 type parameter determines the connection on winding 1 Y YN D Z ZN The vector group matching can be implemented either on both winding 1 and winding 2 or only on winding 1 or winding 2 at intervals of 30 with the Clock number setting Similarly the Winding 2 type parameter determines the connections of the...

Page 480: ... flowing in the windings In this example there is no neutral current on either side of the transformer assuming there are no grounding transformers installed In the previous example the matching is done differently to have the winding 1 neutral current compensated at the same time Table 423 87L vector group matching Vector group of the transformer Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Phase shift Zero seq...

Page 481: ...d 7 Not needed YNd7 YN d 7 Automatic Yd11 Y d 11 Not needed YNd11 YN d 11 Automatic Dd0 D d 0 Not needed Dd2 D d 2 Not needed Dd4 D d 4 Not needed Dd6 D d 6 Not needed Dd8 D d 8 Not needed Dd10 D d 10 Not needed Dy1 D y 1 Not needed Dyn1 D yn 1 Automatic Dy5 D y 5 Not needed Dyn5 D yn 5 Automatic Dy7 D y 7 Not needed Dyn7 D yn 7 Automatic Dy11 D y 11 Not needed Dyn11 D yn 11 Automatic Yz1 Y z 1 No...

Page 482: ...N yn 1 HV side ZNy1 ZN y 1 Automatic Zy5 Z y 5 Not needed Zyn5 Z yn 5 Automatic ZNyn5 ZN yn 5 HV side ZNy5 ZN y 5 Automatic Zy7 Z y 7 Not needed Zyn7 Z yn 7 Automatic ZNyn7 ZN yn 7 HV side ZNy7 ZN y 7 Automatic Zy11 Z y 11 Not needed Zyn11 Z yn 11 Automatic ZNyn11 ZN yn 11 HV side ZNy11 ZN y 11 Automatic Dz0 D z 0 Not needed Dzn0 D zn 0 LV side Dz2 D z 2 Not needed Dzn2 D zn 2 Automatic Dz4 D z 4 ...

Page 483: ...needed ZNd10 ZN d 10 Automatic Zz0 Z z 0 Not needed ZNz0 ZN z 0 HV side ZNzn0 ZN zn 0 HV LV side Zzn0 Z zn 0 LV side Zz2 Z z 2 Not needed ZNz2 ZN z 2 Automatic ZNzn2 ZN zn 2 Automatic Zzn2 Z zn 2 Automatic Zz4 Z z 4 Not needed ZNz4 ZN z 4 Automatic ZNzn4 ZN zn 4 Automatic Zzn4 Z zn 4 Automatic Zz6 Z z 6 Not needed ZNz6 ZN z 6 HV side ZNzn6 ZN zn 6 HV LV side Zzn6 Z zn 6 LV side Zz8 Z z 8 Not neede...

Page 484: ... connected transformers If Clock number is Clk Num 0 or Clk Num 6 the zero sequence component of the phase currents is not eliminated automatically on either side Therefore the zero sequence component on the star connected side that is grounded at its star point has to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero sequence component ...

Page 485: ...s can also be utilized during the commissioning The BLOCK input is provided for blocking the function with the logic When the function is blocked the monitored data and measured values are still available but the binary outputs are blocked When the function is blocked the direct inter trip is also blocked The PROT_ACTIVE output is always active when the protection function is capable of operating ...

Page 486: ...rip value setting is internally multiplied by the High Op value Mult setting OPR_HS_LOC AND ENA_MULT_HS ENABLE OPERATION PROT_ACTIVE from Fail safe function I_DIFF from Differential calculation High trip value Mult High trip value I Charact GUID 64B2FA70 1FCC 44D8 83EC 73EA8F880FB4 V1 EN Figure 233 Operation logic of instantaneous high stage Direct inter trip Direct inter trip is used to ensure th...

Page 487: ...ertrip function The pickup and trip signals are also provided separately for the low and high stages and in local and remote Blocking functionality There are two independent inputs that can be used for blocking the function BLOCK and BLOCK_LS The difference between these inputs is that BLOCK_LS when TRUE blocks only the stabilized low stage leaving the instantaneous high stage operative BLOCK when...

Page 488: ...elay echoes locally injected current samples back with the shifted phase The current samples that are sent to the remote protection relay are scaled with the CT ratio correction setting The operation of both stages stabilized low or instantaneous high are blocked and also the direct inter trip functionality is blocked both receive and send in the protection relay where the test mode is active The ...

Page 489: ...ly fed current phasors from the remote end By using this mode it is possible to verify that differential calculation is done correctly in each phase Also the protection communication operation is taken into account with the differential current calculation when this test mode is used Required material for testing the protection relay Calculated settings Terminal diagram Circuit diagrams Technical ...

Page 490: ... corresponding test instructions in this chapter The functions can be tested in any order according to user preferences Therefore the test instructions are presented in alphabetical order Only the functions that are in use Operation is set to On should be tested The response from the test can be viewed in different ways Binary output signals Monitored data values in the LHMI logical signals A PC w...

Page 491: ...of the individual CT secondary circuits to verify that each three phase set of main CTs is properly connected to the station ground and only at one electrical point Insulation resistance check Phase identification of CT shall be made Both the primary and the secondary sides must be disconnected from the line and the protection relay when plotting the excitation characteristics If the CT secondary ...

Page 492: ...or plastic fiber cables and 275 mm 10 9 inches for glass fiber cables Check the allowed minimum bending radius from the optical cable manufacturer Applying required settings for the protection relay Download all calculated settings and measurement transformer parameters in the protection relay Connecting test equipment to the protection relay Before testing connect the test equipment according to ...

Page 493: ...he mode when the function is on normal operation the local end protection relay sends phasors to the remote end protection relay and receives phasors measured by the remote end protection relay This mode can be used in testing the operating level and time of the low and high stages of the local end protection relay This is due to a test situation when the remote end does not measure any current an...

Page 494: ...se A The injected operate current corresponds to the set Low operate value The monitored values for ID_A should be equal to the injected current 3 Repeat point 2 by current injection in phases B and C 4 Measure the operating time by injecting the single phase current in phase A The injected current should be four times the operating current The time measurement is stopped by the trip output from t...

Page 495: ...9 Local and remote end currents presented in a web HMI of the protection relay 4 3 1 6 Application 87L is designed for the differential protection of overhead line and cable feeders in a distribution network 87L provides absolute selectivity and fast trip times as unit protection also in short lines where distance protection cannot be applied 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 seri...

Page 496: ...ypes of network configurations or topologies Case A shows the protection of a ring type distribution network The network is also used in the closed ring mode 87L is used as the main protection for different sections of the feeder In case B the interconnection of two substations is done with parallel lines and each line is protected with the line differential protection In case C the connection lin...

Page 497: ...ne is still guaranteed by blocking the line differential protection and unblocking the over current functions When a communication failure is detected the protection communication supervision function issues block for the 87L line differential protection and unblock for the instantaneous and high stages instance 2 of the over current protection These are used to give backup protection for the remo...

Page 498: ...n zone transformer 20kV 300A 1 1500A 1 PROTECTED ZONE 110kV Yd11 40MW HV LV L RED 615 RED 615 GUID 52FC4852 C9D1 4DD1 B2D7 62FCE98B7FD7 V2 EN Figure 243 In zone transformer example about CT ratio correction calculation The CT ratio correction calculation starts with the rated load current calculation for HV and LV sides The rated load current is defined as the rated power of the transformer Sectio...

Page 499: ...is time delayed for low differential currents below the high set limit and 87L coordinates with the downstream protection relays in the relevant tap For differential currents above the set limit the operation is instantaneous As a consequence when the load current of the tap is negligible the low resistive line faults are cleared instantaneously at the same time as maximum sensitivity for the high...

Page 500: ...the tapped transformer to the differential current Detection of the inrush current during transformer start up When the line is energized the transformer magnetization inrush current is seen as differential current by the line differential protection and may cause malfunction of the protection if not taken into account The inrush situation may only be detected on one end but the differential curre...

Page 501: ... situation the time delay can be selected so that the stabilized stage does not trip in the inrush situation 4 3 1 7 Signals Table 424 87L Input signals Name Type Default Description I_LOC_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A local current I_LOC_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B local current I_LOC_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C local current I_REM_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A remote current I_REM_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B remote current I_REM_C SIGNAL 0 Pha...

Page 502: ...tion true when function is operative 4 3 1 8 Settings Table 426 87L Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Low trip value 10 200 Ir 1 10 Basic setting for the stabilized stage pickup High trip value 200 4000 Ir 1 2000 Instantaneous stage trip value Pickup value 2 H 10 50 1 20 The ratio of the 2 harmonic component to fundamental component required for blocking Hig...

Page 503: ...the transformer connection group e g Dyn11 D Winding 2 type 1 y 2 yn 3 d 4 z 5 zn 1 y Connection of the LV side windings Determined by the transformer connection group e g Dyn11 yn Clock number 0 Clk Num 0 1 Clk Num 1 2 Clk Num 2 4 Clk Num 4 5 Clk Num 5 6 Clk Num 6 7 Clk Num 7 8 Clk Num 8 10 Clk Num 10 11 Clk Num 11 0 Clk Num 0 Setting the phase shift between HV and LV with clock number for connec...

Page 504: ...MPL_REM_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIr Remote phase C amplitude after correction ID_A FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Differential current phase A ID_B FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Differential current phase B ID_C FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Differential current phase C IB_A FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Stabilization current phase A IB_B FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Stabilization current phase B IB_C FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIr Stabilizat...

Page 505: ... time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 1 With the symmetrical communication channel as when using dedicated fiber optic 2 Without additional delay in the communication channel as when using dedicated fiber optic 3 Including the delay of the output contact When differential current 2 High trip value ...

Page 506: ... faults while remaining stable with high currents passing through the protected zone increasing errors on current measuring The second harmonic restraint together with the waveform based algorithms ensures that the low stage does not trip due to the transformer inrush currents The fifth harmonic restraint ensures that the low stage does not trip on apparent differential current caused by a harmles...

Page 507: ...AV OR Compensation of tap changer position Second harmonic blocking Fifth harmonic blocking Waveform blocking Differential calculation Transformer vector group matching Zero sequence component elimination BLOCK I_A1 I_B1 I_C1 I_A2 I_B2 I_C2 TAP_POS GUID C4FFDFA8 A197 4983 87D4 A6A426FE1BF1 V1 EN Figure 248 Functional module diagram Differential calculation 87T operates phase wise on a difference o...

Page 508: ...g into it This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults I I I b W W 1 2 2 GUID 1403DDDA D840 4746 A925 F426AC7A8608 V2 EN Equation 82 If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current or if the phase angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero in a normal situation the phas...

Page 509: ...V B C CmHV C A 3 3 3 GUID 88668B82 9EC4 4FE7 AFE0 71360F72543F V1 EN Equation 83 Example 2 But if vector group is Yd11 and CT connection type is according to type 1 the compensation is a little different The Winding 1 type setting is Y Winding 2 type is d and Clock number is Clk Num 11 This is compensated internally by giving winding 1 internal compensation value 0 and winding 2 internal compensat...

Page 510: ...int has to be eliminated by using the Zro A elimination parameter The same parameter has to be used to eliminate the zero sequence component if there is for example an grounding transformer on the delta connected side of the Ynd power transformer in the area to be protected In this case the vector group matching is normally made on the side of the star connection On the side of the delta connectio...

Page 511: ...nominal tap and the percentage change in voltage resulting from a deviation of one tap step The percentage value is set using the Step of tap parameter The operating range of the tap changer is defined by the Min winding tap and Max winding tap parameters The Min winding tap parameter tells the tap position number resulting in the minimum effective number of winding turns on the side of the transf...

Page 512: ...f The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic magnetizing inrushes At the recovery inrush the magnetizing current of the transformer to be protected increases momentarily when the voltage returns to normal after the clearance of a fault outside the protected area The sympathetic inrush is caused by the energization of another transformer running in parallel with t...

Page 513: ... on a different waveform and a different rate of change of the normal inrush current and the inrush current containing the fault current The algorithm does not eliminate the blocking at inrush currents unless there is a fault in the protected area The feature can also be enabled and disabled with the Harmonic deblock 2 H parameter Fifth harmonic blocking The inhibition of 87T operation in the situ...

Page 514: ...aveform blocking The biased low stage can always be blocked with waveform blocking The stage can not be disabled with the Restraint mode parameter This algorithm has two parts The first part is intended for external faults while the second is intended for inrush situations The algorithm has criteria for a low current period during inrush where also the differential current not derivative is checke...

Page 515: ... positions increases at the same percent ratio as the load current In the protection of generators the false differential current can be caused by various factors CT errors CT saturation at high currents passing through the generator GUID 0E927DF9 5641 4CAE B808 0B75EA09EA95 ANSI V1 EN Figure 252 Operation logic of the biased low stage 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI...

Page 516: ... If the differential current stays above the operating value continuously for a suitable period which is 1 1 times the fundamental cycle the OPR_LS output is activated The TRIP output is always activated when the OPR_LS output is activated The stage can be blocked internally by the second or fifth harmonic restraint or by special algorithms detecting inrush and current transformer saturation at ex...

Page 517: ...D D1C2CAED 3D58 4405 A79D 17B203A8D3A9 V4 EN Equation 87 Slope section I I d b 3 100 3 3 GUID 72224800 6EE1 48E7 9B57 4ABE89DB350C V1 EN Equation 88 The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500 percent The slope of the differential function s operating characteristic curve varies in the different sections of the range In section 1 where 0 percent Ir Ib End s...

Page 518: ...l current is required for tripping in comparison with the change in the load current The starting ratio should consider CT errors and variations in the transformer tap changer position if not compensated Too high a starting ratio should be avoided because the sensitivity of the protection for detecting inter turn faults depends basically on the starting ratio In section 3 where Ib In End section 2...

Page 519: ...etween the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero in a normal situation the phase difference is 180 degrees a fault has occurred in the area protected by 87T Then the trip value set for the instantaneous stage is automatically halved and the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited I_D I_B Slope section 2 Low trip value TRIP AREA LS NON TRIP AREA End section 1 H...

Page 520: ...king signals may return when these conditions are not valid anymore External blocking functionality 87T has three inputs for blocking When the BLOCK input is active TRUE the operation of the function is blocked but measurement output signals are still updated When the BLK_OPR_LS input is active TRUE 87T operates normally except that the OPR_LS output is not active or activated in any circumstance ...

Page 521: ...aulty transformer 87T should never trip to faults outside the protective zone 87T compares the current flowing into the transformer to the current leaving the transformer A correct analysis of fault conditions by 87T must consider the changes to voltages currents and phase angles The traditional transformer differential protection functions required auxiliary transformers for the correction of the...

Page 522: ...connecting the two CTs of each phase in parallel Generally this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and or ratio mismatch between the two windings feeders The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as the main CTs Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main CTs The most important rule in these application...

Page 523: ... winding transformer currents to a two winding protection relay The fundamental frequency component is numerically filtered with a Fourier filter DFT The filter suppresses frequencies other than the set fundamental frequency and therefore the protection relay is not adapted for measuring the output of the frequency converter that is 87T is not suited for protecting of a power transformer or motor ...

Page 524: ...on both sides of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ration Cor Wnd 2 settings First the rated load of the power transformer must be calculated on both sides when the apparent power and phase to phase voltage are known I S V nT n n 3 GUID B5467DB8 17EB 4D09 A741 1F5BB23466AA ANSI V1 EN Equation 89 InT rated load of the power transformer Sn rated power of the power transformer ...

Page 525: ...ample the rated secondary current of 5 A can be used on the HV side while 1A is used on the LV side or vice versa Example The rated power of the transformer is 25 MVA the ratio of the CTs on the 110 kV side is 300 1 and that on the 21 kV side is 1000 1 GUID DC9083B2 CB07 4F6B 8C06 52979E5F484A ANSI V1 EN Figure 260 Example of two winding power transformer differential protection The rated load of ...

Page 526: ...and zero sequence elimination Vector group of the transformer Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination Yy0 Y y Clk Num 0 Not needed YNy0 YN y Clk Num 0 HV side YNyn0 YN yn Clk Num 0 HV LV side Yyn0 Y yn Clk Num 0 LV side Yy2 Y y Clk Num 2 Not needed YNy2 YN y Clk Num 2 Not needed YNyn2 YN yn Clk Num 2 Not needed Yyn2 Y yn Clk Num 2 Not needed Yy4 Y y Clk Num 4 Not needed YNy4 Y...

Page 527: ... y Clk Num 5 Not needed Dyn5 D yn Clk Num 5 Not needed Dy7 D y Clk Num 7 Not needed Dyn7 D yn Clk Num 7 Not needed Dy11 D y Clk Num 11 Not needed Dyn11 D yn Clk Num 11 Not needed Yz1 Y z Clk Num 1 Not needed YNz1 YN z Clk Num 1 Not needed YNzn1 YN zn Clk Num 1 LV side Yzn1 Y zn Clk Num 1 Not needed Yz5 Y z Clk Num 5 Not needed YNz5 YN z Clk Num 5 Not needed YNzn5 YN zn Clk Num 5 LV side Yzn5 Y zn ...

Page 528: ...needed ZNyn11 ZN yn Clk Num 11 HV side ZNy11 ZN y Clk Num 11 Not needed Dz0 D z Clk Num 0 Not needed Dzn0 D zn Clk Num 0 LV side Dz2 D z Clk Num 2 Not needed Dzn2 D zn Clk Num 2 Not needed Dz4 D z Clk Num 4 Not needed Dzn4 D zn Clk Num 4 Not needed Dz6 D z Clk Num 6 Not needed Dzn6 D zn Clk Num 6 LV side Dz8 D z Clk Num 8 Not needed Dzn8 D zn Clk Num 8 Not needed Dz10 D z Clk Num 10 Not needed Dzn...

Page 529: ...ZN zn Clk Num 4 Not needed Zzn4 Z zn Clk Num 4 Not needed Zz6 Z z Clk Num 6 Not needed ZNz6 ZN z Clk Num 6 HV side ZNzn6 ZN zn Clk Num 6 HV LV side Zzn6 Z zn Clk Num 6 LV side Zz8 Z z Clk Num 8 Not needed ZNz8 ZN z Clk Num 8 Not needed ZNzn8 ZN zn Clk Num 8 Not needed Zzn8 Z zn Clk Num 8 Not needed Zz10 Z z Clk Num 10 Not needed ZNz10 ZN z Clk Num 10 Not needed ZNzn10 ZN zn Clk Num 10 Not needed Z...

Page 530: ...ed YNyn10 YN yn Clk Num 10 Not needed Yyn10 Y yn Clk Num 10 Not needed Yd1 Y d Clk Num 1 Not needed YNd1 YN d Clk Num 1 Not needed Yd5 Y d Clk Num 5 Not needed YNd5 YN d Clk Num 5 Not needed Yd7 Y d Clk Num 7 Not needed YNd7 YN d Clk Num 7 Not needed Yd11 Y d Clk Num 11 Not needed YNd11 YN d Clk Num 11 Not needed Dd0 D d Clk Num 0 Not needed Dd2 D d Clk Num 2 Not needed Dd4 D d Clk Num 4 Not neede...

Page 531: ...7 Not needed YNzn7 YN zn Clk Num 7 LV side Yzn7 Y zn Clk Num 7 Not needed Yz11 Y z Clk Num 11 Not needed YNz11 YN z Clk Num 11 Not needed YNzn11 YN zn Clk Num 11 LV side Yzn11 Y zn Clk Num 11 Not needed Zy1 Z y Clk Num 1 Not needed Zyn1 Z yn Clk Num 1 Not needed ZNyn1 ZN yn Clk Num 1 HV side ZNy1 ZN y Clk Num 1 Not needed Zy5 Z y Clk Num 5 Not needed Zyn5 Z yn Clk Num 5 Not needed ZNyn5 ZN yn Clk ...

Page 532: ...ge test arrangement The three phase low voltage source can be the station service transformer The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to Not in use to make sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the tap changer position When only the angle values are required the setting of Tapped winding is not needed since angle values are not affe...

Page 533: ...ting connection group Yy1 is not a supported combination Similarly if Winding 1 type is set to Y Winding 2 type is set to d and Clock number is set to Clk num 0 the resulting connection group Yd0 is not a supported combination All the non supported combinations of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type and Clock number settings result in the default connection group compensation that is Yy0 4 3 2 6 CT conn...

Page 534: ... N 1 5A N 1 5A N IAB IBB ICB P1 P2 P1 P2 S1 S2 S1 S2 GUID 0558BCDF 6310 43EB B699 47A9C4577861 V1 EN Figure 262 Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 528 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 535: ...1 5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC P2 P1 P2 P1 S1 S1 S2 S2 GUID 87B5CBC1 6128 4D49 AE38 A95F544EF5BE V1 EN Figure 263 Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 529 Technical Manual ...

Page 536: ...IB IC P1 P2 P1 P2 S1 S2 S1 S2 GUID 8A96C683 A9F6 4CCD 9407 1A3521D22C4B V1 EN Figure 264 Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the currents during an external fault Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 530 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 537: ... The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 settings 4 3 2 7 Signals Table 433 87T Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A 1 SIGNAL 0 Phase A primary current I_B 1 SIGNAL 0 Phase B primary current I_C 1 SIGNAL 0 Phase C primary current I_A 2 SIGNAL 0 Phase A secondary current I_B 2 SIGNAL 0 Phase B s...

Page 538: ...Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description High trip value 500 3000 Ir 10 1000 Instantaneous stage setting Low trip value 5 50 Ir 1 20 Basic setting for biased operation Slope section 2 10 50 1 30 Slope of the second line of the operating characteristics End section 2 100 500 Ir 1 150 Turn point between the second and the third line of the operating characteristics Restraint Mode 5...

Page 539: ...1 Type 1 CT connection type Determined by the directions of the connected current transformers Winding 1 type 1 Y 2 YN 3 D 4 Z 5 ZN 1 Y Connection of the HV side windings Determined by the transformer connection group e g Dyn11 D Winding 2 type 1 y 2 yn 3 d 4 z 5 zn 1 y Connection of the LV side windings Determined by the transformer connection group e g Dyn11 yn Clock number 0 Clk Num 0 1 Clk Num...

Page 540: ...tage corresponding one step of the tap changer 4 3 2 9 Monitored data Table 439 87T Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase C BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 2nd harmonic restraint block phase A status BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 2nd harmonic restraint bloc...

Page 541: ... xIr Connection group compensated primary current phase A I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIr Connection group compensated primary current phase B I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIr Connection group compensated primary current phase C I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIr Connection group compensated secondary current phase A I_AMPL_B2 FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIr Connection group compensated secondary current ph...

Page 542: ...ween LV PhBPhC Angle diff betw LV PhCPhA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle difference between LV PhCPhA Angle diff betw HVLV PhA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle difference between HVLV PhA Angle diff betw HVLV PhB FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle difference between HVLV PhB Angle diff betw HVLV PhC FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Angle difference between HVLV PhC I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0 00 1 00 Differential c...

Page 543: ...w stage High stage 36 ms 21 ms 41 ms 22 ms 46 ms 24 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Current before fault 0 0 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the output contact When differential current 2 set operate value and fn 50 Hz 4 3 2 11 Technical revision h...

Page 544: ...r resistor are required The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual current of the phase currents the neutral current differential currents and stabilizing currents The operating characteristics are according to the definite time The function contains a blocking functionality The neutral current second harmonic is used for blocking during the transformer inrush...

Page 545: ...oduct of the differential current and cosφ The value is available in the monitored data view ID COSPHI I IG _ cos Σ ϕ GUID FC03064F 5C0D 45D8 A329 DA66D2BB81BC V1 EN Equation 91 ΣI GUID 87E4DEDD 9288 41D9 B608 714CF3CC7A04 V1 EN Residual current ϕ GUID C4F98C50 7279 4DAA 8C77 5C761572F4B4 V1 EN Phase difference between the residual and neutral currents IG GUID 7C75357D 9279 490A AF0F B1E2F31119FE ...

Page 546: ...urrent and the neutral current is less than 90 degrees in situations where there is no ground fault in the protected area Thus tripping is possible only when the phase difference between the residual current and the neutral current is above 90 degrees The stabilizing current IB used by the stabilizing current principle is calculated as an average of the phase currents in the windings to be protect...

Page 547: ...above 2 percent otherwise reset time is started To calculate the directional differential current ID_COSPHI the fundamental frequency amplitude of both the residual and neutral currents has to be above 4 percent of In If neither or only one condition is fulfilled at a time the cosφ term is forced to 1 After the conditions are fulfilled both currents must stay above 2 percent of In to allow the con...

Page 548: ... of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operate timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are...

Page 549: ... is Type 2 The connection examples of Type 2 are as shown in figures and The default value of the CT connection type setting is Type 1 If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite the CT connection type setting parameter is Type 1 The connection examples of Type 1 are as shown in figures 270 and 271 If the positive directions of the winding 1 and...

Page 550: ...ituation Both groundings are inside the area to be protected A B C 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N I_A I_B I_C 1 5A N IG P2 P1 P2 P1 S1 S1 S2 S2 GUID 1E53D59D 9402 45EA 8849 210B413BB8BD V Figure 271 Connection of the current transformers of Type 1 The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external ground fault situation Both groundings are outside the area to be pro...

Page 551: ... and neutral grounding is outside the area to be protected A B C 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N I_A I_B I_C P1 P2 S1 S2 1 5A N IG P2 P1 S1 S2 GUID D870C784 0241 4DC6 B937 B27850200227 V1 EN Figure 273 Connection of the current transformers of Type 2 The phase currents and the neutral current have equal directions at an external ground fault situation Phase grounding is outside and neutral grounding is insid...

Page 552: ...ion is internally restrained or blocked Hence the protection is not sensitive to an external fault A B Ia 0 Ib 0 Ib 0 Ic 0 I Io zone of protection C a b c IN Izs1 Izs1 Izs1 Io IN Reference is Neutral Current Restrain for external fault Operate for internal fault For external fault Uzs GUID FAC5E4AD A4A7 4D39 9EAC C380EA33CB78 V2 EN Figure 274 Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault Secti...

Page 553: ... differential protection relay the inrush current represents the differential current which causes the protection relay to trip almost always when the transformer is connected to the network Typically the inrush current contains a large amount of second harmonics The blocking also prevents unwanted operation at the recovery and sympathetic magnetizing inrushes At the recovery inrush the magnetizin...

Page 554: ...ut signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup BLK2H BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic block 4 3 3 7 Settings Table 444 87LOZREF Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Trip value 5 0 50 0 In 1 0 5 0 Trip value Table 445 87LOZREF Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum trip time 40 300000 ms 1 40 Minimum tr...

Page 555: ...00 Ratio of pickup time trip time RES2H BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True 2nd harmonic restraint IDIFF FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIn Differential current IBIAS FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 xIn Stabilization current 87LOZREF Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 3 3 9 Technical data Table 449 87LOZREF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured...

Page 556: ...rom In to C Internal Improvement 4 3 4 High impedance differential protection 87A 87B 87C 4 3 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number High impedance differential protection for phase A HIAPDIF dHi_A 87A High impedance differential protection for phase B HIBPDIF dHi_B 87B High impedance differential protection for phase...

Page 557: ...he set limit The operate time characteristics are according to definite time DT The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timer or the whole function 4 3 4 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 87A 87B 87C can be described ...

Page 558: ...nt settings Level detector The module compares differential currents I_A calculated by the peak to peak measurement mode to the set Operate value The Timer module is activated if the differential current exceeds the value of the Operate value setting Timer Once activated Timer activates the PICKUP output The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer reaches the value set by T...

Page 559: ...ock TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 3 4 5 Application 87A 87B 87C provides a secure and dependable protection scheme against all types of faults The high impedance principle is used for differential protection due to its capability to manage the through faults also with the heavy current transformer CT saturation For current transformer recomm...

Page 560: ...s Rm 2 are also shown in Figure 279 Figure 279 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and outgoing feeder To keep it simple the voltage dependent resistor Ru is not included The wiring resistances are presented as total wiring resistances Rm1 and Rm2 Rm1 is the maximum wiring resistance concerning all incoming feeder sets whereas Rm2 is the maximum wiring resistance conc...

Page 561: ... secondary currents and their emf voltages E1 and E2 are opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current If an in zone fault occurs the secondary currents have the same direction The relay measures the sum of the currents as a differential and trips the circuit breaker If the fault current goes through only one CT its secondary emf magnetizes the opposite CT that is E1...

Page 562: ...hs one through the protection relay measuring branch Rs relay and the other through the saturated CT Rm Rin2 The protection relay must not operate during the saturation This is achieved by increasing the relay impedance by using the stabilizing resistor Rs which forces the majority of the differential current to flow through the saturated CT As a result the relay operation is avoided that is the r...

Page 563: ...arts of the CT secondary current waveform the non saturated part of the current waveform causes the protection to operate GUID D8F15382 5E3F 4371 B2AD 936D72941803 V1 EN Figure 282 Secondary waveform of a saturated CT The secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs connection wires and the protection relay because of the stabilizing resistance and CT saturation A v...

Page 564: ...ows an example of a phase segregated single busbar protection employing high impedance differential protection The example system consists of a single incoming busbar feeder and two outgoing busbar feeders The CTs from both the outgoing busbar feeders and the incoming busbar feeders are connected in parallel with the polarity During normal load conditions the total instantaneous incoming current i...

Page 565: ...he bus coupler When the bus coupler is in the open position each section of the busbar handles the current flow independently that is the instantaneous incoming current is equal to the total instantaneous outgoing current and the difference current is negligible The difference current is no longer zero with a fault in the busbar and the protection operates With the bus coupler in the closed positi...

Page 566: ...ncoming Outgoing Feeder for Zone B Bus coupler GUID 4149A38D C708 4945 A004 75B13F4E0B4A V1 EN Figure 284 Differential protection on busbar with bus coupler Single phase representation Flux balancing principle 87A 87B 87C can be used to realize flux balance based phase segregated three phase differential protection Stabilizing resistors are not needed in this application as core balance current tr...

Page 567: ...tected zone When fault occurs within the protected zone the currents flowing through the core balance transformer add up so that the differential protection trips when the differential current exceeds its threshold 87A 87B 87C uses the peak to peak measurement mode 4 3 4 6 Example calculations for busbar high impedance differential protection The protected object in the example for busbar differen...

Page 568: ...00 1A 2000 1A Y 2000 1A Y GUID 97462931 644F 4EFD 8C9A AF61A3C870B8 V1 EN Figure 286 Example for busbar differential protection Bus data Vn 20 kV In 2000 A Ikmax 25 kA 10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer CT data is assumed to be CT 2000 1 A Rin 15 75 Ω Vkn 436 V Ie 7 mA at Ukn Rm 1Ω Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 562 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 569: ... 9B9B81AE DAA9 4D9A 823F 4D239D257E80 V2 EN Equation 96 The sensitivity of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 97 R V A S 209 37 0 034 6160 Ω GUID A240913A 74ED 4A49 8746 182E0F53824F V1 EN Equation 97 The calculated value is the maximum value for the stabilizing resistor If the value is not available the next available value below should be selected and the protection relay s...

Page 570: ... VDR manual assuming that to be approximately 2 mA at stabilizing voltage Iu A 0 002 GUID 5E213E2C 39C4 4BC5 A8B7 514B599B0976 V1 EN Equation 103 The sensitivity of the protection can be recalculated taking into account the leakage current through the VDR as per Equation 104 I A A A A prim 2000 0 035 10 0 0034 0 002 142 GUID 1C855302 2D84 4B81 8DD8 EC3B1EAE1315 V2 EN Equation 104 4 3 4 7 Signals T...

Page 571: ...up 4 3 4 8 Settings Table 457 87A Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Trip value 1 0 200 0 In 1 0 5 0 Pickup value percentage of the nominal current Minimum trip time 20 300000 ms 10 20 Minimum trip time Table 458 87A Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Tab...

Page 572: ...ription Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time Table 463 87C Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Trip value 1 0 200 0 In 1 0 5 0 Pickup value percentage of the nominal current Minimum trip time 20 300000 ms 10 20 Minimum trip time Table 464 87C Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disabl...

Page 573: ...Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 87C Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 3 4 10 Technical data Table 469 87A 87B 87C Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Pickup time1 2 Minimu...

Page 574: ...changed from HIPDIF to HIAPDIF HIBPDIF HICPDIF 4 3 5 Motor differential protection 87G 4 3 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Motor differential protection MPDIF 3dI M 87G 87M 4 3 5 2 Function block TRIP OPR_LS I_C2 87G 87M BLOCK BLK_OPR_LS BLK_OPR_HS OPR_HS INT_BLKD I_A1 I_B1 I_C1 I_A2 I_B2 GUID DB494388 9E4F 42F...

Page 575: ...ing inrush currents which can be present at the switching operations overvoltages or external faults 4 3 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 87G 87M can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections GUID 206742C6 ...

Page 576: ...es the biasing current to be considerably smaller which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults The traditional way for calculating the stabilized current is I I I b 1 2 2 GUID 34FA472E E419 4A0E 94A3 238D7A3CE5ED V1 EN Equation 106 The module calculates the bias current for all three phases Through fault detection Through fault TF detection module is for detecting whether the fa...

Page 577: ...e machine or 3 3 times that ofLow trip value whichever is smaller The temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant of one second This feature should be used in case of networks where very long time constants are expected The temporary sensitivity limit is higher to the set operating characteristics In other words the temporary limit has superposed the unch...

Page 578: ...Accordingly the end of the second section End section 2 can be set within the range of 100 percent to 300 percent or In The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different parts of the range In section 1 where 0 0 Ib In End section 1 the differential current required for tripping is constant The value of the differential current is the same as the Low trip value se...

Page 579: ... by the operating characteristics the OPR_LS output is activated The TRIP output is always activated when the OPR_LS output activates The trip signal due to the biased stage can be blocked by the activation of the BLK_OPR_LS or BLOCK input Also when the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the waveform blocking functionality the INT_BLKD output is activated according to the phase inform...

Page 580: ...h trip value or when the instantaneous peak values of the differential current exceed 2 5 High trip value The factor 2 5 1 8 2 is due to the maximum asymmetric short circuit current The TRIP output is always activated when the OPR_HS output activates The internal blocking signals of the function block do not prevent the operation of the instantaneous stage When required the trip signal due to inst...

Page 581: ...ted that interturn faults in the same phase are usually not detected unless they developed into some other kind of fault The short circuit between the phases of the stator windings normally causes large fault currents The short circuit creates a risk of damages to the insulation windings and stator core The large short circuit currents cause large current forces which can damage other components i...

Page 582: ...chine current differential protection is normally the best alternative for the phase to phase short circuits The risk of an unwanted differential protection operation caused by the current transformer saturation is a universal differential protection problem If a big synchronous machine is tripped in connection to an external short circuit it gives an increased risk of a power system collapse Besi...

Page 583: ...ry high compared to the rated currents of the current transformers Due to the instantaneous stage of the differential function block it is sufficient that the current transformers are capable of repeating the current required for an instantaneous tripping during the first cycle Thus the current transformers usually are able to reproduce the asymmetric fault current without saturating within the ne...

Page 584: ...a bus fault leads to very high fault currents and thermal stress Therefore reenergizing is not preferred in this case The remanence can be neglected The maximum through going fault current Ikmax is typically 6 IR for a motor At a short circuit fault close to the supply transformer the DC time constant Tdc of the fault current is almost the same as that of the transformer the typical value being 10...

Page 585: ...racy limit factor equation cannot be reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for Fa there are two alternatives to deal with the situation 1 A current transformer with a higher rated burden Sn can be chosen which also means a higher rated accurate limit Fn 2 A current transformer with a higher nominal primary current I1n but the same rated burden can be chosen Alternative 2 is more cost ef...

Page 586: ...sh or start currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it is connected to the network special attention is required for the performance and the burdens of the current transformers and the settings of the function block Connection of current transformers If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite the CT connection ty...

Page 587: ... 291 Connection of current transformer of Type 1 example 1 A B C 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N IAB IBB ICB 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC P2 P1 P2 P1 S1 S1 S2 S2 GUID 51666F94 A1D6 4E80 8502 ABC0998CF70D V1 EN Figure 292 Connection of current transformer of Type 1 example 2 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 581 Technical Manual ...

Page 588: ... 293 Connection of current transformer of Type 2 example 1 A B C 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N IAB IBB ICB 1 5A N 1 5A N 1 5A N IA IB IC P1 P2 P1 P2 S1 S2 S1 S2 GUID A8CAC49E 5AED 4265 9ACF 0D7F4FDAC9AC V1 EN Figure 294 Connection of current transformer of Type 2 example 2 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 582 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 589: ...8E 6A69 43F1 848B 6AA364E130B7 V1 EN Figure 295 AC saturation When having a short circuit in a power line the short circuit current contains a DC component The magnitude of the DC component depends on the phase angle when the short circuit occurs Figure 296 shows the secondary current of the CT in the fault situation Because of the DC component the flux reaches its maximum value at 0 07 seconds ca...

Page 590: ...tion TRIP BOOLEAN Trip OPR_LS BOOLEAN Trip from low set OPR_HS BOOLEAN Trip from high set INT_BLKD BOOLEAN Internal block status 4 3 5 7 Settings Table 473 87G 87M Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Low trip value 5 30 Ir 1 5 Basic setting for the stabilized stage pickup High trip value 100 1000 Ir 10 500 Instantaneous stage trip value Slope section 2 10 50 1...

Page 591: ...ta Table 476 87G 87M Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Trip phase C INT_BLKD_A BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase A INT_BLKD_B BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase B INT_BLKD_C BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Internal block status phase C ID_A F...

Page 592: ...2 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side Phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side Phase C 87G Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status IA diff FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IA IB diff FLOAT32 0 00 80 00 Measured differential current amplitude pha...

Page 593: ... time 20 ms 1 Fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the power output contact 4 4 Unbalance protection 4 4 1 Negative sequence overcurrent protection 46 4 4 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Negative sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC I2 46 4 4 1 2 Func...

Page 594: ...ars The IDMT mode provides current dependent timer characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timers or the function itself if desired 4 4 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 46 can be described using a modul...

Page 595: ...an be set to Immediate Def time reset or Inverse reset The reset curve type Immediate causes an immediate reset With the reset curve type Def time reset the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting With the reset curve type Inverse reset the reset time depends on the current during the drop off situation The PICKUP output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed The Inverse reset ...

Page 596: ...itive operation than the normal phase overcurrent protection for fault conditions occurring between two phases The negative sequence overcurrent protection also provides a back up protection functionality for the feeder ground fault protection in solid and low resistance grounded networks The negative sequence overcurrent protection provides the back up ground fault protection on the high voltage ...

Page 597: ...Pickup value 0 01 5 00 xIn 0 01 0 30 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0 8 10 0 0 1 1 0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Time multiplier 0 05 15 00 0 01 1 00 Time multiplier in IEC ANSI IDMT curves Trip delay time 40 200000 ms 10 40 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1 ANSI Ext Inv 2 ANSI Very Inv 3 ANSI Norm Inv 4 ANSI Mod Inv 5 ANSI DT 6 LT Ext Inv 7 LT Very Inv 8 LT Inv 9 IEC Norm Inv 10 ...

Page 598: ...r C 0 02 2 00 1 2 00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0 46 30 00 1 29 10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve Table 483 46 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Minimum trip time 20 60000 ms 1 20 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Reset delay tim...

Page 599: ...current before fault 0 0 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 3 Maximum Pickup value 2 5 In Pickup value multiples in range of 1 5 20 4 4 1 10 Technical revision history Table 486 46 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for the Trip delay time setting C...

Page 600: ...h DT characteristic The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function output timer or the function itself if desired 4 4 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 46PD can be described by using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram...

Page 601: ... reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the...

Page 602: ...es better sensitivity and stability compared to plain negative sequence current protection since the calculated ratio of positive sequence and negative sequence currents is relatively constant during load variations The unbalance of the network is detected by monitoring the negative sequence and positive sequence current ratio where the negative sequence current value is I2 and I1 is the positive ...

Page 603: ... Default Description I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 488 46PD Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 serie...

Page 604: ...elay time Min phase current 0 05 0 30 xIn 0 01 0 10 Minimum phase current 4 4 2 8 Monitored data Table 492 46PD Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time RATIO_I2_I1 FLOAT32 0 00 999 99 Measured current ratio I2 I1 46PD Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 4 2 9 Technical data Table 493 46PD Te...

Page 605: ...EC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC I2 46R 4 4 3 2 Function block PICKUP I2 46R TRIP BLOCK GUID 79DAF62E ACEA 438B AC8A D355CB3D1CA5 V1 EN Figure 303 Function block 4 4 3 3 Functionality The phase reversal protection function 46R is used to detect the reversed connection of the phases to a three phase motor by monitoring the negative phase seque...

Page 606: ... value the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer module Timer Once activated the timer activates the PICKUP output When the operation timer has reached the set Trip delay time value the TRIP output is activated If the fault disappears before the module trips the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value of 200 ms the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output i...

Page 607: ...operating signal that disconnects the motor from the supply 4 4 3 6 Signals Table 495 46R Input signals Name Type Default Description I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 496 46R Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 4 4 3 7 Settings Table 497 46R Group settings Basic Parameter Values ...

Page 608: ... 2 0 set Pickup value 23 ms 25 ms 28 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Negative sequence current before 0 0 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal outpu...

Page 609: ... negative sequence current flow in the motor For example a 5 percent voltage unbalance produces a stator negative sequence current of 30 percent of the full load current which can severely heat the motor 46M detects the large negative sequence current and disconnects the motor The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timers or the function itself ...

Page 610: ...cted For the IDMT curves it is possible to define minimum and maximum trip times with the Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings The Machine time Mult setting parameter corresponds to the machine constant equal to the I2 2t constant of the machine as stated by the machine manufacturer In case there is a mismatch between the used CT and the protected motor s nominal current values it is p...

Page 611: ... the current the higher the current the shorter the trip time The trip time calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Pickup value and the PICKUP output is activated The TRIP output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overcurrent situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode The set value depends on...

Page 612: ... are cleared Inv curve B The inverse time equation for curve type B is t s k I I I I r S r 2 2 2 GUID 805DCB50 71D2 4721 830B 3343E1A5500B V1 EN Equation 119 t s Trip time in seconds k Machine time Mult I2 Negative sequence current IS Set Pickup value Ir Set Rated current If the fault disappears the negative sequence current drops below the Pickup value setting and the PICKUP output is deactivated...

Page 613: ...duces phase currents approximately 1 7 times the previous load in each healthy phase and zero current in the open phase The negative sequence currents flow through the stator windings inducing negative sequence voltage in the rotor windings This can result in a high rotor current that damages the rotor winding The frequency of the induced current is approximately twice the supply frequency Due to ...

Page 614: ...Trip delay time Table 505 46M Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Maximum trip time 500000 7200000 ms 1000 1000000 Max trip time regardless of the inverse characteristic Minimum trip time 100 120000 ms 1 100 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves Cooling time 5 7200 s 1 50 Time required to cool the ...

Page 615: ...3 25 ms 28 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical value or 20 ms3 Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Negative sequence current before 0 0 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 ...

Page 616: ...n breakdown The three phase overvoltage function includes a settable value for the detection of overvoltage either in a single phase two phases or three phases 59 includes both definite time DT and inverse definite minimum time IDMT characteristics for the delay of the trip The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desir...

Page 617: ...o ground or phase to phase voltages for protection For the voltage IDMT operation mode the used IDMT curve equations contain discontinuity characteristics The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing undesired operation For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of the Curve Sat Relative setting see the IDMT curve saturation of the over voltage protection section in th...

Page 618: ...rop off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time the Timer is reset and the PICKUP output is deactivated When the IDMT operate time curve is selected the functionality of the Timer in the drop off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve and Reset delay time settings Table 510 Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected Reset functionality Setting Type of ...

Page 619: ...lso presented The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum trip time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protect...

Page 620: ...The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is preselected with the global Blocking mode setting The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the TRIP is blocked and the Timers are reset In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block TRIP output mode the fun...

Page 621: ...tor Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders leaving the generator isolated or feeding a very small load This causes a sudden rise in the terminal voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed If a load sensitive to overvoltage remains connected it leads to equipment damage It is essential to provide power frequency overvoltage protection in the form of time delayed elemen...

Page 622: ...f time reset Table 516 59 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Num of pickup phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for trip activation Curve parameter A 0 005 200 000 1 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0 50 100 00 ...

Page 623: ...he frequency of the measured voltage fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Vn Pickup time1 2 Minimum Typical Maximum UFault 1 1 set Pickup value 23 ms 27 ms 31 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Depends on the set Relative hysteresis Retardation time 35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode 5 0 of the theoretical va...

Page 624: ...CA 497C B2F1 BC4F1DA415B6 ANSI V1 EN Figure 310 Function block 4 5 2 3 Functionality The three phase undervoltage protection function 27 is used to disconnect from the network devices for example electric motors which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions 27 includes a settable value for the detection of undervoltage either in a single phase two phases or three phases ...

Page 625: ...y return back to the hysteresis area The Voltage selection setting is used for selecting the phase to ground or phase to phase voltages for protection For the voltage IDMT mode of operation the used IDMT curve equations contain discontinuity characteristics The Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing unwanted operation For more detailed description on IDMT curves and usage of Curve Sat R...

Page 626: ...utput is activated When the user programmable IDMT curve is selected the trip time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A Curve parameter B Curve parameter C Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E If a drop off situation occurs that is a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is exceeded the reset state is activated The behavior in the drop off situation depends ...

Page 627: ...e Setting has no effect Setting has no effect Frozen timer Operation timer is frozen during drop off Def time reset Freeze Op timer Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay time has elapsed Linear decrease Operation timer value linearly decreases during the drop off situation Def time reset Decrease Op timer Operate timer is reset after the set Reset delay time has elapsed 1MAC059074 MB A ...

Page 628: ... IDMT trip times The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used The Minimum trip time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum trip time setting For more information see the IDMT curves for overcurrent pr...

Page 629: ... blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the Timers are reset In the Block TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated The Freeze timers mode of blocking has no effect during the Inverse reset mode 4 5 2 5 Timer characteristics The operating curve types supported by 27 are Table 522 Supported IDMT operate curve types Op...

Page 630: ... ground faults unsymmetrical voltage increase 27 prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy In many cases 27 is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system 4 5 2 7 Signals Table 523 27 Input signals Name Type Default Description V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground vol...

Page 631: ...reset Table 527 27 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Num of pickup phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required for trip activation Curve parameter A 0 005 200 000 1 1 000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0 50 100 00 1 1 00 ...

Page 632: ...eration 4 5 2 9 Monitored data Table 529 27 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 27 Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 5 2 10 Technical data Table 530 27 Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value...

Page 633: ...0 20 4 5 2 11 Technical revision history Table 531 27 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 05 to 0 01 for the Time multiplier setting C Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3 0 to 10 0 and default value changed from 2 0 to 0 0 D Added setting Type of time reset 4 5 3 Residual overvoltage protection 59N 59G 4 5 3 1 Identification Function description...

Page 634: ...D0 ANSI V1 EN Figure 314 Functional module diagram Level detector The residual voltage is compared to the set Pickup value If the value exceeds the set Pickup value the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer The residual voltage can be selected with the VG V0 Select setting The options are Measured VG and Calculated V0 If Measured VG is selected the voltage ratio for VG channel is give...

Page 635: ...ps the reset timer is activated If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes i...

Page 636: ...the same amount in the whole system and does not provide any guidance in finding the faulty component Therefore this function is often used as a back up protection or as a release signal for the feeder ground fault protection The protection can also be used for the ground fault protection of generators and motors and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks The ground voltage can be calcula...

Page 637: ...meter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 5 3 8 Monitored data Table 537 59N 59G Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time 59N 59G Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 5 3 9 Technical data Table 538 59N 59G Technical data Characteristic...

Page 638: ...ative sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV U2 47 4 5 4 2 Function block GUID CDC32940 936F 4DC6 8E78 1F4D7965EA96 ANSI V1 EN Figure 315 Function block 4 5 4 3 Functionality The negative sequence overvoltage protection function 47 is used to detect negative sequence overvoltage conditions 47 is used for the protection of machines he function picks up when the negative sequence voltage exceeds the...

Page 639: ...s the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time The value is available in the monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can ...

Page 640: ...7 operation can be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm The latter can be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the rotating machines If there is a considerable degree of voltage unbalance in the network the rotating machines should not be connected to the network at all This logic can be implemented by inhibiting the closure...

Page 641: ...ues Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 543 47 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 4 5 4 8 Monitored data Table 544 47 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time ...

Page 642: ...nce voltage before fault 0 0 Vn fn 50 Hz negative sequence overvoltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 5 4 10 Technical revision history Table 546 NSPTOV Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal change C Internal improvement D Internal im...

Page 643: ...reaker The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage drops below the set limit 47U 27PS operates with the definite time DT characteristics The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function itself if desired 4 5 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The correspon...

Page 644: ...function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The B...

Page 645: ... since that requires a higher setting value The loss of synchronism of a generator means that the generator is unable to operate as a generator with the network frequency but enters into an unstable condition in which it operates by turns as a generator and a motor Such a condition stresses the generator thermally and mechanically This kind of loss of synchronism should not be mixed with the one b...

Page 646: ...able Internal Blocking Table 551 47U 27PS Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 552 47U 27PS Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time Relative hysteresis 1 0 5 0 0 1 4 0 Relative hysteresis for operati...

Page 647: ...n where n 2 3 4 5 1 Pickup value 1 0 Vn positive sequence voltage before fault 1 1 Vn fn 50 Hz positive sequence undervoltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 5 5 10 Technical revision history Table 555 47U 27PS Technical revision history Technical revision Chan...

Page 648: ...up when the excitation level exceeds the set limit and trips when the set tripping time has elapsed The tripping time characteristic can be selected to be either definite time DT or overexcitation inverse definite minimum time overexcitation type IDMT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs reset timer or the function itself if desired 4 5 6 4 O...

Page 649: ...e used If the Voltage selection setting is set to phase to ground or phase to phase the Phase supervision setting is used for determining which phases or phase to phase voltages A or AB B or BC and C or CA and currents are to be used for the calculation of the induced voltage Table 556 Voltages and currents used for induced voltage emf E calculation Voltage selection setting Phase supervision sett...

Page 650: ...r if the measured voltage Vm is to be used in the excitation level calculation then by setting the leakage reactance value to zero the calculated induced voltage E is equal to the measured voltage The calculated V f ratio is scaled to a value based on the nominal Vn fn ratio However the highest allowed continuous voltage in Vn can be defined by setting the parameter Voltage Max Cont to change the ...

Page 651: ...rves the reset operation is as described in the Timer characteristics chapter For the IDMT curves it is possible to define the maximum and minimum trip times via the Minimum trip time and Maximum trip time settings The Maximum trip time setting is used to prevent infinite pickup situations at low degrees of overexcitation The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times The acti...

Page 652: ...ports four overexcitation IDMT characteristic curves OvExt IDMT Crv1 OvExt IDMT Crv2 OvExt IDMT Crv3 and OvExt IDMT Crv4 Overexcitation inverse definite minimum time curve IDMT In the inverse time modes the trip time depends on the momentary value of the excitation the higher the excitation level the shorter the trip time The trip time calculation or integration starts immediately when the excitat...

Page 653: ...uses its value to become zero when the reset time elapses during the reset period If a fault reoccurs the integration continues from the current integral value and the pickup time is adjusted as shown in Figure 321 The pickup time becomes the value at the time when the fault dropped off minus the amount of reset time that occurred If the reset period elapses without a fault being detected the save...

Page 654: ...n seconds M Excitation level V f ratio or volts hertz in pu k Time multiplier setting The constant 60 in Equation 122 converts time from minutes to seconds Table 557 Parameters a b and c for different IDMT curves Operating curve type setting a b c OvExt IDMT Crv1 2 5 115 00 4 886 OvExt IDMT Crv2 2 5 113 50 3 040 OvExt IDMT Crv3 2 5 108 75 2 443 Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 648 61...

Page 655: ...tion IDMT curve 4 The base equation for the IDMT curve OvExt IDMT Crv4 is t s d k M 0 18 1 2 GUID 361FE32F D157 402D BC70 D568AB809339 V1 EN Equation 123 t s Trip time in seconds d Constant delay setting in milliseconds M Excitation value V f ratio or volts hertz in pu k Time multiplier setting 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 649 Technical Manual ...

Page 656: ...bove the set value when BLK_RESTART is active the TRIP output is activated immediately If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is not active but COOL_ACTIVE is active the TRIP output is not activated instantly In this case the remaining part of the cooling timer affects the calculation of the operation timer as shown in Figure 324 This compensates for the heating eff...

Page 657: ...al to the voltage and inversely proportional to the frequency the overexcitation protection calculates the relative V Hz ratio instead of measuring the flux density directly The nominal level nominal voltage at nominal frequency is usually considered as the 100 percent level which can be exceeded slightly based on the design The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station wh...

Page 658: ...nts such as loss of load A high phase to ground voltage does not mean overexcitation For example in an ungrounded power system a single phase to ground fault means high voltages of the healthy two phases to ground but no overexcitation on any winding The phase to phase voltages remain essentially unchanged An important voltage to be considered for the overexcitation is the voltage between the two ...

Page 659: ...at the rated load and this value to be used as the base for overexcitation Usually the V f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1 00 at the nominal voltage and nominal frequency Therefore the value 100 percent for the setting Voltage Max Cont is recommended If the Voltage Max Cont setting is 105 percent the excitation level M of the machine is calculated with the equation Excitationl...

Page 660: ...0 2636 s as per Equation but the Minimum trip time setting limits the trip time to 1 0 s The Maximum trip time setting limits the trip time to 1000 s if the excitation level stays between 1 1 and 1 16 In general however the excitation level seldom remains constant Therefore the exact trip times in any inverse time mode are difficult to predict Example 4 In this case the function operation is accor...

Page 661: ...occurs after 15 20 s At the excitation level of 1 42 the time to tripping would be 5 90 s as per the two dots in Figure 326 In this case the setting Maximum trip time 3600 s does not limit the maximum trip time because the trip time at Pickup value 110 1 1 pu is approximately 75 s 4 5 6 7 Signals Table 558 24 Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Pha...

Page 662: ...locking reconnection of an overheated machine COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN Signal to indicate machine is in cooling process 4 5 6 8 Settings Table 560 24 Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 100 200 1 100 Over excitation pickup value Operating curve type 5 ANSI DT 15 IEC DT 17 OvExt IDMT Crv1 18 OvExt IDMT Crv2 19 OvExt IDMT Crv3 20 OvExt IDMT Crv4 15 IEC D...

Page 663: ...Leakage reactance of the machine Voltage Max Cont 80 160 1 110 Maximum allowed continuous operating voltage ratio Table 562 24 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 100 Resetting time of the trip time counter in DT mode Minimum trip time 200 60000 ms 10 200 Minimum trip time for IDMT curves 4 5 6 9 Monitored data Table 563 2...

Page 664: ...istribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 5 7 Low voltage ride through protection 27RT 4 5 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Low voltage ride through protection LVRTPTUV U RT 27RT 4 5 7 2 Function block V_A_AB V_B_BC V_C_CA 27RT TRIP BLOCK PICKUP V1 GUID 64E07123 ED63 47...

Page 665: ...rvoltage detection depends on Voltage selection setting All selectable options are based on fundamental frequency components Function uses phase to ground voltages when Voltage selection is set to Highest Ph to E or Lowest Ph to E and phase to phase voltages when Voltage selection is set to Highest Ph to Ph or Lowest Ph to Ph When the Voltage selection setting is set to Highest Ph to E Lowest Ph t...

Page 666: ...the function does not reset until maximum recovery time under consideration has elapsed that is PICKUP output remains active LVRT curve is defined using time voltage settings coordinates The settings available are Recovery time 1 Recovery time 10 and Voltage level 1 Voltage level 10 The number of coordinates required to define a LVRT curve is set by Active coordinate settings When Recovery time 1 ...

Page 667: ... 5 Voltage level 1 0 0Vn 0 7Vn Voltage pickup value 0 9Vn Time in ms Point of fault 150 0 700 3000 1500 Recovery time 3 Voltage level 3 Voltage xVn GUID 234F7C66 9EC0 42B3 8B8E E370B4305DB1 V1 EN Figure 330 Low voltage ride through example curve B Table 565 Settings for example A and B Settings Curve A Curve B Voltage start value 0 9 Un 0 9 Un Active coordinates 3 5 Voltage level 1 0 2 Un 0 Un Rec...

Page 668: ...le of operation of 27RT protection function set to operate with Num of pickup phases set to Exactly 2 of 3 and Voltage selection as Lowest Ph to Ph voltage Time in ms Vn Voltage xVn TRIP PICKUP Voltage pickup value PICKUP Num of start phases Exactly 2 of 3 Voltage selection Lowest Ph to Ph TRIP V_AB V_CA V_BC 100ms GUID 532E4687 DF59 4DA7 9F93 6186FBA14C64 V1 EN Figure 331 Typical example of opera...

Page 669: ...rough FRT and are described by a voltage versus time characteristics Typical LVRT behavior of a distributed generation can be divided into three areas according to the variation in voltage over time At the time of system faults the magnitude of the voltage may dip to Voltage level 1 for time defined by Recovery time 1 The generating unit has to remain connected to the network during such condition...

Page 670: ...ion incorporates four types of LVRT curves which satisfy most of the power system needs Grid operators can fine tune the LVRT curve by setting the parameters as per their requirement making the use simpler in comparison with different conventional undervoltage protection with different operate time setting and logics 4 5 7 6 Signals Table 566 27RT Input signals Name Type Default Description V_A_AB...

Page 671: ...LVRT curve Voltage level 6 0 00 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 6th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 7 0 00 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 7th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 8 0 00 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 8th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 9 0 00 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 9th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 10 0 00 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 90 ...

Page 672: ... value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Tested for Num of pickup phases 1 out of 3 results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 5 8 Voltage vector shift protection 78V 4 5 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number...

Page 673: ...ure 334 Functional module diagram Vector shift detector This module measures the duration of each cycle of the voltage signal phase The duration of the present cycle is compared to the previous cycle considered as reference When the mains is lost a sudden change is seen in the cycle length if loading of the generator changes suddenly and power mismatch or unbalance generation vs load in the island...

Page 674: ...and VSHIFT_C_CA or positive sequence voltage V1SHIFT which resulted in the activation of last TRIP output are available in the Monitored data view The activation of BLOCK input deactivates the INT_BLKD output GUID 174B2AC6 B830 4A0D B072 80FFF3EBF159 V1 EN Figure 335 Vector shift during Loss of Mains Pulse timer Once the Pulse timer is activated it activates the TRIP output The pulse length of TRI...

Page 675: ...distributed generators are incompatible with the current reclosing practices During the reclosing sequence dead time the generators in the network tend to drift out of synchronism with the grid and reconnecting them without synchronizing may damage the generators introducing high currents and voltages in the neighboring network To avoid these technical challenges protection is needed to disconnect...

Page 676: ...non detectable zone To overcome this problem it is recommended to combine different criteria for detecting Loss of Mains Two or more protection functions run in parallel to detect Loss of Mains When all criteria are fulfilled to indicate Loss of Mains an alarm or a trip can be generated Vector shift and rate of change of frequency are two parallel criteria typically used for detection of Loss of M...

Page 677: ...be internally blocked Under Volt Blk value 0 15 1 00 xUn 0 01 0 80 Voltage below which function will be internally blocked Table 576 78V Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 577 78V Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Phase supervision 7 Ph A B ...

Page 678: ...oltage 78V Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 5 8 9 Technical data Table 579 78V Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage fn 1 Hz 1 Trip time1 2 Typically 53 ms 1 fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 5 9 Three phase ...

Page 679: ...tor and load Re applying a power source while the remanent voltage is still present can result in damage to the motor shaft and windings The three phase undervoltage protection 27R operates over the range of 10 70 Hz so it can monitor the voltage while the motor is slowing and prevent application of the backup power until the motor voltage has decayed to a safe level 27R includes a settable value ...

Page 680: ...the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected If the number of faulty phases match with the set Num of pickup phases the phase selection logic activates the Timer Timer Once activated the Timer activates the PICKUP output The time characteristic is definite time only When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time the TRIP output i...

Page 681: ... a motor is suddenly lost the motor terminal voltage does not immediately fall to zero but remains as the rotating motor now acts as a generator producing its own voltage This remnant voltage decays as the motor slows to a stop at a rate depending on the motor and load Applying the backup power source while the remnant voltage is still present can result in damage to the motor shaft and windings 2...

Page 682: ...on Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Pickup value 0 05 1 20 xUn 0 01 0 25 Pickup value Trip delay time 100 300000 ms 100 100 Trip delay time Voltage selection 1 phase to earth 2 phase to phase 2 phase to phase Parameter to select phase or phase to phase voltages Num of phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 Number of phases required for voltage supe...

Page 683: ...27R Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 5 9 9 Technical data Table 585 27R Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 4 of setting or 0 01 Vn 70 Hz f 20 Hz 10 of setting 20 Hz f 10 Hz Pickup time1 Minimum Typical Maximum 30 ms 75 ms 140 ms Reset time 180 ms Reset ratio Depends on the relative hysteresis setting Retardation time 45 ms Trip time accuracy2 1...

Page 684: ...conditions The function provides basic overfrequency underfrequency and frequency rate of change protection Additionally it is possible to use combined criteria to achieve even more sophisticated protection schemes for the system The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 6 1 4 Operation principle The function c...

Page 685: ...dient detection module includes a detection for a positive or negative rate of change gradient of frequency based on the set Pickup value df dt value The negative rate of change protection is selected when the set value is negative The positive rate of change protection is selected when the set value is positive When the frequency gradient protection is selected and the gradient exceeds the set Pi...

Page 686: ... protection function When the frequency gradient exceeds the set value of the Pickup value df dt setting the module activates the PICKUP and PICKUP_FRG outputs The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the value set by the Trip Tm df dt setting the TRIP and TRIP_FRG outputs are activated If the frequency gradient restores before the module trips the reset time...

Page 687: ... before the module trips the reset timer is activated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm df dt setting the operation timer resets and the PICKUP_FRG output is deactivated If the frequency restores before the module trips the reset timer is activated If the timer reaches the value set by the Reset delay Tm Freq setting the operation timer resets and the PICKUP_UFRQ output is d...

Page 688: ...mally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 6 1 5 Application The frequency protection function uses the positive phase sequence voltage to measure the frequency reliably and accurately The system frequency stability is one of the main principles in the distribution and transmission network maintenance To protect all frequency sensitive electrical apparatus in the network the departure from the a...

Page 689: ...mission DC systems and gas turbine startup The frequency gradient is often used in combination with a low frequency signal especially in smaller power systems where the loss of a large generator requires quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity In such situations the load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level However in combination with a large negative ...

Page 690: ...y rate of change Table 591 81 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 592 81 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay Tm Freq 0 60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for frequency Reset delay Tm df dt 0 60000 ms 1 0 Reset delay time for rate of chan...

Page 691: ...81 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Step value changed from 0 001 to 0 0001 for the Pickup value Freq and Pickup value Freq settings C df dt setting step changed from 0 005 Fn s to 0 0025 Fn s D Internal improvement 4 7 Impedance protection 4 7 1 Out of step protection 78 4 7 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C...

Page 692: ...e divided into two zones so separate trips can be generated based on the zone Tripping can also be selected to occur when the impedance is on the way into the zone or for when the impedance is on the way out of the zone The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block function outputs the definite timer or the function itself if desired 4 7 1 4 Operation principle The functio...

Page 693: ...n to the edge of circle on the top side Reverse reach defines the impedance from the origin to the edge of the circle on the bottom side The diameter of the mho characteristics is the sum of Forward reach and Reverse reach settings Two sets of blinders are defined by Inner blinder R and Outer blinder R intercepting at R axis The blinders are at the same angle as the Impedance angle The second blin...

Page 694: ...but inside the area that is bound with the magnitude of the minimum positive sequence current defined by setting Min Ps Seq current and the rated positive sequence voltage Figure shows the three zones Settings that determine the shape of the zones should be coordinated with the settings for any distance protection functions The zones and their respective slip counters are applicable only for Way o...

Page 695: ...SB_Z2 is activated if setting Zone 2 enable is set to Yes Both OSB and OSB_Z2 can be activated if the impedance passes through zone 1 and zone 2 while inside the mho circle The OSB or OSB_Z2 output deactivates when impedance exits and remains outside the mho circle and the inner blinder for a duration of five cycles Activation of the TRIP output depends on the Oos trip mode selected The options av...

Page 696: ...Adaptive option is selected the breaker open time if known can be incorporated to optimize breaker trip time when a way out trip command is issued Theidealtimeforthebreakertointerruptcurrentiswhentheswingangleapproacheszero If the swing angle is δ0 when the impedance exits the outer blinder the dynamic Trip delay Tod can be set as shown in Equation 128 T f T BrkropenTm f od slip co slip 1 2 2 GUID...

Page 697: ...4FEE5C5D B60F 42E5 AFED 0EBE46145537 V1 EN Equation 130 fslip Slip frequency δ0 Swing angle at the outer blinder VoltagedipTm Set V dip time Otherwise TRIP is activated on the way out when the impedance exits an outer blinder and the swing repeats for the set Max number slips count in the respective enabled zone that the swing has passed through If the Swing time has elapsed but the impedance exit...

Page 698: ...methods In the Freeze timers mode the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated In the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 7 1 5 Application Out of step protection functions detect stable powe...

Page 699: ...n a distance protection function For curve A the impedance moves into the out of step zone and leaves slowly indicating the occurrence of a swing that quickly stabilizes For curve B the impedance moves slowly into the out of step zone and exits the zone indicating that the network is becoming unstable For curve C impedance rapidly moves into and remains in the fault zone indicating an actual fault...

Page 700: ... blinder at R axis Impedance angle 10 0 90 0 deg 0 1 90 0 Angle of mho circle and blinders with respect to R axis Swing time 20 300000 ms 10 500 Time between blinders for swing to be detected Table 599 78 Group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Zone 1 reach 1 100 1 70 Percent of Mho forward reach indicating the end of zone 1 and the beginning of zone 2 Max numb...

Page 701: ...ition and counters Time to reset OOS condition and counters 0 No 1 Yes 0 No Rotate voltage signals by 180 degrees 4 7 1 8 Monitored data Table 602 78 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Z1_AMPL FLOAT32 0 00 99999 00 ohm Positive sequence impedance amplitude Z1_ANGLE FLOAT32 180 180 deg Positive sequence impedance phase angle 78 Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Di...

Page 702: ...cular characteristics on the impedance plane The function calculates the apparent impedance from the machine terminal voltages and currents If the impedance vector enters the offset mho circle the function gives the trip signal after a set definite time The operating time characteristics are according to definite time DT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the f...

Page 703: ...r determining which phase or phase phase voltages A or AB B or BC and C or CA and currents should be used for calculating the impedance Table 604 Voltages and currents used in impedance calculation Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents 1Phase earth A or AB V_A I_A 1Phase earth B or BC V_B I_B 1Phase earth C or CA V_C I_C 1Phase phase A or AB V_AB I_A I_B 1Phase phase B or BC V...

Page 704: ...e in the Monitored data view The impedance angles are provided between 180 180 degrees The calculated apparent impedance is converted to pu impedance as the operating characteristics are defined with the pu settings Impedance reach check The operating characteristic is a circular offset mho on the impedance plane The operating characteristics are defined with the Offset Diameter and Displacement s...

Page 705: ...s a loss of excitation These are typical examples which cause underexcitation in synchronous machines This module detects the underexcitation condition for the above cases when the calculated impedance enters the operating characteristics External loss detection The module checks the status information of the excitation system It is activated when the External Los Det Ena setting is set to Enable ...

Page 706: ...the Block all mode the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset In the Block TRIP output mode the function operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 7 2 5 Application There are limits for the underexcitation of a synchronous machine A reduction of the excitation current weakens the coupling between the rotor and the external power system The machine may lose the synchronis...

Page 707: ...R GUID FD5EDD69 0D03 4A97 A1AB 46C755F531A5 V2 EN Figure 348 Capability curve of a synchronous generator 40 protects the synchronous machines against an unstable operation due to loss of excitation A partial or total loss of excitation causes a reactive power intake from the network to the machine and the reactance of the system viewed from the machine terminals turns negative This kind of drop of...

Page 708: ...e right that is closer to the normal operating point Respectively if the sign is negative the circle is shifted to the left and thus moves away from the normal operating point The setting parameters of the off set mho circle are to be given in pu values The base impedance ZN in ohms is Z V S N N N 2 GUID FBC519FF D196 40CE BF5C 9826D44E2569 V1 EN Equation 131 VN rated phase to phase voltage in kV ...

Page 709: ...fault Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA V1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage ...

Page 710: ... Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable External Los Det Ena 0 Disable 1 Enable 1 Enable Enable external excitation loss detection Voltage reversal 0 No 1 Yes 0 No Rotate voltage signals by 180 degrees Impedance Meas mode 1 1Phase to earth 2 1Phase to phase 3 3Phase to earth 4 3Phase to phase 5 Pos sequence 5 Pos sequence Select voltage and currents for ...

Page 711: ...T32 0 00 200 00 xZn Phase to phase A B impedance amplitude Z_ANGLE_AB FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Phase to phase A B impedance phase angle Z_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Phase to phase B C impedance amplitude Z_ANGLE_BC FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Phase to phase B C impedance phase angle Z_AMPL_CA FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Phase to phase C A impedance amplitude Z_ANGLE_CA FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Ph...

Page 712: ...ion of harmonics 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 fn 50Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 7 3 Three phase underimpedance protection 21G 4 7 3 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase underimpedance protection UZPDIS Z G 21G 4 7...

Page 713: ... and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 21G can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections I_A I_C I_B Blocking logic BLOCK TRIP PICKUP t Timer Under impedance detection Impedance calculation V_A_AB V_C_CA V_B_BC GUID 572750B7 5217 44AE BEA1 380D25531343 V1 EN Figur...

Page 714: ...ode is recommended The current measurement of the function is based on two alternative measurement modes DFT and Peak To Peak The measurement mode is selected using the Measurement mode setting If the current magnitude is below 0 02 IN where IN is the nominal phase current the impedance value is not evaluated and the maximum impedance value 99 999 pu is shown in the Monitored data view The calcula...

Page 715: ...cteristics More than one impedance value is available when Impedance Meas mode is set to 3Phase phase and the function considers the lowest impedance value for picking up and tripping Timer Once activated the Timer activates PICKUP output The time characteristic is according to DT When the duration of the underimpedance condition exceeds the set definite Trip delay time the TRIP output is activate...

Page 716: ...erates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 7 3 5 Application The three phase underimpedance protection is used as a backup protection against short circuit faults at the generator terminals or on the high voltage side of a step up transformer This function can be used either instead of the definite time voltage dependent overcurrent protection or to obtain a limited protection zone and...

Page 717: ...iplied by the square root of 2 The phase voltage in a three phase short circuit when a fault occurs at time 0 s is shown in Figure 354 The voltage drop caused by a three phase fault provides more time for determining the fault by means of an underimpedance protection 1MAC059074 MB A Section 4 Protection functions 615 series ANSI 711 Technical Manual ...

Page 718: ...In a typical impedance trajectory during a short circuit the fault impedance remains inside the impedance circle for a longer time in which case the underimpedance protection provides longer tripping delay times to maintain the time selectivity Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 712 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 719: ... the VTs and CTs connected on the HV side of the transformer The phase and current shifts due to transformer D Y connections and other factors complicate the settings for the faults in the secondary winding as seen from the protection relay and detailed calculations are necessary for a good coverage The Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 150 percent of the transformer short circuit imp...

Page 720: ...E2 9366 616B0112CA85 V1 EN Figure 356 Current and voltage signals for underimpedance protection To prevent malfunctioning of the underimpedance protection in case of nearby faults the Polar reach setting is set to a value equal to 70 percent of the step up transformer short circuit impedance In directly connected machines where the impedance towards the network is limited only by the lines or bus ...

Page 721: ... 3 6 Signals Table 614 21G Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase vo...

Page 722: ...p settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time 4 7 3 8 Monitored data Table 619 21G Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time in Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Phase to phase A B impedance amplitude Z_AMPL_BC FLOAT32 0 00 200 00 xZn Phase to pha...

Page 723: ...esults based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 8 Power protection 4 8 1 Underpower protection 32U 4 8 1 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Underpower protection DUPPDPR P 32U 4 8 1 2 Function block TRIP PICKUP V_C V1 BLOCK 32U DISABLE V_A V_B I_C I1 ...

Page 724: ...am All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections TRIP PICKUP Directional calculation Power calculation Level detector t Timer DISABLE I_B I_A I1 I_C U_B_BC U_A_AB U1 U_C_CA Blocking logic BLOCK GUID C92BE6B7 2B96 404B 8C42 0FD29135B44C V1 EN Figure 358 Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and current...

Page 725: ... S Re PhsC S V I c c 3 P S Re If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay the positive sequence alternative is recommended default Depending on the set Measurement mode the power calculation calculates active power reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of measurements The calculated powers S P Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are ava...

Page 726: ... or if the measured power is in the reverse direction the Level detector enables the Timer module P Q Non tripping area Tripping area Pickup Value GUID A75F4E26 38FF 4D60 992A 01E9877ACED7 V1 EN Figure 359 Operating characteristics of 32U with setting Pickup value Timer Once activated the Timer activates the PICKUP output The time characteristics are according to DT When the operation timer has re...

Page 727: ...operates normally but the TRIP output is not activated 4 8 1 5 Application The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy Sometimes the mechanical power from the prime mover may decrease so much that it does not cover the internal losses The task of an underpower protection is to protect the generator from very low power output conditions Steam turb...

Page 728: ...quence current V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA V1 SIGNAL 0 Positive phase sequence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode DISABLE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal to block the function during generator...

Page 729: ...e Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the definition of the power direction Disable time 0 60000 ms 1000 0 Additional wait time after CB closing 4 8 1 8 Monitored data Table 627 32U Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0 00 100 00 Ratio of pickup time trip time P FLOAT32 160 000 160 0 00 xSn Active power Q FLOAT32 160 000 160 0 00 xSn Reactive power S F...

Page 730: ...ement mode Pos Seq default 2 V Vn fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 3 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 8 2 Reverse power directional overpower protection 32R 32O 4 8 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEE C37 2 device number Reverse power directional overpower protection DOPPDPR P Q 3...

Page 731: ...ds the set limit and in a specified direction The operate time characteristics are according to definite time DT This function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs timer or the function itself if desired 4 8 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable ...

Page 732: ...sible asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real load on the prime mover of the generator Table 629 Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA PhsB PhsC S V I V I V I a a b b c c P S Re Arone S V I V I ab a bc c P S Re Pos Seq S V I 3 1 1 P S Re PhsAB S V I I ab a b 3 P S Re PhsBC S V I I bc b c 3 P S Re PhsCA S V I I ca c a 3 P S Re PhsA S V I a a 3 P S R...

Page 733: ...ctional operation can be selected with the combination of the settings Directional mode and Power angle The selectable options for the Directional mode setting are Forward and Reverse The Power angle setting can be used to set the power direction between the reactive and active power A typical error is for example that the VT or CT poles are wrongly connected This is seen as a power flow opposite ...

Page 734: ...he percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operating time DT The value is available in the Monitored data view Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizo...

Page 735: ...hrough the turbine The break of a main steam pipe damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or an inadvertent closing of the main stop valves are typical causes for the low steam flow The steam turbines of turbo generators can be protected during a low steam flow with the overpower protection operating in reverse direction Hydroturbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbine...

Page 736: ...ome damaged due to heating in the damper windings or heating in the rotor due to slip frequency current When operated in reverse power direction 32R 32O can be used as an alarm if the power flowing from the industry is feeding the grid which may not be desired as per the rules and regulations of the utility owning the grid P Non tripping area Tripping area P Non tripping area Tripping area Q Q a b...

Page 737: ...ase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage CA BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 631 32R 32O Output signals Name Type Description T...

Page 738: ...hsB PhsC 2 Arone 3 Pos Seq 4 PhsAB 5 PhsBC 6 PhsCA 7 PhsA 8 PhsB 9 PhsC 3 Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method Table 634 32R 32O Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0 False 1 True 0 False Reverse the definition of the power direction 4 8 2 8 Monitored data Table 635 32R 32O Monitor...

Page 739: ...ypically 45 ms Reset time Typically 30 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 94 Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value of 20 ms Suppression of harmonics 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Measurement mode Pos Seq default 2 V Vn fn 50 Hz results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 3 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 8 3 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection 32Q ...

Page 740: ... facility is disconnected from the network with a specific time delay if all phase voltages decrease and remain at or below the specified limit and if reactive power is simultaneously consumed that is under excitation operation The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs timer or the function itself 4 8 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled w...

Page 741: ...culates and monitors the reactive power based on positive sequence current and voltage The use of a positive sequence component makes the determination of power insensitive to a possible asymmetry in current and voltages When the reactive power exceeds Min reactive power and flows in the operating area the module sends an enable signal to the Timer indicating that the reactive power is being consu...

Page 742: ... according to DT When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time the TRIP output is activated If the fault disappears before the module operates the Timer is reset instantaneously The Timer calculates the start duration value PICKUP_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set operating time The value is available through the Monitored data vie...

Page 743: ...various grid codes have revised their requirements and therefore require that the distributed PGUs have to make a contribution to network support In case of network faults the distributed power generator should not be immediately disconnected from the network Instead as a matter of principle generating plants connected to the medium voltage network must be capable of participating in steady state ...

Page 744: ... 32R 32O 47O 59 47U 27 50L 50NL 60 78V 81 SYNC U RT Q 3U P Q U2 3V U1 3V ARC FUSEF VS f f df dt A GUID 1EEE1F81 BB0F 417F BB2B 9CC55BF4DC59 V1 EN Figure 369 Application example of wind power plant as distributed power generation coupled into the utility network Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 738 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 745: ...20 xUn 0 01 0 85 Pickup value for under voltage detection Trip delay time 100 300000 ms 10 500 Trip delay time Table 640 32Q 27 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 641 32Q 27 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Min reactive power 0 01 0 50 xSn ...

Page 746: ...tage 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Vn Pickup time1 2 Typically 46 ms Reset time 50 ms Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 1 Pickup value 0 05 Sn reactive power before fault 0 8 Pickup value reactive power overshoot 2 times results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2 Includes th...

Page 747: ...so monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate decisions on ongoing arcing situations The function contains a blocking functionality Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets timers 4 9 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of AFD can be described by us...

Page 748: ...ll required criteria are fulfilled for a reliable decision of an arc fault situation The user can select either Light current Light only or BI controlled operation mode The operation is based on both current and light information in Light current mode on light information only in Light only mode or on remotely controlled information in BI controlled mode When the BI controlled mode is in use and t...

Page 749: ...sors can be placed for example in the busbar compartment the breaker compartment and the cable compartment of the metal clad cubicle The light detected by the lens sensors is compared to an automatically adjusted reference level Light sensor 1 Light sensor 2 and Light sensor 3 inputs have their own reference levels When the light exceeds the reference level of one of the inputs the light is detect...

Page 750: ...n relay An arc protection with one protection relay only is realized by installing two arc lens sensors connected to the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder to detect an arc on the busbar In arc detection the arc protection stage trips the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder The maximum recommended installation distance between the two lens sensors in the busbar area is six meters a...

Page 751: ... protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder detects an arc on the busbar or in the breaker compartment via one of the other lens sensors it will generate a signal to the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder When detecting the signal the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder trips the circuit breaker of the incoming feeder and generates an external trip signal to all prote...

Page 752: ...rotection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system When realizing an arc protection with both protection relays and a separate arc protection system the cable terminations of the outgoing feeders are protected by protection relays using one lens sensor for each protection relay The busbar and the incoming feeder are protected by the sensor loop of the separate arc protec...

Page 753: ...eders which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders A040364 ANSI V1 EN Figure 374 Arc flash detector with several protection relays and a separate arc flash detector system 4 9 6 Signals Table 644 AFD Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I_G SIGNAL 0 Residual current Ta...

Page 754: ...se pickup value 0 50 40 00 xIn 0 01 2 50 Operating phase current Ground pickup value 0 05 8 00 xIn 0 01 0 20 Operating residual current Operation mode 1 Light current 2 Light only 3 BI controlled 1 Light current Operation mode Table 647 AFD Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable 4 9 8 Monitored da...

Page 755: ...ue fn 50 Hz fault with nominal frequency results based on statistical distribution of 200 measurements 2 Includes the delay of the heavy duty output contact 3 Normal power output 4 High speed output 4 9 10 Technical revision history Table 650 AFD Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal Improvement 4 10 Motor start up supervision 66 51LRS 4 10 1 Identification Function descr...

Page 756: ...tor using the speed switch which means checking if the rotor is able to rotate or not This feature trips after a predefined operating time 66 51LRS also protects the motor from an excessive number of start ups Upon exceeding the specified number of start ups within certain duration 66 51LRS blocks further pickups The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and continues to be inhib...

Page 757: ...the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start up condition The start up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents In the IIt stall CB mode the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start up condition but the start up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS current as well as the circuit breaker status In both the IIt stall and II...

Page 758: ...CLOSED input is activated and at least one phase current value exceeds the Motor standstill A setting These two events do not take place at the same instant that is the CB main contact is closed first in which case the phase current value rises above 0 1 pu and after some delay the CB auxiliary contact gives the information of the CB_CLOSED input In some cases the CB_CLOSED input can be active but...

Page 759: ...ervision in the IIt CB mode and the IIt and stall CB mode The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation In the IIt or IIt stall modes the aim of this setting is to check for the completion of the motor start up period The purpose of this time delay setting is to allow for short interruptions in the current without changing the state of the MOT_START output ...

Page 760: ... W R i t dt s s t 2 0 GUID 7A92209F 7451 415B 8C3D 276A6ED4A44B V1 EN Equation 133 Rs combined rotor and stator resistance is starting current of the motor t starting time of the motor This equation is normally represented as the integral of I t It is a commonly used method in protective protection relays to protect the motor from thermal stress during starting The advantage of this method over th...

Page 761: ...ut is activated The module calculates the duration of the motor in stalling condition the STALL_RL output indicating the percent ratio of the start situation and the set value of Lock rotor time The value is available in the Monitored data view The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the operation time and deactivates the OPR_STALL output Cumulative start up protection This module protects...

Page 762: ...otal number of start ups occurred START_CNT The value can be reset from the Clear menu The old Number of motor start ups occurred counter value START_CNT can be taken into use by writing the value to the Ini start up counter parameter and resetting the value via the Clear menu from WHMI or LHMI The calculated values of T_RST_ENA T_ST_CNT and START_CNT are available in the Monitored data view The a...

Page 763: ...line starting current GUID F4C17D13 48CA 480A BBE5 DFD7D6316DB8 V1 EN Figure 380 Typical motor starting and capability curves The start up supervision of a motor is an important function because of the higher thermal stress developed during starting During the start up the current surge imposes a thermal strain on the rotor This is exaggerated as the air flow for cooling is less because the fans d...

Page 764: ...at to dissipate To ensure a safe operation it is necessary to provide a fixed time interval between starts or limit the number of starts within a period of time This is why the motor manufacturers have restrictions on how many starts are allowed in a defined time interval This function does not allow starting of the motor if the number of starts exceeds the set level in the register that calculate...

Page 765: ...er of motor start ups t start up time of the motor in seconds margin safety margin 10 20 percent Setting of Counter Red rate Counter Red rate is calculated by t t t s reset GUID E7C44256 0F67 4D70 9B54 1C5042A151AF V1 EN Equation 135 t specified start time of the motor in seconds treset duration during which the maximum number of motor start ups stated by the manufacturer can be made time in hours...

Page 766: ...ss OPR_STALL BOOLEAN Trip signal for stalling protection MOT_START BOOLEAN Signal to show that motor startup is in progress LOCK_START BOOLEAN Lock out condition for restart of motor 4 10 7 Settings Table 653 66 51LRS Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Motor start up A 1 0 10 0 xIn 0 1 2 0 Motor starting current Motor start up time 1 80 s 1 5 Motor starting t...

Page 767: ...p settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Motor standstill A 0 05 0 20 xIn 0 01 0 12 Current limit to check for motor standstill condition 4 10 8 Monitored data Table 657 66 51LRS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description START_CNT INT32 0 999999 Number of motor start ups occurred START_TIME FLOAT32 0 0 999 9 s Measured motor latest startup time in sec T...

Page 768: ...ments 2 Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4 10 10 Technical revision history Table 659 STTPMSU Technical revision history66 51LRS Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Added setting Ini start up counter 4 11 Multipurpose protection MAP 4 11 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 d...

Page 769: ...rameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of MAP can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections GUID B9FE9FD4 3C86 4B1B A377 8056B82639D3 V1 EN Figure 383 Functional module diagram Level detector The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Pickup value setting The Operation mode setting defines the direction of the level detector...

Page 770: ...operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration System Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay s program The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode The Blocking mode ...

Page 771: ...me Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 4 11 7 Settings Table 663 MAP Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 10000 0 10000 0 0 1 0 0 Pickup value Pickup value Add 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Pickup value Add Trip delay time 0 200000 ms 100 0 Trip delay time Table 664 MAP Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default De...

Page 772: ...st 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 4 11 9 Technical data Table 667 MAP Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 4 11 10 Technical revision history Table 668 MAP Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement Section 4 1MAC059074 MB A Protection functions 766 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 773: ... is used to coordinate transformer inrush situations in distribution networks Transformer inrush detection is based on the following principle the output signalBLK2H is activated once the numerically derived ratio of second harmonic current I_2H and the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds the set value The trip time characteristic for the function is of definite time DT type The function co...

Page 774: ...up value the module output is activated Level detector The output of the phase specific level detector is activated when the fundamental frequency current I_1H exceeds five percent of the nominal current Timer Once activated the timer runs until the set Trip delay time value The time characteristic is according to DT When the operation timer has reached the Trip delay time value the BLK2H output i...

Page 775: ... available 5 1 5 Application Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing inrush conditions A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling the pickup value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and ground fault function stages when the ratio of second ha...

Page 776: ...tion I_2H_A SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase A current I_1H_A SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase A current I_2H_B SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase B current I_1H_B SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase B current I_2H_C SIGNAL 0 Second harmonic phase C current I_1H_C SIGNAL 0 Fundamental frequency phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block input status Section 5 1MAC059074 MB A Protection related fun...

Page 777: ... Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Table 673 INR Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 1 20 Reset delay time 5 1 8 Monitored data Table 674 INR Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description INR Enum 1 Enabled 2 bl...

Page 778: ...y Table 676 INR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 5 2 Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF 5 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I Io BF 50BF 5 2 2 Function block GUID 12D6BD6F 2B26 453D B62F FC134EC98931...

Page 779: ...e trip logic operation for upstream breakers A minimum trip pulse length can be set independently for the trip output The function contains a blocking functionality It is possible to block the function outputs if desired 5 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 50BF can b...

Page 780: ...necessary to measure the residual current separately In effectively grounded systems also the setting of the ground fault current protection can be chosen at a relatively low current level The current setting should be chosen in accordance with the setting of the sensitive ground fault protection Start logic The start logic is used to manage the starting of the timer 1 and timer 2 It also resets t...

Page 781: ... circuit breaker is in the open condition If the CB failure mode setting is set to Both the resetting logic requires that the circuit breaker is in the open condition and the values of the phase currents and the residual current drops below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively The activation of the BLOCK input resets the function AND TON 150 0 ms CB failure mode Current CB ...

Page 782: ...me as any unwanted operation is avoided A typical setting is 90 150 ms which is also dependent on the retrip timer The minimum time delay for the CB failure delay can be estimated as CBfailuredelay Retriptime t t t cbopen BFP reset margin _ A070693 V3 EN Equation 136 tcbopen maximum opening time for the circuit breaker tBFP_reset maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correc...

Page 783: ...c The operation of the retrip logic depends on the CB fail retrip mode setting The retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to Disabled If CB fail retrip mode is set to the Current check mode the activation of the retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting If CB failure mode is set to the Current mode TRRET is activated when the value of any phase current ...

Page 784: ... OR AND TRRET BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL From Timer 3 GUID 11B700C8 7CCF 41E4 89C7 741D4AC71887 V1 EN Figure 391 Retrip logic Backup trip logic The backup trip logic provides the TRBU output which can be used to trip the upstream backup circuit breaker when the main circuit breaker fails to clear the fault The backup trip logic is activated by the timer 2 module or timer enabling signal from the start logi...

Page 785: ...Current value Res setting respectively or two phase currents exceeding the Current value Once TRBU is activated it remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents drop below the Current value whichever takes longer In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient If the CB failure mode is set to Breaker status the TRBU output is activated...

Page 786: ...ult clearance system is faulty A circuit breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system For practical and economical reasons it is not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the protected component but breaker failure protection is used instead The breaker failure function issues a backup trip command to up stream circuit breakers in case the original circuit breaker fails t...

Page 787: ...ond trip coil Both a retrip with current check and an unconditional retrip are available When a retrip with current check is chosen the retrip is performed only if there is a current flow through the circuit breaker The backup trip timer is also initiated at the same time as the retrip timer If 50BF detects a failure in tripping the fault within the set backup delay time which is longer than the r...

Page 788: ...ttings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Current value 0 05 2 00 xIn 0 05 0 30 Operating phase current Current value Res 0 05 2 00 xIn 0 05 0 30 Operating residual current CB failure trip mode 1 2 out of 4 2 1 out of 3 3 1 out of 4 2 1 out of 3 Backup trip current check mode CB failure mode 1 Current 2 Breaker ...

Page 789: ...blocked 5 Disabled Status 5 2 9 Technical data Table 682 50BF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current fn 2 Hz 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 In Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Retardation time 20 ms 5 2 10 Technical revision history Table 683 50BF Technical revision history Technical revisi...

Page 790: ...aker The minimum trip pulse length can be set when the non latched mode is selected It is also possible to select the latched or lockout mode for the trip signal 5 3 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable When the 86 94 function is disabled all trip outputs which are intended to go through ...

Page 791: ... 94 is provided with possibilities to activate a lockout When activated the lockout can be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the RST_LKOUT input or from the LHMI clear menu parameter When using the Latched mode the resetting of the TRIP output can be done similarly as when using the Lockout mode It is also possible to reset the Latched mode remotely through a separate c...

Page 792: ...aker which needs for example different trip pulse time another trip logic function can be used The two instances of the PTRC function are identical only the names of the functions 86 94 1 and 86 94 2 are different Therefore all references made to only 86 94 1 apply to 86 94 2 as well The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the TRIP input Usually a logic block OR is required to co...

Page 793: ...OPEN_CB 52 1 EXE_OP BI 4 Lockout reset Trip Coil 1 Breaker A070881 ANSI V2 EN Figure 396 Typical 86 94 connection 5 3 6 Signals Table 685 86 94 Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block of function TRIP BOOLEAN 0 False Trip RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0 False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function Table 686 86 94 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLE...

Page 794: ... Values Range Unit Description 86 94 Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 5 3 9 Technical revision history Table 689 86 94 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B C D Internal improvement E Setting Trip output mode default setting is changed to Latched F Internal improvement 5 4 High impedance fault detection HIZ 5 4 1 Identification Function description ...

Page 795: ...unded or isolated neutral 5 4 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable HIZ uses a multi algorithm approach Each algorithm uses various features of ground currents to detect a high impedance fault Although the HIZ algorithm is very sophisticated the setting required to operate the function is ...

Page 796: ... It is hence recommended to set the value midway to 5 initially Based on experience and confidence gained in a particular application the setting can be moved either side In many cases it would be a good practice to use HIZ as an indicative function during a piloting phase until enough experience has been gathered and a suitable setting found GUID 91FFCBAB 470F 43DD AC86 E673BAACCBA6 V1 EN Figure ...

Page 797: ...ce faults could take place at any time within the observation window of the signal and could be delayed randomly and attenuated substantially The model is motivated by extensive research actual experimental observations in the laboratory field testing and what traditionally represents an accurate depiction of a non stationary signal with a time dependent spectrum GUID 61D297F5 783F 4CF2 BD16 18CE5...

Page 798: ... principles are suitable for detecting relatively low impedance faults which have a relatively large fault current However a small percentage of the ground faults have a very large impedance They are comparable to load impedance and consequently have very little fault current These high impedance faults do not pose imminent danger to power system equipment However they are a considerable threat to...

Page 799: ...ed input CB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Circuit Breaker Open input Table 691 HIZ Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip 5 4 7 Settings Table 692 HIZ Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Security Level 1 10 1 5 Security Level Table 693 HIZ Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable...

Page 800: ... history Table 695 HIZ Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Added inputs for Circuit Breaker Closed and Circuit Breaker Open 5 5 Binary signal transfer BST 5 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Binary signal transfer BSTGGIO BST BST Section 5 1MAC059074 MB A Protection relat...

Page 801: ...onal and the binary data sent locally is available remotely as a received signal BST includes a minimum pulse time functionality for the received binary signals Each received signal has its own minimum pulse time setting parameter The function includes two alarm output signals The SEND_SIG_A output signal is updated according to the status of the sent binary signals The RECV_SIG_A output signal is...

Page 802: ... relay This received binary data status is then available as the RECV_SIG_1 8 outputs on the local end protection relay RECV_SIG_A can be used for alarming based on the status of RECV_SIG_1 8 By selecting the signal mode as In use alarm sel the received status of the corresponding signal affects the activation criteria of RECV_SIG_A Further in case more than one signal channels are selected into t...

Page 803: ...tion indication is connected to the first input of BST which is used to send information to the remote end via communication In the remote end this information is handled as a remote circuit breaker open position and it is available from the first output of BST This way the information can be exchanged BSTGGIO SEND_SIG_3 SEND_SIG_7 SEND_SIG_8 RECV_SIG_1 RECV_SIG_2 RECV_SIG_3 SEND_SIG_2 SEND_SIG_1 ...

Page 804: ...LEAN 0 False Send signal 8 state Table 697 BST Output signals Name Type Description RECV_SIG_1 BOOLEAN Receive signal 1 state RECV_SIG_2 BOOLEAN Receive signal 2 state RECV_SIG_3 BOOLEAN Receive signal 3 state RECV_SIG_4 BOOLEAN Receive signal 4 state RECV_SIG_5 BOOLEAN Receive signal 5 state RECV_SIG_6 BOOLEAN Receive signal 6 state RECV_SIG_7 BOOLEAN Receive signal 7 state RECV_SIG_8 BOOLEAN Rec...

Page 805: ...6 Signal 7 mode 1 on 2 on logic included 3 off 1 on Operation mode for signal 7 Signal 8 mode 1 on 2 on logic included 3 off 1 on Operation mode for signal 8 Pulse time 1 0 60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 1 Pulse time 2 0 60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 2 Pulse time 3 0 60000 ms 1 0 Minimum pulse time for received signal 3 Pulse time 4 0 60000 ms 1 0 Minimum...

Page 806: ...wire link 10 ms 5 5 9 Technical revision history Table 701 BST Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 5 6 Emergency start up 62EST 5 6 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Emergency start up ESMGAPC ESTART 62EST 5 6 2 Function block GUID 3AF99427 2061 47E1 B3...

Page 807: ... be described using a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections GUID 18128621 4A78 45D0 A788 9116B5213449 V1 EN Figure 408 Functional module diagram Standstill detector The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition The standstill condition can be detected based on the phase current values If all three phase currents are below the set value of M...

Page 808: ... start The protection relay is forced to a state which allows the restart of motor and the operator can now restart the motor A new emergency start cannot be made until the 10 minute time out has passed or until the emergency start is released whichever takes longer The last change of the emergency start output signal is recorded 5 6 6 Signals Table 702 62EST Input signals Name Type Default Descri...

Page 809: ... Status 5 6 9 Technical data Table 707 62EST Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f fn 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Un 5 6 10 Technical revision history Table 708 ESM Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 5 7 Fault locator 21FL 5 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 6061...

Page 810: ...mental frequency current and voltage phasors The full operation of 21FL requires that all phase currents and phase to ground voltages are measured The fault distance estimate is obtained when the function is externally or internally triggered 5 7 4 Operation principle The fault distance calculation is done in two steps First the fault type is determined with the inbuilt Phase Selection Logic PSL S...

Page 811: ...s virtually setting free and has only one parameter Z Max phase load for discriminating a large symmetrical load from a three phase fault The setting Z Max phase load can be calculated using the equation Z Max phase load 0 8 2 max V S xy GUID BDFF7D0D 9323 4610 84C6 A9B4234136B3 V1 EN Equation 137 Vxy Nominal phase to phase voltage Smax Maximum three phase load For example if Vxy 20 kV and Smax 1 ...

Page 812: ...gnized by the phase selection logic the fault distance calculation is started with one of the seven impedance measuring elements that is the fault loops 21FL employs independent algorithms for each fault type to achieve optimal performance The inherent result from the fault distance calculation is the ohmic fault loop impedance value Table 710 The calculated impedance values available in the recor...

Page 813: ... N fault 1 GUID 4DF67AFC 67E4 4BCB 958E CC9E4872E252 V3 EN Equation 139 Flt loop reactance X XN 1 GUID B4E21936 B993 4A8A 9C4A 7425F8AC4670 V3 EN Equation 140 Flt phase reactance X 1 GUID 56EC16DD 7F6A 4DE5 935E 4302196DE21A V3 EN Equation 141 R1 Estimated positive sequence resistance from the substation to the fault location X1 Estimated positive sequence reactance from the substation to the faul...

Page 814: ...lgorithm can be applied with low impedance effectively grounded systems where the fault current is fed from one side only The Load modelling algorithm has been especially designed for ungrounded systems The Load modelling algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting that is an equivalent load distance as an additional parameter The derivation and meaning of this parameter is illustrated in F...

Page 815: ...V V d real d tap d 1 GUID 348E8311 D555 4897 BF7E 077024585AAC V1 EN Equation 142 Vd real The actual maximum voltage drop of the feeder Vd tap d 1 The fictional voltage drop if the entire load would be tapped at the end d 1 of the feeder not drawn in Figure 412 The calculation of this value requires data from the DMS system Alternatively the setting Equivalent load Dis can be determined by conduct...

Page 816: ...o together with the fault distance estimate In case of ungrounded network sufficient fault current magnitude resulting in Flt to Lod Cur ratio 1 can be achieved for example with proper switching operations in the background network if possible which increase the fault current If the faulty feeder is re energized after the switching operation a new estimate for the fault distance can be obtained Fa...

Page 817: ...oop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of measured impedance electrical fault distance into a physical fault distance requires a...

Page 818: ...ult distance calculation is most accurate when the calculation is made with the fault loop model This model requires positive sequence impedances of the protected feeder to be given as settings If these settings are not available valid impedance values can be calculated also without the fault loop model with setting Enable simple model TRUE However valid distance estimate that is the conversion of...

Page 819: ...ods for each fault type to achieve optimal performance The purpose of load compensation is to improve the accuracy of the fault distance calculation models by estimating the actual fault current in the fault location Delta quantities are used for this to mitigate the effect of load current on fault distance estimation For ground faults the load compensation is done automatically inside the fault d...

Page 820: ...w magnitudes of I or V 256 Distance estimate calculation cannot be performed for example avoiding internal division by zero 1 Xloop is the total loop reactance according to settings For example if fault point resistance exceeds 500 Ω and Flt to Lod Cur ratio is below 1 0 Flt Dist quality is 36 As another example if no error sources are found but stability criterion is not met the value of Flt Dist...

Page 821: ...installation configuration This minimizes the fault location errors caused by inaccurate settings The positive sequence reactance per unit and per phase can be calculated with a following approximation equation which applies to symmetrically transposed three phase aluminium overhead lines without ground wires X a r km n en 1 4 10 2 0 5 ω ln Ω GUID B7F3697A 7C8E 4BF6 A63C 7BFD307DD128 V2 EN Equatio...

Page 822: ... 0 434 ACSR 500 sq mm 0 0548 0 346 Zero sequence impedance values Location of ground faults requires both positive sequence and zero sequence impedances For short circuit faults zero sequence impedances are not required The positive sequence impedance per unit values for the lines are typically known or can easily be obtained from data sheets The zero sequence values are generally not as easy to o...

Page 823: ... phases x and y Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings The Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings are used for improving fault distance estimation accuracy for ground faults They are critical for an accurate fault location in ungrounded networks In other types of networks they are less critical The Ph leakage Ris setting represents the leakage losses of the protected feeder in te...

Page 824: ...ation 156 Vxy Phase to ground voltage 21FL can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React setting by measurements The calculation of Ph capacitive React is triggered by the binary signal connected to the TRIGG_XC0F input when a ground fault test is conducted outside the protected feeder during commissioning for example at the substation busbar The Calculation Trg mode has to be External ...

Page 825: ...t the feeder is electrically non homogeneous 21FL allows the modeling of the line impedance variation in protection relay with three line sections with independent impedance settings This improves the accuracy of physical fault distance conversion done in the protection relay especially in cases where the line impedance non homogeneity is severe Each section is enabled by entering a section length...

Page 826: ...s demonstrated in example shown in Figure 419 with 10 kilometer long feeder with three line types The total line impedance for the 10 km line is R1 6 602 Ω 0 660 Ω km and X1 3 405 Ω 0 341 Ω km consisting of the following sections and impedance values 4 km of PAS 150 R1 0 236 Ω km X1 0 276 Ω km 3 km of Al Fe 54 9 Raven R1 0 536 Ω km X1 0 369 Ω km 3 km of Al Fe 21 4 Swan R1 1 350 Ω km X1 0 398 Ω km ...

Page 827: ...les An error of nearly eight per cent at maximum is created by the conversion procedure when modeling a non homogenous line with only one section By using impedance model with three line sections there is no error in the conversion The previous example assumed a short circuit fault and thus only positive sequence impedance settings were used The results however also apply for ground faults Taps or...

Page 828: ...ent distance estimation calculation time before tripping of the feeder circuit breaker In case of internal triggering the TRIGG input is not used for triggering Instead the trigger signal is created internally so that the estimation is started when phase selection logic detects a fault and the estimate is triggered when its value has stabilized sufficiently This is judged by maximum variation in f...

Page 829: ...ty criterion for fault distance estimate is fulfilled and the TRIGG_OUT event is sent The recorded data values are stored at this moment GUID 2C1E2C55 B61A 4200 BC8E 0F6FC9036A56 V3 EN Figure 421 The behavior of fault distance estimate in time 5 7 4 4 Alarm indication 21Fl contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance If the calculated fault distance FLT_DISTANCE is between the settin...

Page 830: ...alculation values The cross reference table shows which of the recorded data values are available as continuous monitoring values during a fault Table 716 Cross reference table for recorded and monitored data values Recorded data Monitored data Flt loop FAULT_LOOP Flt distance FLT_DISTANCE Flt Dist quality FLT_DIST_Q Flt loop resistance RFLOOP Flt loop reactance XFLOOP Flt phase reactance XFPHASE ...

Page 831: ...ion greatly decreases the downtime of the protected feeders and increases the total availability of a power system 21FL provides impedance based fault location It is designed for radially operated distribution systems and is applicable for locating short circuits in all kinds of distribution networks Ground faults can be located in effectively grounded and low resistance low reactance grounded net...

Page 832: ...A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current Io SIGNAL 0 Residual current I1 SIGNAL 0 Positive sequence current I2 SIGNAL 0 Negative sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C_CA SIGNAL 0 Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage ...

Page 833: ...e Low alarm Dis limit 0 000 1 000 pu 0 001 0 000 Low alarm limit for calculated distance Equivalent load Dis 0 00 1 00 0 01 0 50 Equivalent load distance when EF algorithm equals to load modelling R1 line section B 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 1 000 Positive sequence line resistance line section B X1 line section B 0 000 1000 000 ohm pu 0 001 1 000 Positive sequence line reactance line section B R0...

Page 834: ...Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Enabled Enable load compensation for PP 3P loops Enable simple model 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Enable calc without impedance settings for PP 3P loops Distance estimate Va 0 001 0 300 0 001 0 015 Allowed variation of short circuit distance estimate 5 7 8 Monitored data Table 723 21FL Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description RF FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault...

Page 835: ...resistance Flt loop reactance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault loop reactance Flt phase reactance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault phase reactance Flt point resistance FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Fault resistance Flt to Lod Cur ratio FLOAT32 0 00 60000 00 Fault to load current ratio Equivalent load Dis FLOAT32 0 00 1 00 Estimated equivalent load distance XC0F Calc FLOAT32 0 0 1000000 0 ohm Estimated P...

Page 836: ...hs A angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault current phase A angle A Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault current phase B magnitude A Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault current phase B angle A Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault current phase C magnitude A Flt Phs C angle FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Fault current phase C angle V Flt Phs A Magn FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Fault v...

Page 837: ...vision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement 5 8 Switch onto fault SOTF 5 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Switch onto fault CBPSOF SOTF SOTF 5 8 2 Function block TRIP PICKUP SOTF PICKUP_DLYD CB_CL_CMD BLOCK GUID 3C5B975D DA83 443A A5B3 83A2FE5DE507 V1 EN Figure 423 Function block 1MAC059074 M...

Page 838: ...iagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections PICKUP PICKUP_DLYD TRIP CB_CL_CMD BLOCK SOTF control Trigger GUID E9DDE27C C5BA 46BA B508 A4147781CC75 V1 EN Figure 424 Functional module diagram Trigger This module is used for detecting possible fault immediately after closing the circuit breaker An external protection function for example 51P 50P 50P 3 or 51N 51G 50N 50G 5...

Page 839: ... is active and the PICKUP input is activated the function trips instantaneously without any delays The overcurrent low stage signals for example 51P PICKUP signal is connected to the function PICKUP_DLYD input The setting parameter Trip delay time is used to delay the operation in case of inrush situation 5 8 6 Signals Table 726 SOTF Input signals Name Type Default Description PICKUP BOOLEAN 0 Fal...

Page 840: ...t Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable 5 8 8 Monitored data Table 731 SOTF Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description SOTF Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 5 8 9 Technical data Table 732 SOTF Technical data Characteristic Value Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms Section 5 1MAC059074 MB A Protection rela...

Page 841: ...ns the supervision functionality The failure of a circuit is reported to the corresponding function block in the relay configuration The function picks up and trips when TCM detects a trip circuit failure The operating time characteristic for the function is of the definite time DT type The function trips after a predefined operating time and resets when the fault disappears The function contains ...

Page 842: ... horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the relay program The activation of the BLOCK input prevents the ALARM output to be activated 6 1 5 Application TCM detects faults in the electrical control circuit of the circuit breaker The function can supervise both open and closed coil circuits This supervision is necessary to find out the vitality of the control circuits continuously F...

Page 843: ...is required only in a closed position the external shunt resistance can be omitted When the circuit breaker is in the open position the TCM sees the situation as a faulty circuit One way to avoid TCM operation in this situation would be to block the supervision function whenever the circuit breaker is open 1MAC059074 MB A Section 6 Supervision functions 615 series ANSI 837 Technical Manual ...

Page 844: ...ontacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved The supervising current cannot detect if one or all the other contacts connected in parallel are not connected properly Section 6 1MAC059074 MB A Supervision func...

Page 845: ...lel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCM test current flows through all wires and joints 1MAC059074 MB A Section 6 Supervision functions 615 series ANSI 839 Technical Manual ...

Page 846: ...ce of Rext Setting the TCM function in a protection relay not in use does not typically affect the supervising current injection Trip circuit supervision with auxiliary relays Many retrofit projects are carried out partially that is the old electromechanical relays are replaced with new ones but the circuit breaker is not replaced This creates a problem that the coil current of an old type circuit...

Page 847: ...ally the operation condition can be expressed as V R R I V AC DC C ext int s c R 20 A070986 ANSI V1 EN Equation 157 Vc Operating voltage over the supervised trip circuit Ic Measuring current through the trip circuit appr 1 5 mA 0 99 1 72 mA Rext external shunt resistance Rint internal shunt resistance 1 kΩ Rs trip coil resistance If the external shunt resistance is used it has to be calculated not...

Page 848: ...be disconnected The internal resistor is required if the complete TCM circuit is used GUID 548E2DC1 D16E 4BC2 803F 96FB5021DAC2 ANSI V1 EN Figure 431 Connection of a power output in a case when TCM is not used and the internal resistor is disconnected Incorrect connections and use of trip circuit supervision Although the TCM circuit consists of two separate contacts it must be noted that those are...

Page 849: ...of the protection relay R2 is disconnected as shown in the figure while the lower contact is still connected When the protection relay R2 operates the coil current starts to flow through the internal resistor of the protection relay R3 and the resistor burns immediately As proven with the previous examples both trip contacts must operate together Attention should also be paid for correct usage of ...

Page 850: ...1 6 Signals Table 734 TCM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block input status Table 735 TCM Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output Section 6 1MAC059074 MB A Supervision functions 844 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 851: ...ored data Table 738 TCM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description TCM Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 6 1 9 Technical revision history Table 739 TCM Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement 6 2 Current circuit supervision CCM 6 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC...

Page 852: ...s a fault in the measurement circuit and issues an alarm or blocks the protection functions to avoid unwanted tripping It must be remembered that the blocking of protection functions at an occurring open CT circuit means that the situation remains unchanged and extremely high voltages stress the secondary circuit 6 2 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation...

Page 853: ...value Max I_A I_B I_C 1 0 p u 1 0 p u I_DIFF 2 0 p u 3 0 p u 4 0 p u Max trip current NON OPERATE OPERATE GUID D083BF22 574C 4603 971F 5F4371632A28 V2 EN Figure 436 CCM operating characteristics When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region the FAIL output is activated The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max trip current When the interna...

Page 854: ...AIL or ALARM outputs are active the deactivation of these outputs is prevented The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the ALARM output 6 2 5 Application Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation in many protection functions such as differential ground fault current and negative sequence current functions When currents from two independent three phase set...

Page 855: ...hase currents even if there was nothing wrong with the measurement circuit Reference current measured with core balanced current transformer CCM compares the sum of phase currents to the current measured with the core balanced CT CCM I_A I_B ALARM FAIL I_C I_REF BLOCK protection relay Core 1 protection IL1 IL2 IL3 I_A I_B I_C I_REF Core balanced CT GUID DA7A48EF 0F07 4665 9A09 87188E5A9982 V2 EN F...

Page 856: ...tion IL1 IL2 IL3 I_A I_B I_C I_REF Other protection devices Core 2 protection GUID 8DC3B17A 13FE 4E38 85C6 A228BC03206B ANSI V3 EN Figure 438 Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three phase current transformer protection cores When using the measurement core for reference current measurement it should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is muc...

Page 857: ...Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three phase current transformer cores protection and measurement Example of incorrect connection The currents must be measured with two independent cores that is the phase currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current A connection diagram shows an example of a case where the phase currents and the refe...

Page 858: ...nals Table 740 CCM Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current I_REF SIGNAL 0 Reference current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all binary outputs Table 741 CCM Output signals Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN Fail output ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output Section 6 1MAC059074 MB A Supervision functions 852 615 ...

Page 859: ...h phase current 6 2 8 Monitored data Table 744 CCM Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description I_DIFF FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Differential current CCM Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 6 2 9 Technical data Table 745 CCM Technical data Characteristic Value Trip time 1 30 ms 1 Including the delay of the output contact 6 2 10 Technical revision history Table 7...

Page 860: ...n MCS A MCS B MCS C is a dedicated phase segregated supervision function to be used along with the high impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT secondary wires The differential current is taken as an input for the protection relay During normal CT condition the value of the differential current is zero However when the CT is broken the secondary differential current starts fl...

Page 861: ...gram are explained in the next sections The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function However the functionality is described only for phase A The functionality for phase B and C is identical GUID 8C5661F6 12FC 4733 886C 01F793DF2FBF V1 EN Figure 442 Functional module diagram Level detector This module compares the differential current I_A to the set Pickup value The timer module is...

Page 862: ...FT and Peak to Peak The measurement mode is selected using the Measurement mode setting 6 3 6 Application MCS A MCS B MCS C is a dedicated phase segregated supervision function to be used along with the high impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT secondary wires The operation principle of MCS A MCS B MCS C is similar to the high impedance differential protection function 87A...

Page 863: ...B 87C and MCS A MCS B MCS C consider the current as an increased differential or unbalance current because of the broken CT wire in phase C Both 87A 87B 87C and MCS A MCS B MCS C receive the differential current of approximately 1 0 pu The main differential protection 87A 87B 87C cannot trip because of the higher current setting All CTs must have the same ratio 1MAC059074 MB A Section 6 Supervisio...

Page 864: ...L 0 Phase A current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 748 MCS B Input signals Name Type Default Description I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 749 MCS C Input signals Name Type Default Description I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 750 ...

Page 865: ...ent mode 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode Table 755 MCS B Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Pickup value 1 0 100 0 In 0 1 10 0 Pickup value percentage of the nominal current Alarm delay time 100 300000 ms 10 3000 Alarm delay time Alarm output mode 1 Non latched 3 Locko...

Page 866: ...ult Description Reset delay time 0 60000 ms 10 20 Reset delay time Measurement mode 2 DFT 3 Peak to Peak 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode 6 3 9 Monitored data Table 759 MCS A Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MCS A Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status Table 760 MCS B Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description MCS B Enum 1 Enabled 2 bl...

Page 867: ...le 763 MCS A MCS B MCS C Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Function name changed from HZCCRDIF to HZCCASPVC HZCCBSPVC HZCCCSPVC 6 4 Protection communication supervision PCS 6 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Protection communication supervision PCSITPC PCS PCS 6 4 2 Function block OK WARNING...

Page 868: ...hen a communication interruption lasting for two fundamental network periods is detected When a severe and long lasting interference or total interruption in the protection communication channel is detected an alarm is issued after a five second delay The protection communication supervision quality status is exchanged continuously online by the local and remote PCS instances This ensures that bot...

Page 869: ...t active Communication interference detector The communication interference detector is continuously measuring and observing the sample latency of the protection telegrams This value is also available as monitored data The function provides three output signals of which only the corresponding one is active at a time depending on if the protection communication supervision is in OK WARNING or ALARM...

Page 870: ...uracy of 0 1 ms in a 50 Hz system gives a maximum amplitude error of approximately around 3 percent An inaccuracy of 1 ms gives a maximum amplitude error of approximately 31 percent The corresponding figures for a 60 Hz system are 4 and 38 percent respectively In the protection relay the time coordination is done with an echo method The protection relays create their own time reference between eac...

Page 871: ...BOOLEAN Protection communication warning ALARM BOOLEAN Protection communication alarm COMM BOOLEAN Communication detected 6 4 7 Settings Table 765 PCS Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 100 300000 ms 10 1000 Reset delay time from alarm and warning into ok state Alarm count 0 99999 1 0 Set new alarm count value Warning count 0 99999 1 0...

Page 872: ...Table 767 PCS Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Changes and additions to the monitored data C Internal improvement D Internal improvement E Function name changed from PCSRTCP to PCSITPC 6 5 Fuse failure supervision 60 6 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC FUSEF ...

Page 873: ... current and the delta voltage measurements can be activated to detect three phase fuse failures which usually are more associated with the voltage transformer switching during station operations 6 5 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of 60 can be described with a module d...

Page 874: ...ive set values of the Current change rate and Voltage change rate settings The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in the current amplitude in each phase separately This is performed when the circuit breaker is closed Information about the circuit breaker position is connected...

Page 875: ... is recommended to scale the default values of voltage based settings with 1 sqrt 3 because the default setting values apply for Delta connected settings The fuse failure detection outputs FUSEF_V and FUSEF_3PH are controlled according to the detection criteria or external signals Table 768 Fuse failure output control Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response Negative seque...

Page 876: ...F_V output signal to block the voltage related functions when the line disconnector is in the open state It is recommended to always set Enable seal in to True This secures that the blocked protection functions remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are restored if the fuse failure has been active for 5 seconds that is the fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the normal voltage condit...

Page 877: ...ed by comparing the calculated value of the negative sequence component voltage to the negative sequence component current The sequence entities are calculated from the measured current and voltage data for all three phases The purpose of this function is to block voltage dependent functions when a fuse failure is detected Since the voltage dependence differs between these functions 60 has two out...

Page 878: ...q current Lev 0 03 0 20 xIn 0 01 0 03 Trip level of neg seq undercurrent element Neg Seq voltage Lev 0 03 0 20 xUn 0 01 0 10 Trip level of neg seq overvoltage element Current change rate 0 01 0 50 xIn 0 01 0 15 Trip level of change in phase current Voltage change rate 0 25 0 90 xUn 0 01 0 40 Trip level of change in phase voltage Change rate enable 0 False 1 True 0 False Enabling operation of chang...

Page 879: ...on ΔV 1 1 set Voltage change rate 30 ms ΔV 2 0 set Voltage change rate 24 ms 1 Includes the delay of the signal output contact fn 50 Hz fault voltage with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 6 5 10 Technical revision history Table 775 60 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Intern...

Page 880: ...n the accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits It utilizes a binary input to indicate the active operation condition The accumulated operation time is one of the parameters for scheduling a service on the equipment like motors It indicates the use of the machine and hence the mechanical wear and tear Generally the equipment manufacturers provide a maintenance schedule based on the number ...

Page 881: ...res the motor run time count to the set values of Warning value and Alarm value to generate the WARNING and ALARM outputs respectively when the counts exceed the levels The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time mode setting Both WARNING and ALARM occur immediately after the conditions are met if Operating time mode is set to Immediate If Operating time mode is s...

Page 882: ...t the condition of the machine and device The information can be co related to other process data to provide diagnoses for the process where the machine or device is applied 6 6 6 Signals Table 776 OPTM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block input status POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0 False When active indicates the equipment is running RESET BOOLEAN 0 False Resets the accum...

Page 883: ...ed data Name Type Values Range Unit Description OPTM Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status OPR_TIME INT32 0 299999 h Total operation time in hours 6 6 9 Technical data Table 781 OPTM Technical data Description Value Motor runtime measurement accuracy1 0 5 1 Of the reading for a stand alone relay without time synchronization 6 6 10 Technical revision history Table 782 OPT...

Page 884: ...878 ...

Page 885: ...MON_ALM PRES_ALM PRES_LO OPEN_LO INVALIDPOS CLOSEPOS GUID 5057DDA1 F011 4268 B7CC 7A4AB01AC2B4 V1 EN Figure 452 Function block 7 1 3 Functionality The circuit breaker condition monitoring function 52CM is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit breaker The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached a predefined value The energy is calculated from the measure...

Page 886: ...ng The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to Disable The operation of 52CM can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections A071103 V4 EN Figure 453 Functional module diagram Section 7 1MAC059074 MB A Condition monitoring functions 880 615 series ANSI Technical Manual...

Page 887: ...re below the setting Acc stop current The CLOSEPOS output is activated when the auxiliary POSOPEN input is FALSE and the POSCLOSE input is TRUE The INVALIDPOS output is activated when both the auxiliary contacts have the same value that is both are in the same logical level or if the auxiliary input contact POSCLOSE is FALSE and the POSOPEN input is TRUE and any of the phase currents exceed the se...

Page 888: ...N_ALM alarm is initiated The time in hours at which this alarm is activated can be set with the Inactive Alm hours parameter as coordinates of UTC The alarm signal MON_ALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK 7 1 4 3 Breaker contact travel time The Breaker contact travel time module calculates the breaker contact travel time for the closing and opening operation The operation of the...

Page 889: ...SOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open To incorporate the time t1 t2 a correction factor needs to be added with topen to get the actual opening time This factor is added with the Opening time Cor t1 t2 setting The closing time is calculated by adding the value set with the Closing time Cor t3 t4 setting to the measured closing time When the setting Travel time Clc mo...

Page 890: ...ated by adding the value set with the Closing time Cor t4 t3 setting to the measured closing time The last measured opening travel time T_TRV_OP and the closing travel time T_TRV_CL are available in the monitored data view on the LHMI or through tools via communications Alarm limit check When the measured opening travel time is longer than the value set with the Open alarm time setting the TRV_T_O...

Page 891: ...via communications The old circuit breaker operation counter value can be taken into use by writing the value to the Counter initial Val parameter and by setting the parameter Initial CB Rmn life in the clear menu from WHMI or LHMI Alarm limit check The OPR_ALM operation alarm is generated when the number of operations exceeds the value set with the Alarm Op number threshold setting However if the...

Page 892: ...ary contact to accumulate the energy from the time the main contact opens If the setting is positive the calculation of energy starts after the auxiliary contact has opened and when the delay is equal to the value set with the Difference Cor time setting When the setting is negative the calculation starts in advance by the correction time before the auxiliary contact opens The accumulated energy o...

Page 893: ... EN Figure 462 Functional module diagram for estimating the life of the circuit breaker Circuit breaker life estimator The circuit breaker life estimator module calculates the remaining life of the circuit breaker If the tripping current is less than the rated operating current set with the Rated Op current setting the remaining operation of the breaker reduces by one operation If the tripping cur...

Page 894: ...ime The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections A071112 V3 EN Figure 463 Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring charged indication and alarm Spring charge time measurement Two binary inputs SPR_CHR_ST and SPR_CHR indicate spring charging started and spring charged respectively The spring cha...

Page 895: ...input is activated the PRES_ALM alarm is activated after a time delay set with the Pressure alarm time setting The PRES_ALM alarm can be blocked by activating the BLOCK input Timer 2 If the pressure drops further to a very low level the PRES_LO_IN binary input becomes high activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with the Pres lockout time setting The PRES_LO alarm can be blocke...

Page 896: ...ker such as lubricating breaker mechanism is generally based on a number of operations A suitable threshold setting to raise an alarm when the number of operation cycle exceeds the set limit helps preventive maintenance This can also be used to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing in case of an oil circuit breaker The change of state can be detected from the binary inpu...

Page 897: ...sing opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker Ia the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation of Directional Coef The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula 1MAC059074 MB A Section 7 Condition monitoring functions 615 series ANSI 891 Technical Manual ...

Page 898: ...5 000 500 14 500 at the rated operating current Remaining life reduction I Ir Directional Coef GUID 5AA23DAD AAF0 4D03 844F 216C80F80789 V1 EN Equation 163 Spring charged indication For normal operation of the circuit breaker the circuit breaker spring should be charged within a specified time Therefore detecting long spring charging time indicates that it is time for the circuit breaker maintenan...

Page 899: ...nput for CB closing and opening travel times RST_SPR_T BOOLEAN 0 False Reset input for the charging time of the CB spring Table 784 52CM Output signals Name Type Description TRV_T_OP_ALM BOOLEAN CB open travel time exceeded set value TRV_T_CL_ALM BOOLEAN CB close travel time exceeded set value SPR_CHR_ALM BOOLEAN Spring charging time has crossed the set value OPR_ALM BOOLEAN Number of CB operation...

Page 900: ... Directional coefficient for CB life calculation Initial CB Rmn life 0 99999 1 5000 Initial value for the CB remaining life Rated Op current 100 00 5000 00 A 0 01 1000 00 Rated operating current of the breaker Rated fault current 500 00 75000 00 A 0 01 5000 00 Rated fault current of the breaker Op number rated 1 99999 1 10000 Number of operations possible at rated current Op number fault 1 10000 1...

Page 901: ...l time of the CB during closing operation T_SPR_CHR FLOAT32 0 00 99 99 s The charging time of the CB spring NO_OPR INT32 0 99999 Number of CB operation cycle INA_DAYS INT32 0 9999 The number of days CB has been inactive CB_LIFE_A INT32 99999 99999 CB Remaining life phase A CB_LIFE_B INT32 99999 99999 CB Remaining life phase B CB_LIFE_C INT32 99999 99999 CB Remaining life phase C IPOW_A FLOAT32 0 0...

Page 902: ...uts and the corresponding Open Dif alarm time and Close Dif alarm time setting parameters D The Operation cycle setting parameter renamed to Initial CB Rmn life The IPOW_A _B _C range changed E Maximum value of initial circuit breaker remaining life time setting Initial CB Rmn life changed from 9999 to 99999 Added support for measuring circuit breaker travelling time from opening closing command a...

Page 903: ... used for monitoring and metering the phase sequence voltages The frequency measurement f is used for monitoring and metering the power system frequency The single phase power and energy measurement SP SE and the three phase power and energy measurement P E is used for monitoring and metering the active power P reactive power Q apparent power S power factor PF and for calculating the accumulated e...

Page 904: ... time interval or calculation mode is changed it initializes the demand value calculation For the very first demand value calculation interval the values are stated as invalid until the first refresh is available The Linear calculation mode uses the periodic sliding average calculation of the measured signal over the demand time interval A new demand value is obtained once in a minute indicating t...

Page 905: ...o zero This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored The active clamping function forces both the actual measurement value and the angle value of the measured signal to zero In the three phase or sequence measuring functions each phase or sequence component has a separate zero point clamping function The zero value detection operates so that once the measured value exceeds or falls below...

Page 906: ...n X_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low The range information changes and the new values are reported GUID AAAA7367 377C 4743 A2D0 8DD4941C585D V1 EN Figure 466 Presentation of operating limits The range information can also be decoded into boolean output signals on some of the measuring functions and the number of phases required to exceed or u...

Page 907: ...oltage measurement VG High limit V high limit res Low limit High high limit V Hi high limit res Low low limit Phase sequence current measurement I1 I2 I0 High limit Ps Seq A high limit Ng Seq A high limit Zro A high limit Low limit Ps Seq A low limit Ng Seq A low limit Zro A low limit High high limit Ps Seq A Hi high Lim Ng Seq A Hi high Lim Zro A Hi high Lim Low low limit Ps Seq A low low Lim Ng ...

Page 908: ...al calculation is configured with the X deadband setting The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0 001 percent x seconds The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula t s deadband Y max min 1000 100 GUID 5381484E E205 4548 A846 D3519578384B V1 EN Equation 164 Example for IA IB IC A deadba...

Page 909: ...4 Hz For REG615 the values are 75 10 65 Hz in 50 Hz network and 90 12 78 Hz in 60 Hz network In the power and energy measurement functions P E and SP SE the deadband supervision is done separately for apparent power S with the preset value of fixed 10 percent of the Sn and the power factor PF with the preset values fixed at 0 10 All the power measurement related values P Q S and PF are reported si...

Page 910: ...68 Cos P S ϕ GUID D729F661 94F9 48B1 8FA0 06E84A6F014C V2 EN Equation 169 Depending on the unit multiplier selected with Power unit Mult the calculated power values are presented in units of kVA kW kVAr or in units of MVA MW MVAr GUID 9947B4F2 CD26 4F85 BF57 EAF1593AAE1B V1 EN Figure 468 Complex power and power quadrants Section 8 1MAC059074 MB A Measurement functions 904 615 series ANSI Technical...

Page 911: ...al values through a parameter or with the RSTACM input Sequence components The phase sequence components are calculated using the phase currents and phase voltages More information on calculating the phase sequence components can be found in Calculated measurements in this manual 8 1 3 Measurement function applications The measurement functions are used for power system measurement supervision and...

Page 912: ...s or goes below the set limits Depending on the measured signal type up to two high limits and up to two low limits can be set for the limit supervision The deadband supervision reports a new measurement value if the input signal has gone out of the deadband state The deadband supervision can be used in value reporting between the measurement point and operation control When the deadband supervisi...

Page 913: ...sable Enable Num of phases 1 1 out of 3 2 2 out of 3 3 3 out of 3 1 1 out of 3 Number of phases required by limit supervision A high high limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 1 40 High alarm current limit A high limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 1 20 High warning current limit A low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low warning current limit A low low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low alarm current limit A deadband 100 100000 1 2...

Page 914: ... for Phase C Time max demand IA Timestamp Time of maximum demand phase A Time max demand IB Timestamp Time of maximum demand phase B Time max demand IC Timestamp Time of maximum demand phase C Time min demand IA Timestamp Time of minimum demand phase A Time min demand IB Timestamp Time of minimum demand phase B Time min demand IC Timestamp Time of minimum demand phase C BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 Tru...

Page 915: ...h high 4 low low IB Amplitude range I_INST_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IC Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value I_ANGL_C FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg IC current angle I_DB_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn IC Amplitude magnitude of reported value I_DMD_C FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Demand value of IC current I_RANGE_C Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low IC Amplitude range 8 1 4 6 Technical data Tabl...

Page 916: ...hree phase voltage measurement VA VB VC 8 1 5 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Three phase voltage measurement VMMXU 3U VA VB VC 8 1 5 2 Function block GUID 5B741292 7FA6 4DEA 8D16 B530FD16A0FE ANSI V1 EN Figure 470 Function block 8 1 5 3 Signals Table 801 VA VB VC Input signals Name Type Default Description V_A_A...

Page 917: ...ng voltage limit V low low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit V deadband 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for integral calculation percentage of difference between min and max as 0 001 s Table 804 VA VB VC Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1 RMS 2 DFT 2 DFT Selects used measurement mode 8 1 5 5 Monitored...

Page 918: ...de magnitude of instantaneous value V_ANGL_BC FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg VBC angle V_DB_BC FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn VBC Amplitude magnitude of reported value V_DMD_BC FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Demand value of VBC voltage V_RANGE_BC Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low VBC Amplitude range V_INST_CA FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn VCA Amplitude magnitude of instantaneous value V_ANGL_CA FLOAT32 180 00 180...

Page 919: ...on accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured fn 2 Hz At voltages in range 0 01 1 15 Vn 0 5 or 0 002 Vn Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 RMS No suppression 8 1 5 7 Technical revision history Table 807 VA VB VC Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Phase and phase to phase voltage angle values and demand values added to Monitored data vi...

Page 920: ...e Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable A Hi high limit res 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 20 High alarm current limit A high limit res 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 05 High warning current limit A deadband res 100 100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for integral calculation percentage of difference between min and max as 0 001 s Table 811 IG Non group settin...

Page 921: ...40 00 xIn Demand value of residual current IG_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Ground current Amplitude range Max demand IG FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Maximum demand for residual current Min demand IG FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Minimum demand for residual current Time max demand IG Timestamp Time of maximum demand residual current Time min demand IG Timestamp Time of minimum demand r...

Page 922: ...ent VG 8 1 7 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU Uo VG 8 1 7 2 Function block A070779 ANSI V1 EN Figure 472 Function block 8 1 7 3 Signals Table 815 VG Input signals Name Type Default Description VG SIGNAL 0 Ground voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Block signal for all binary outputs...

Page 923: ...used measurement mode 8 1 7 5 Monitored data Table 819 VG Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description VG kV FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Measured residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Block signal for all binary outputs HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True High warning VG_INST FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Ground voltage Amplitude magnitude of instantan...

Page 924: ...story Technical revision Change B C Residual voltage angle and demand value added to Monitored data view D Internal improvement E Internal improvement 8 1 8 Frequency measurement f 8 1 8 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Frequency measurement FMMXU f f 8 1 8 2 Function block GUID 7561C612 FAFD 41ED 830C 3EA81E30559...

Page 925: ...entheses 8 1 8 4 Signals Table 822 f Input signals Name Type Default Description F SIGNAL Measured system frequency 8 1 8 5 Settings Table 823 f Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable F Hi high limit 35 00 75 00 Hz 1 60 00 High alarm frequency limit F high limit 35 00 75 00 Hz 1 55 00 High warning...

Page 926: ...ristic Value Operation accuracy 5 mHz in measurement range 35 75 Hz 8 1 8 8 Technical revision history Table 827 f Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added new setting Def frequency Sel Frequency measurement range lowered from 35 Hz to 10 Hz 8 1 9 Sequence current measurement I1 I2 I0 8 1 9 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ...

Page 927: ...r positive sequence current Ps Seq A low limit 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low warning current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A low low Lim 0 00 40 00 xIn 1 0 00 Low alarm current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A deadband 100 100000 1 2500 Deadband configuration value for positive sequence current for integral calculation percentage of difference between min and max as 0 001 s Ng...

Page 928: ...current for integral calculation percentage of difference between min and max as 0 001 s 8 1 9 5 Monitored data Table 830 I1 I2 I0 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description I2 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured negative sequence current I1 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured positive sequence current I0 A FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xIn Measured zero sequence current I2_INST FLOAT32 0 00 40 00 xI...

Page 929: ...NGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Zero sequence current amplitude range 8 1 9 6 Technical data Table 831 I1 I2 I0 Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current f fn 2 Hz 1 0 or 0 002 In at currents in the range of 0 01 4 00 In Suppression of harmonics DFT 50 dB at f n fn where n 2 3 4 5 8 1 9 7 Technical revision histor...

Page 930: ...ve phase sequence voltage 8 1 10 4 Settings Table 834 V1 V2 V0 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 40 High alarm voltage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V high limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 1 20 High warning voltage limit for positive sequence voltage P...

Page 931: ...gh alarm voltage limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V High limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 05 High warning voltage limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V low limit 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low warning voltage limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V low low Lim 0 00 4 00 xUn 1 0 00 Low alarm voltage limit for zero sequence voltage Zro V deadband 100 100000 1 10000 Deadband configuration value for zero sequence v...

Page 932: ...Positive sequence voltage amplitude range V0_INST FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Zero sequence voltage amplitude instantaneous value V0_ANGL FLOAT32 180 00 180 00 deg Zero sequence voltage angle V0_DB FLOAT32 0 00 4 00 xUn Zero sequence voltage amplitude reported value V0_RANGE Enum 0 normal 1 high 2 low 3 high high 4 low low Zero sequence voltage amplitude range 8 1 10 6 Technical data Table 836 V1 V2 V0 ...

Page 933: ...38A24DA 85CE 4246 9C3F DFC6FDAEA302 ANSI V1 EN Figure 476 Function block 8 1 11 3 Signals Table 837 P E Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A current I_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B current I_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C current V_A SIGNAL 0 Phase A voltage V_B SIGNAL 0 Phase B voltage V_C SIGNAL 0 Phase C voltage RSTACM BOOLEAN 0 False Reset of accumulated energy reading 1MAC059074 MB A Sec...

Page 934: ...verse Wh Initial 0 999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse active energy Forward VArh Initial 0 999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for forward reactive energy Reverse VArh Initial 0 999999999 1 0 Preset Initial value for reverse reactive energy 8 1 11 5 Monitored data Table 840 P E Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description S kVA FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Total Apparent Pow...

Page 935: ...0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value ER_FWD_ACM INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated forward reactive energy value Max demand S FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Maximum demand value of apparent power Min demand S FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Minimum demand value of apparent power Max demand P FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Maximum demand value of active power Min demand P FLOAT32 ...

Page 936: ... 0 5 2 PF 0 86 which equals sinφ 0 5 8 1 11 7 Technical revision history Table 842 P E Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Demand values added to Monitored data Recorded data added to store minimum and maximum demand values with timestamps C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 8 1 12 Single phase power and energy measurement SP SE 8 1 12 1 Identification Function descrip...

Page 937: ...ttings Table 844 SP SE Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Power unit Mult 3 k 6 M 3 k Unit multiplier for presentation of the power related values Energy unit Mult 3 k 6 M 3 k Unit multiplier for presentation of the energy related values Active power Dir 1 Forward 2 Reverse 1 Forward Direction...

Page 938: ...32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent Power Phase C PA kW FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Active Power Phase A PB kW FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Active Power Phase B PC kW FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kW Active Power Phase C QA kVAr FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive Power Phase A QB kVAr FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive Power Phase B QC kVAr FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive Power...

Page 939: ...9 99 9 kVAr Maximum demand for phase A Max demand QL2 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Maximum demand for phase B Max demand QL3 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Maximum demand for phase C Min demand QL1 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Minimum demand for phase A Min demand QL2 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Minimum demand for phase B Min demand QL3 FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Minimum demand for...

Page 940: ... 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of instantaneous value Phase A S_INST_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of instantaneous value Phase B S_INST_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of instantaneous value Phase C S_DB_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent power magnitude of reported value Phase A S_DB_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVA Apparent p...

Page 941: ...ST_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive power magnitude of instantaneous value Phase C Q_DB_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive power magnitude of reported value Phase A Q_DB_B FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive power magnitude of reported value Phase B Q_DB_C FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kVAr Reactive power magnitude of reported value Phase C Q_DMD_A FLOAT32 999999 9 9999 99 9 kV...

Page 942: ...everse reactive energy value Phase A ER_RV_ACM_B INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value Phase B ER_RV_ACM_C INT64 0 999999999 kVArh Accumulated reverse reactive energy value Phase C EA_FWD_ACM_A INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value Phase A EA_FWD_ACM_B INT64 0 999999999 kWh Accumulated forward active energy value Phase B EA_FWD_ACM_C INT64 0 9999...

Page 943: ...ts and voltages measured The analog channels can be set to trigger the recording function when the measured value falls below or exceeds the set values The binary signal channels can be set to start a recording either on the rising or the falling edge of the binary signal or on both By default the binary channels are set to record external or internal relay signals for example the pickup or trip s...

Page 944: ...periodic trigger has the Periodic triggering parameter Triggering by binary channels Input signals for the binary channels of the disturbance recorder can be formed from any of the digital signals that can be dynamically mapped A change in the status of a monitored signal triggers the recorder according to the configuration and settings Triggering on the rising edge of a digital input signal means...

Page 945: ... a new non zero setting needs to be valid immediately the user should first set the Periodic trig time parameter to zero and then to the new value The user can monitor the time remaining to the next triggering with the Time to trigger monitored data which counts downwards 8 2 2 3 Length of recordings The user can define the length of a recording with the Record length parameter The length is given...

Page 946: ...quency of binary channels when the rated frequency is 50 Hz Sampling frequency of analog channels when the rated frequency is 60 Hz Sampling frequency of binary channels when the rated frequency is 60 Hz 32 1 Record length 1600 Hz 400 Hz 1920 Hz 480 Hz 16 2 Record length 800 Hz 400 Hz 960 Hz 480 Hz 8 4 Record length 400 Hz 400 Hz 480 Hz 480 Hz 8 2 2 5 Uploading of recordings The protection relay s...

Page 947: ...Individual disturbance recordings can be deleted with PCM600 or any appropriate computer software which can access the protection relay s C COMTRADE folder The disturbance recording is not removed from the protection relay s memory until both of the corresponding COMTRADE files CFG and DAT are deleted The user may have to delete both of the files types separately depending on the software used Del...

Page 948: ...ary channels are constantly recorded into the history memory of the recorder The user can adjust the percentage of the data duration preceding the triggering that is the so called pre trigger time with the Pre trg length parameter The duration of the data following the triggering that is the so called post trigger time is the difference between the recording length and the pre trigger time Changin...

Page 949: ... after a triggering The exclusion mode only applies to the analog and binary channel triggerings not to periodic and manual triggerings When the value set with the Exclusion time parameter is zero the exclusion mode is disabled and there are no restrictions on the triggering types of the successive recordings The exclusion time setting is global for all inputs but there is an individual counter fo...

Page 950: ...hannel is continuously FALSE and the state changes of the corresponding channel are not recorded The corresponding channel name for disabled binary channels in the COMTRADE configuration file is Unused BI To enable or disable an analog or a binary channel of the disturbance recorder the Operation parameter of the corresponding analog or binary channel is set to Enable or Disable The states of manu...

Page 951: ...follows the 1999 version of the COMTRADE standard and uses the binary data file format 8 2 5 Settings Table 849 DFR Non group general settings Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 Enable 5 Disable 1 1 Enable DFR Enabled Disabled Record length 10 500 fundamental cycles 1 50 Size of the recording in fundamental cycles Pre trg length 0 100 1 50 Length of the recording prec...

Page 952: ... 0 Time between periodic triggerings Stor mode periodic 0 Waveform 1 Trend cycle 1 0 Storage mode for periodic triggering Stor mode manual 0 Waveform 1 Trend cycle 1 0 Storage mode for manual triggering Section 8 1MAC059074 MB A Measurement functions 946 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 953: ...26 SUoB 27 SU1B1 28 SU2B1 29 V12 30 V23 31 V31 32 VA 33 VB 34 VC 35 V12B 36 V23B 37 V31B 38 VA B 39 VB B 40 VC B 0 0 Disabled Select the signal to be recorded by this channel Applicable values for this parameter are product variant dependent Every product variant includes only the values that are applicable to that particular variant Channel id text 0 to 64 characters alphanumeric DR analog channe...

Page 954: ...meter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 Enable 5 Disable 1 5 Disable Binary channel is enabled or disabled Level trigger mode 1 Positive or Rising 2 Negative or Falling 3 Both 4 Level trigger off 1 1 Rising Level trigger mode for the binary channel Storage mode 0 Waveform 1 Trend cycle 1 0 Storage mode for the binary channel Channel id text 0 to 64 characters alphanumeric DR b...

Page 955: ...the next periodic triggering 8 2 7 Technical revision history Table 854 DFR Technical revision history Technical revision Change B ChNum changed to EChNum RADR s RADR9 12 added Analog channels 9 12 RBDR33 64 added Binary channels 33 64 C New channels added to parameter Channel selection Selection names for Trig Recording and Clear Recordings updated D Symbols in the Channel selection setting are u...

Page 956: ... sensor information to be used and the versatile analog inputs enabling the tap position supervision through mA There are three user selectable conversion modes available for the 7 bit binary inputs where MSB is used as the SIGN bit the natural binary coded boolean input to the signed integer output binary coded decimal BCD input to the signed integer output and binary reflected GRAY coded input t...

Page 957: ...of 6 bit coded input to an 8 bit signed short integer output For less than 6 bit input for example 19 positions with 5 bits when the BCD coding is used the rest of the bits can be set to FALSE 0 The operation mode NAT2INT is selected when the natural binary coding is used for showing the position of the transformer tap changer The basic principle of the natural binary coding is to calculate the su...

Page 958: ... to bad If the tap changer has auxiliary contacts for indicating the extreme positions of the tap changer their status can be connected to END_POS_R and END_POS_L inputs The END_POS_R End position raise or highest allowed tap position reached status refers to the extreme position that results in the highest number of the taps in the tap changer Similarly END_POS_L End position lower or lowest allo...

Page 959: ... 28 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 19 13 29 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 20 14 24 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 21 15 25 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 22 16 27 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 23 17 26 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 24 18 16 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 25 19 17 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 26 19 19 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 27 19 18 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 28 19 23 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 29 19 22 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 30 19 20 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 31 19 21 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 32 20 63 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 33 21 62 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 34 22 60 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 35 23 61 0 1 0...

Page 960: ...anger operating range from the minimum to maximum turns of the tap and a corresponding mA signal for the tap position are set in X130 RTD Since the values of the X130 RTD outputs are floating point numbers the float to integer T_F32_INT8 conversion is needed before the tap position information can be fed to 84T When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS connector the validated tap changer pos...

Page 961: ...iption BI0 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 1 BI1 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 2 BI2 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 3 BI3 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 4 BI4 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 5 BI5 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input 6 SIGN_BIT BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Binary input sign bit END_POS_R BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True End position raise or highest allowed tap position rea...

Page 962: ...00 ms 8 3 10 Technical revision history Table 861 84T Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Added new input TAP_POS C Internal improvement D Added new inputs END_TPOS_R and END_TPOS_L Added a new output TAP_POS Section 8 1MAC059074 MB A Measurement functions 956 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 963: ... Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Circuit breaker control CBXCBR I O CB 52 Disconnector control DCXSWI I O DCC 29DS Grounding switch control ESXSWI I O ESC 1 29GS 1MAC059074 MB A Section 9 Control functions 615 series ANSI 957 Technical Manual ...

Page 964: ...81 Function block 9 1 3 Functionality 52 29DS and 29GS are intended for circuit breaker disconnector and grounding switch control and status information purposes These functions execute commands and evaluate block conditions and different time supervision conditions The functions perform an execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed If erroneous conditions...

Page 965: ... True 1 True 0 False 0 False 1 True 2 Closed 1 True 0 False 1 True 1 True 1 True 3 Faulty Bad 11 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 False 0 Intermediat e 00 0 False 0 False 0 False Enabling and blocking 52 29DS and 29GS have an enabling and blocking functionality for interlocking and synchrocheck purposes Circuit breaker control 52 Normally the CB closing is enabled that is CLOSE_ENAD signal is TRU...

Page 966: ...d for bypassing this control The ITL_BYPASS input can be used to activate the CLOSE_ENAD discarding the ENA_CLOSE input state However the BLK_CLOSE input always blocks the CLOSE_ENAD output The CB opening OPEN_ENAD logic is identical to CB closing logic The ITL_BYPASS input is used in both CLOSE_ENAD and OPEN_ENAD logics GUID 5C49E128 422F 4991 A7FE 6FB61B72CFD9 V1 EN Figure 483 Enabling and block...

Page 967: ..._ENAD is TRUE If the 25 function is used in Command mode the CL_REQ output can be used in 52 Initially the SYNC_OK input is FALSE When the close command given it activates the CL_REQ output which should be routed to 25 The close command is then processed only after SYNC_OK is received from 25 When using 25 in the Command mode the 52 setting Operation timeout should be set longer than 25 setting Ma...

Page 968: ...ed when the close command is given AU_CLOSE via communication or from LHMI and CLOSE_ENAD signal is TRUE When the TRIP input is TRUE CB closing is not allowed GUID B85B9772 2F20 4BC3 A3AE 90989F4817E2 V1 EN Figure 486 OPEN and CLOSE outputs logic for 52 Opening and closing pulse widths The pulse width type can be defined with theAdaptive pulse setting The function provides two modes to characteriz...

Page 969: ...ire two step commands a selection step and an execution step The secured object control is responsible for the several tasks Command authority ensures that the command source is authorized to operate the object Mutual exclusion ensures that only one command source at a time can control the object Interlocking allows only safe commands Execution supervises the command execution Command canceling ca...

Page 970: ...n the field of distribution and sub transmission automation reliable control and status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a significant role They are needed especially in modern remotely controlled substations Control and status indication facilities are implemented in the same package with 52 29DS and 29GS When primary components are controlled in the ener...

Page 971: ...ssaging 9 1 6 Signals Table 863 52 Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for open position of apparatus from I O1 POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for close position of apparatus from I O1 ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1 True Enables opening ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1 True Enables closing Table continues on next page 1MAC059074 MB A Section 9 Control functions 615 series ANSI 965 T...

Page 972: ...SE BOOLEAN 1 True Enables closing BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks opening BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks closing AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Executes the command for open direction1 2 AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0 False Executes the command for close direction1 2 ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0 False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking when TRUE 1 Not available for monitoring 2 Always direct operation Table 865 ...

Page 973: ... position of apparatus from I O CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Signal for close position of apparatus from I O OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status Table 867 29DS Output signals Name Type Description SELECTED BOOLEAN Object selected EXE_OP BOOLEAN Executes the command for open directi...

Page 974: ...0 ms 10000 30000 Select timeout in ms Pulse length 10 60000 ms 1 200 Open and close pulse length Control model 0 status only 1 direct with normal security 4 sbo with enhanced security 4 sbo with enhanced security Select control model Operation timeout 10 60000 ms 1 500 Timeout for negative termination Identification CBXCBR1 switch position Control Object identification Table 870 52 Non group setti...

Page 975: ...tion cycles Adaptive pulse 0 False 1 True 1 True Stop in right position Event delay 0 60000 ms 1 10000 Event delay of the intermediate position Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model Table 873 29GS Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operatio...

Page 976: ...al equipment model 9 1 8 Monitored data Table 875 52 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0 intermediate 1 open 2 closed 3 faulty Apparatus position indication Table 876 29DS Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0 intermediate 1 open 2 closed 3 faulty Apparatus position indication Table 877 29GS Monitored data Name Type Values Range...

Page 977: ...fault value changed to 30 s for Operation timeout setting C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 Table 880 29GS Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 10 s respectively for Event delay settings Default value changed to 30 s for Operation timeout setting C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced t...

Page 978: ... circuit breaker truck can be monitored with the 52 TOC 29DS function The functions are designed according to the IEC 61850 7 4 standard with the logical node XSWI 9 2 4 Operation principle Status indication and validity check The object state is defined by the two digital inputs POSOPEN and POSCLOSE which are also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS according to Tabl...

Page 979: ...f 52 TOC 29DS and 29GS functions covers remote and local status indication of for example disconnectors air break switches and grounding switches which represent the lowest level of power switching devices without short circuit breaking capability 9 2 6 Signals Table 882 52 TOC 29DS Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0 False Signal for open position of apparatus from I O1 ...

Page 980: ...ge Unit Step Default Description Identification DCSXSWI1 switch position Control Object identification Table 887 52 TOC 29DS Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Event delay 0 60000 ms 1 30000 Event delay of the intermediate position Vendor 0 External equipment vendor Serial number 0 External equipment serial number Model 0 External equipment model Table...

Page 981: ...lues Range Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0 intermediate 1 open 2 closed 3 faulty Apparatus position indication 9 2 9 Technical revision history Table 892 52 TOC 29DS Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and 30 s respectively for Event delay settings C Outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS are forced to FALSE in case status is Faulty 11 Table 89...

Page 982: ...e is provided for asynchronously running systems The main purpose of the asynchronous operation mode is to provide a controlled closing of circuit breakers when two asynchronous systems are connected The synchrocheck operation mode checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker are perfectly synchronized It is used to perform a controlled reconnection of two systems which are divide...

Page 983: ...ting of the line voltage general parameters By default voltages V_BUS and V_LINE are connected as presented in Figure 501 If necessary connections can be switched by setting Voltage source switch to True Energizing check The Energizing check function checks the energizing direction Energizing is defined as a situation where a dead network part is connected to an energized section of the network Th...

Page 984: ...et and the procedure is restarted when the conditions allow The circuit breaker closing is not permitted if the measured voltage on the live side is greater than the set value of Max energizing V The measured energized state is available as a monitored data value ENERG_STATE and as four function outputs LLDB live line dead bus LLLB live line live bus DLLB dead line live bus and DLDB dead line dead...

Page 985: ...le Dead line or bus value Live line or bus value Difference angle V_Bus V_Line Difference voltage fV_Bus fV_Line Frequency Hz f fV_Bus fV_Line Rated frequency Frequency deviation V_Bus V_Line Difference frequency GUID 72527DBF 2FC1 4E3B BE9D E5978DB3BDA4 V2 EN Figure 493 Conditions to be fulfilled when detecting synchronism between systems When the frequency phase angle and voltage conditions are ...

Page 986: ...he circuit breaker are available as monitored data values V_DIFF_MEAS FR_DIFF_MEAS and PH_DIFF_MEAS Also the indications of the conditions that are not fulfilled and thus preventing the breaker closing permission are available as monitored data values V_DIFF_SYNC PH_DIF_SYNC and FR_DIFF_SYNC These monitored data values are updated only when the Synchro check enabled with the Synchro check mode set...

Page 987: ...d signal CL_COMMAND besides the normal closing conditions is needed for delivering the closing signal In the command control mode operation the Synchro check function itself closes the breaker via the SYNC_OK output when the conditions are fulfilled In this case the control function block delivers the command signal to close the Synchro check function for the releasing of a closing signal pulse to...

Page 988: ...larms for a failed closing attempt CL_FAIL_AL and for a command signal that remains active too long CMD_FAIL_AL If the conditions for closing are not fulfilled within the set time of Maximum Syn time a failed closing attempt alarm is given The CL_FAIL_AL alarm output signal is pulse shaped and the pulse length is 500 ms If the external command signal is removed too early that is before conditions ...

Page 989: ...ary the CMD_FAIL_AL alarm output is activated The alarm indicates that the control module has not removed the external command signal after the closing operation To avoid unnecessary alarms the duration of the command signal should be set in such a way that the maximum length of the signal is always below Maximum Syn time 5s Close pulse Maximum Syn time 5s GUID 4DF3366D 33B9 48B5 8EB4 692D98016753...

Page 990: ...a new closing command sequence cannot be started until the external command signal is reset and reactivated The SYNC_INPRO output is active when the closing command sequence is in progress and it is reset when the CL_COMMAND input is reset or Maximum Syn time has elapsed Bypass mode 25 can be set to the bypass mode by setting the parameters Synchrocheck mode and Live dead mode to Disable or altern...

Page 991: ...k numbers is 30 degrees When comparing phase angles the V_BUS input is always the reference This means that when the Yd11 power transformer is used the low voltage side voltage phasor leads by 30 degrees or lags by 330 degrees the high voltage side phasor The rotation of the phasors is counterclockwise The generic rule is that a low voltage side phasor lags the high voltage side phasor by clock nu...

Page 992: ...w seconds later Then the autoreclose function 79 gives a command signal to the synchrocheck function to close the circuit breaker A 25 performs an energizing check as the line AB is de energized V_BUS Live bus value V_LINE Dead line value After verifying the line AB is dead and the energizing direction is correct the protection relay energizes the line V_BUS V_LINE by closing the circuit breaker A...

Page 993: ...ing the energizing inputs V_BUS bus voltage and V_LINE line voltage The wiring should be verified by checking the reading of the phase difference measured between the V_BUS and V_LINE voltages The phase difference measured by the protection relay has to be close to zero within the permitted accuracy tolerances The measured phase differences are indicated in the LHMI At the same time it is recommen...

Page 994: ...MAND BOOLEAN 0 False External closing request BYPASS BOOLEAN 0 False Request to bypass synchronism check and voltage check BLOCK BOOLEAN 0 False Blocking signal of the synchro check and voltage check function Table 896 25 Output signals Name Type Description SYNC_INPRO BOOLEAN Synchronizing in progress SYNC_OK BOOLEAN Systems in synchronism CL_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing failed Table continues on n...

Page 995: ...ncy difference limit Difference angle 5 90 deg 1 5 Maximum angle difference limit Table 898 25 Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Synchro check mode 1 Disable 2 Synchronous 3 Asynchronous 3 Asynchronous Synchro check operation mode Dead line value 0 1 0 8 xUn 0 1 0 2 Voltage low limit line for...

Page 996: ...0 False Voltage source switch 9 3 8 Monitored data Table 900 25 Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description ENERG_STATE Enum 0 Unknown 1 Both Live 2 Live L Dead B 3 Dead L Live B 4 Both Dead Energization state of Line and Bus U_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0 00 1 00 xUn Calculated voltage amplitude difference FR_DIFF_MEAS FLOAT32 0 000 0 100 xFn Calculated voltage frequency difference PH_DIFF_MEAS...

Page 997: ...value or 20 ms 9 3 10 Technical revision history Table 902 25 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Added new setting Voltage source switch to switch the input signals V_BUS bus voltage and V_LINE line voltage between each other 9 4 Autoreclosing 79 9 4 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 de...

Page 998: ...n be re energized The autoreclosing function 79 can be used with any circuit breaker suitable for autoreclosing The function provides five programmable autoreclosing shots which can perform one to five successive autoreclosings of desired type and duration for instance one high speed and one delayed autoreclosing When the reclosing is initiated with pickup of the protection function the autoreclos...

Page 999: ... set by the Max trip time setting the AR function goes to lockout long trip The UNSUC_RECL output is activated after a pre defined two minutes alarming ground fault 9 4 3 2 Zone coordination Zone coordination is used in the zone sequence between local protection units and downstream devices At the falling edge of the INC_SHOTP line the value of the shot pointer is increased by one unless a shot is...

Page 1000: ... be started The slave unit is set to a lockout state if the BLK_RECL_T input is not released within the time defined by the Max wait time setting which follows the initiation of an autoreclosing shot If the terminal priority of the AR unit is set to none the AR unit skips all these actions 9 4 3 4 Thermal overload blocking An alarm or pickup signal from the thermal overload protection 49F can be r...

Page 1001: ...y The setting has three parameter values Enable External Ctl and Disable The setting value Enable enables the reclosing operation and Disable disables it When the setting value External Ctl is selected the reclosing operation is controlled with the RECL_ON input AR_ON is activated when reclosing operation is enabled The operation of 79 can be described using a module diagram All the modules in the...

Page 1002: ...tiation input signals In total the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation or blocking of the autoreclosing shots These lines are divided into two types of channels In three of these channels the signal to the AR function can be delayed whereas the other three channels do not have any delaying capability Each channel that is capable of delaying a pickup signal ha...

Page 1003: ... Str 3 delay shot 1 Str 3 delay shot 2 Str 3 delay shot 3 Str 3 delay shot 4 Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_4 signal Str 4 delay shot 1 Str 4 delay shot 2 Str 4 delay shot 3 Str 4 delay shot 4 Normally only two or three reclosing attempts are made The third and fourth attempts are used to provide the so called fast final trip to lockout GUID 36912067 F77E 457B 87D8 637CE0FA73A6 V1 EN Figure ...

Page 1004: ... AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter A typical autoreclose situation is where one autoreclosing shot has been performed after the fault was detected There are two types of such cases operation initiated with protection pickup signal and operation initiated with protection trip signal In both cases the autoreclosing sequence is successful the reclaim time elapses and no new sequence ...

Page 1005: ...reclosing sequence in progress If any of the input signals INIT_X or DEL_INIT_X are used for blocking the corresponding bit in the Tripping line setting must be FALSE This is to ensure that the circuit breaker does not trip from that signal that is the signal does not activate the OPEN_CB output The default value for the setting is 63 which means that all initiation signals activate the OPEN_CB ou...

Page 1006: ... have settings which give the attempt number columns in the matrix the initiation or blocking signals rows in the matrix and the reclose time of the shot The settings related to CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB com...

Page 1007: ...Blk signals CBB4 0 no blocking signals related to this CBB Shot number CBB4 1 If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line only one shot is allowed before lockout If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line three shots are allowed before lockout A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots In a situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 l...

Page 1008: ... close when requested In such a case the AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command When the wait close time elapses that is the closing of the circuit breaker fails the next shot is automatically started Another example is the embedded generation on the power line which can make the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing If the autoreclose sequence is continued to the second shot a successfu...

Page 1009: ...Logic diagram of auto initiation sequence detection Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the following 1MAC059074 MB A Section 9 Control functions 615 series ANSI 1003 Technical Manual ...

Page 1010: ...nization failure in the first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot In the first shot the synchronization condition is not fulfilled SYNC is FALSE When the auto wait timer elapses the sequence continues to the second shot During the second reclosing the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time h...

Page 1011: ...AR function is in a so called pre lockout state If a new initiation occurs during the pre lockout state the AR function goes to lockout Therefore a new sequence initiation during the pre lockout state is not possible The AR function goes to the pre lockout state in the following cases During SOTF When the AR function is active it stays in a pre lockout state for the time defined by the reclaim tim...

Page 1012: ...be defined with the Synchronisation set setting which is a bit mask The lowest bit in the Synchronisation set setting is related to CBB1 and the highest bit to CBB7 For example if the setting is set to 1 only CBB1 requires synchronism If the setting is it set to 7 CBB1 CBB2 and CBB3 require the SYNC input to be TRUE before the reclosing command can be given A070873 ANSI V1 EN Figure 513 Initiation...

Page 1013: ...out reset setting is not in use the lockout can be released only with the RecRs parameter The AR function can go to lockout for many reasons The INHIBIT_RECL input is active All shots have been executed and a new initiation is made final trip The time set with the Auto wait time parameter expires and the automatic sequence initiation is not allowed because of a synchronization failure The time set...

Page 1014: ...or higher than the value defined with the Protection crd limit setting and all initialization signals have been reset The PROT_CRD output is reset under the following conditions If the cut out time elapses If the reclaim time elapses and the AR function is ready for a new sequence If the AR function is in lockout or disabled that is if the value of the Protection crd mode setting is AR inoperative...

Page 1015: ...se pulse time setting The CLOSE_CB output is deactivated also when the circuit breaker is detected to be closed that is when the CB_POS input changes from open state to closed state The Wait close time setting defines the time after the CLOSE_CB command activation during which the circuit breaker should be closed If the closing of circuit breaker does not happen during this time the autoreclosing ...

Page 1016: ...im time is restarted provided that it is running The frequent operation counter is intended for blocking the autoreclosing function in cases where the fault causes repetitive autoreclosing sequences during a short period of time For instance if a tree causes a short circuit and as a result there are autoreclosing shots within a few minutes interval during a stormy night These types of faults can e...

Page 1017: ...s are reset through communication with the CntRs parameter The same functionality can also be found in the clear menu 79 counters 9 4 6 Application Modern electric power systems can deliver energy to users very reliably However different kind of faults can occur Protection relays play an important role in detecting failures or abnormalities in the system They detect faults and give commands for co...

Page 1018: ...ction can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability for a reclosing sequence In 79 autoreclose function the implementing method of autoreclose sequences is patented by ABB Table 904 Important definitions related to autoreclosing autoreclose shot an operation where after a preset time the breaker is closed from the breaker tripping caused by protection autoreclose sequence a predefine...

Page 1019: ... have settings which give the attempt number columns in the matrix the initiation or blocking signals rows in the matrix and the reclose time of the shot The settings related to CBB configuration are First Seventh reclose time Init signals CBB1 CBB7 Blk signals CBB1 CBB7 Shot number CBB1 CBB7 The reclose time defines the open and dead times that is the time between the OPEN_CB and the CLOSE_CB com...

Page 1020: ...Blk signals CBB4 0 no blocking signals related to this CBB Shot number CBB4 1 If a shot is initiated from the INIT_1 line only one shot is allowed before lockout If a shot is initiated from the INIT_3 line three shots are allowed before lockout A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots In a situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 l...

Page 1021: ... close when requested In such a case the AR function issues a CLOSE_CB command When the wait close time elapses that is the closing of the circuit breaker fails the next shot is automatically started Another example is the embedded generation on the power line which can make the synchronism check fail and prevent the reclosing If the autoreclose sequence is continued to the second shot a successfu...

Page 1022: ...Logic diagram of auto initiation sequence detection Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the following Section 9 1MAC059074 MB A Control functions 1016 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1023: ...in the first shot and circuit breaker closing failure in the second shot In the first shot the synchronization condition is not fulfilled SYNC is FALSE When the auto wait timer elapses the sequence continues to the second shot During the second reclosing the synchronization condition is fulfilled and the close command is given to the circuit breaker after the second reclose time has elapsed After ...

Page 1024: ...een performed only shots 3 to 5 are allowed Additionally the Enable shot jump setting gives two possibilities Only such CBBs that are set for the next shot in the sequence can be accepted for execution For example if the next shot in the sequence should be shot 2 a request from CBB set for shot 3 is rejected Any CBB that is set for the next shot or any of the following shots can be accepted for ex...

Page 1025: ...rcurrent and non directional ground fault protection applications where high speed and delayed autoreclosings are needed can be as follows Example 1 The sequence is implemented by two shots which have the same reclose time for all protection functions namely 50P 1 51P and 51N G The initiation of the shots is done by activating the trip signals of the protection functions 1MAC059074 MB A Section 9 ...

Page 1026: ...ting time for opening the circuit breaker tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker In this case the sequence needs two CBBs The reclosing times for shot 1 and shot 2 are different but each protection function initiates the same sequence The CBB sequence is described in Table 905 as follows GUID A9DFEA78 6500 46BA 96A4 8A39966BE0B0 V1 EN Figure 521 Two shots with three initiation lines ...

Page 1027: ...peed autoreclosing with a short time delay Shot 2 is implemented with CBB2 and meant to be the first shot of the autoreclose sequence initiated by the low stage of the overcurrent protection 51P and the low stage of the non directional ground fault protection 51N G It has the same reclose time in both situations It is set as a high speed autoreclosing for corresponding faults The third shot which ...

Page 1028: ... tl Operating time for the 50P 1 protection stage to clear the fault tl or lo Operating time for the 51P or 51N G protection stage to clear the fault tCB_O Operating time for opening the circuit breaker tCB_C Operating time for closing the circuit breaker In this case the number of needed CBBs is three that is the first shot s reclosing time depends on the initiation signal Section 9 1MAC059074 MB...

Page 1029: ... 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Second reclose time 0 2s an example Shot number CBB3 2 Init signals CBB3 6 lines 2 and 3 2 4 6 Third reclose time 10 0s 9 4 6 4 Delayed initiation lines The autoreclose function consists of six individual autoreclose initiation lines INIT_1 INIT 6 and three delayed initiation lines DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4 DEL_INIT_2 and INIT_2 are connected together with an OR gate ...

Page 1030: ...ine 2 3 or 4 Used for shot 1 Str x delay shot 2 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line used for shot 2 Str x delay shot 3 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line used for shot 3 Str x delay shot 4 Time delay for the DEL_INIT_x line used for shots 4 and 5 Optionally can also be used with SOTF 9 4 6 5 Shot initiation from protection pickup signal All autoreclose shots are initiated by protection trips As a r...

Page 1031: ...rther shots are programmed after the final trip The function is in lockout and the sequence is considered unsuccessful Example 2 The delays can be used also for fast final trip The conditions are the same as in Example 1 with the exception of Str 2 delay shot 3 0 10 seconds The operation in a permanent fault is the same as in Example 1 except that after the second shot when the protection picks up...

Page 1032: ... initialization blocking signal 5 INIT_6 BOOLEAN 0 False AR initialization blocking signal 6 DEL_INIT_2 BOOLEAN 0 False Delayed AR initialization blocking signal 2 DEL_INIT_3 BOOLEAN 0 False Delayed AR initialization blocking signal 3 DEL_INIT_4 BOOLEAN 0 False Delayed AR initialization blocking signal 4 BLK_RECL_T BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks and resets reclose time BLK_RCLM_T BOOLEAN 0 False Blocks an...

Page 1033: ...e Reclosing operation 1 Disable 2 External Ctl 3 Enable 1 Disable Reclosing operation Disable External Ctl Enable Close pulse time 10 10000 ms 10 200 CB close pulse time Reclaim time 100 1800000 ms 100 10000 Reclaim time Terminal priority 1 None 2 Low follower 3 High master 1 None Terminal priority Synchronisation set 0 127 1 0 Selection for synchronizing requirement for reclosing Auto initiation ...

Page 1034: ...0 Shot number for CBB7 Frq Op counter limit 0 250 1 0 Frequent operation counter lockout limit Frq Op counter time 1 250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter time Frq Op recovery time 1 250 min 1 1 Frequent operation counter recovery time Auto init 0 63 1 0 Defines INIT lines that are activated at auto initiation Table 911 79 Non group settings Advanced Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Descr...

Page 1035: ...BB3 Blk signals CBB4 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB4 Blk signals CBB5 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB5 Blk signals CBB6 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB6 Blk signals CBB7 0 63 1 0 Blocking lines for CBB7 Str 2 delay shot 1 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 1st reclose Str 2 delay shot 2 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start2 2nd reclose Str 2 delay shot 3 0 300000 ms 10 0 Delay time for start...

Page 1036: ... 1 INPRO_2 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 2 INPRO_3 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 3 INPRO_4 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 4 INPRO_5 BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Reclosing shot in progress shot 5 DISCR_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Signal indicating that discrimination time is in progress CUTOUT_INPRO BOOLEAN 0 False 1 True Signal i...

Page 1037: ... 0 False 1 True Switch onto fault 79 Enum 1 Enabled 2 blocked 3 test 4 test blocked 5 Disabled Status 9 4 10 Technical data Table 913 79 Technical data Characteristic Value Trip time accuracy 1 0 of the set value or 20 ms 9 4 11 Technical revision history Table 914 79 Technical revision history Technical revision Change B The PROT_DISA output removed and removed the related settings C The default ...

Page 1038: ...1032 ...

Page 1039: ...re 525 Function block 10 1 3 Functionality The current total demand distortion function PQI is used for monitoring the current total demand distortion TDD 10 1 4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting The corresponding parameter values are Enable and Disable The operation of PQI can be described with a module diagram All the modules in the diagram a...

Page 1040: ...Imax_demand Demand calculation The demand value for TDD is calculated separately for each phase If any of the calculated total demand distortion values is above the set alarm limit TDD alarm limit the ALARM output is activated The demand calculation window is set with the Demand interval setting It has seven window lengths from 1 minute to 180 minutes The window type can be set with the Demand win...

Page 1041: ...isturbances and their possible causes it can also detect problem conditions throughout the system before they cause customer complaints equipment malfunctions and even equipment damage or failure Power quality problems are not limited to the utility side of the system In fact the majority of power quality problems are localized within customer facilities Thus power quality monitoring is not only a...

Page 1042: ... 1 8 Monitored data Table 919 PQI Monitored data Name Type Values Range Unit Description Max demand TDD IA FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum demand TDD for phase A Max demand TDD IB FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum demand TDD for phase B Max demand TDD IC FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Maximum demand TDD for phase C Time max dmd TDD IA Timestamp Time of maximum demand TDD phase A Time max dmd TDD IB Timestamp Time of m...

Page 1043: ...D Internal improvement 10 2 Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH 10 2 1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI IEEE C37 2 device number Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI PQM3U PQVPH 10 2 2 Function block GUID CF203BDC 8C9A 442C 8D31 1AD55110469C ANSI V1 EN Figure 527 Function block 10 2 3 Functionality The voltage total harmonic distorti...

Page 1044: ...from the measured harmonic components with the formula THD V V k N k 2 2 1 GUID EF4F9D27 6E81 4697 B02C EDBBD68CE9A8 V1 EN Equation 172 Vk kth harmonic component V1 the voltage fundamental component amplitude Demand calculation The demand value for THD is calculated separately for each phase If any of the calculated demand THD values is above the set alarm limit THD alarm limit the ALARM output is...

Page 1045: ... PQVPH Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for THD 10 2 7 Settings Table 923 PQVPH Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Demand interval 0 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 10 minutes 3 15 minutes 4 30 minutes 5 60 minutes 6 180 minutes 2 10 minutes Time interval for demand calcu...

Page 1046: ...aximum demand THD phase C 3SMHTHD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of THD for phase A DMD_THD_A FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for THD for phase A 3SMHTHD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of THD for phase B DMD_THD_B FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand value for THD for phase B 3SMHTHD_C FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 3 second mean value of THD for phase C DMD_THD_C FLOAT32 0 00 500 00 Demand valu...

Page 1047: ...e variation modes Typically short duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute The maximum magnitude in the case of a voltage swell or depth in the case of a voltage dip or interruption and the duration of the variation can be obtained by measuring the RMS value of the voltage for each phase International standard 61000 4 3...

Page 1048: ...basic difference between these alternatives depends on how many phases are needed to have the voltage variation activated When the Phase mode setting is Single Phase the activation is straightforward There is no dependence between the phases for variation pickup The PICKUP output and the corresponding phase pickup are activated when the limit is exceeded or undershot The corresponding phase pickup...

Page 1049: ...ypes are indicated For example for setting Swell dip the interruption detection is not active and only swell or dip events are indicated In a case where Phase mode is Single Phase and the dip functionality is available the output DIPST is activated when the measured TRMS value drops below the Voltage dip set 3 setting in one phase and also remains above the Voltage Int set setting If the voltage d...

Page 1050: ...unction assumes it to be connected to a voltage measurement channel In other words if an unconnected phase is monitored the function falsely detects a voltage interruption in that phase The maximum magnitude and depth are defined as percentage values calculated from the difference between the reference and the measured voltage For example a dip to 70 percent means that the minimum voltage dip magn...

Page 1051: ...sed by one If the dip limit undershooting duration is shorter than VVa dip time 1 VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1 the event is not detected at all and if the duration is longer than VVa Dur Max MAXDURDIPCNT is increased by one but no event detection resulting in the activation of the TRIP output and recording data update takes place These counters are available through the monitored data view o...

Page 1052: ...tion time Voltage Int set Voltage xVref Time ms 0 0 VVa Dur Max VVa Int time 3 VVa Int time 1 VVa Int time 2 1 00 Momentary interruption Sustained interruption Temporary interruption Maximum duration interruption GUID 0204C8EA 102C 4327 BE84 DCE27747AA30 ANSI V1 EN Figure 534 Interruption operating regions Generally no event detection is done if both the magnitude and duration requirements are not...

Page 1053: ... dip timer is also started after the magnitude undershooting Voltage dip set 2 the momentary dip event instead is detected Consequently the same dip occurrence with a changing variation depth can result in several dip event indications but only one detection For example if the magnitude has undershot Voltage dip set 1 but remained above Voltage Intr set for a shorter time than the value of VVa dip...

Page 1054: ...riation may pick up only when all the monitored phases are active An example of variation duration when Phase mode is Single Phase can be seen in Figure 535 The voltage variation in the example is detected as an interruption for the phase B and a dip for the phase A and also the variation durations are interpreted as independent V_B and V_A durations In case of single phase interruption the DIPST ...

Page 1055: ...n Phase Mode is Three Phase In this case only the Phase Mode value Single Phase results in the PICKUP_B interruption and the PICKUP_A dip It is also possible that there are simultaneously a dip in one phase and a swell in other phases The functionality of the corresponding event indication with one inactive phase is shown in Figure 536 Here the Swell dip variation type of Phase mode is Single Phas...

Page 1056: ...ltage swell both SWELLCNT and DIPCNT are incremented by one Also Figure 537 shows that for the Phase Mode value Three Phase two different time moment variation event swell detections take place and consequently DIPCNT is incremented by one but SWELLCNT is totally incremented by two Both in Figure 536 and Figure 537 it is assumed that variation durations are sufficient for detections to take place ...

Page 1057: ...TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE A Three phase mode B Single phase mode GUID 1C0C906B EC91 4C59 9291 B5002830E590 ANSI V2 EN Figure 537 Concurrent dip and two phase swell 10 3 5 Recorded data Besides counter increments the information required for a later fault analysis is stored after a valid voltage variation is detected 1MAC059074 MB A...

Page 1058: ... exceeded The data objects to be recorded for PQSS are given in Table 926 There are totally three data banks and the information given in the table refers to one data bank content The three sets of recorded data available are saved in data banks 1 3 The data bank 1 holds always the most recent recorded data and the older data sets are moved to the next banks 1 2 and 2 3 when a valid voltage variat...

Page 1059: ... time stamp maximum minimum magnitude measuring time moment during variation Var Ph A rec time Variation magnitude Ph B Variation Ph B Variation magnitude Ph B time stamp maximum minimum magnitude measuring time moment during variation Var Ph B rec time Variation magnitude Ph C Variation Ph C Variation magnitude Ph C time stamp maximum minimum magnitude measuring time moment during variation Var P...

Page 1060: ...pe Swell dip Int 7 10 3 6 Application Voltage variations are the most typical power quality variations on the public electric network Typically short duration voltage variations are defined to last more than half of the nominal frequency period and less than one minute European Standard EN 50160 and IEEE Std 1159 1995 These short duration voltage variations are almost always caused by a fault cond...

Page 1061: ...lly associated with the switchgear operation related to the occurrence and termination of short circuits The operation of a circuit breaker disconnects a part of the system from the source of energy In the case of overhead networks automatic reclosing sequences are often applied to the circuit breakers that interrupt fault currents All these actions result in a sudden reduction of voltages on all ...

Page 1062: ...tion detected PICKUP BOOLEAN Voltage variation present SWELLST BOOLEAN Voltage swell active DIPST BOOLEAN Voltage dip active INTST BOOLEAN Voltage interruption active 10 3 8 Settings Table 930 PQSS Group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Reference voltage 10 0 200 0 Un 0 1 57 7 Reference supply voltage in Voltage dip set 1 10 0 100 0 0 1 80 0 Dip limit 1 in of ref...

Page 1063: ...tion Int duration 2 VVa Int time 3 2000 60000 ms 10 3000 Voltage variation interruption duration 3 VVa Dur Max 100 3600000 ms 100 60000 Maximum voltage variation duration Table 931 PQSS Non group settings Basic Parameter Values Range Unit Step Default Description Operation 1 enable 5 disable 1 enable Operation Disable Enable Variation enable 1 Swell 2 Dip 3 Swell dip 4 Interruption 5 Swell Int 6 D...

Page 1064: ...operation counter INSTDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Instantaneous dip operation counter MOMDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Momentary dip operation counter TEMPDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Temporary dip operation counter MAXDURDIPCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Maximum duration dip operation counter MOMINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Momentary interruption operation counter TEMPINTCNT INT32 0 2147483647 Temporary interruption...

Page 1065: ...tion duration Phase B Var Dur Ph B time Timestamp Variation Ph B start time stamp Variation Dur Ph C FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Variation duration Phase C Var Dur Ph C time Timestamp Variation Ph C start time stamp Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magnitude Phase A preceding variation Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magnitude Phase B preceding variation Var current Ph ...

Page 1066: ...ent Ph C FLOAT32 0 00 60 00 xIn Current magnitude Phase C preceding variation Time Timestamp Time Variation type Enum 0 No variation 1 Swell 2 Dip 3 Swell dip 4 Interruption 5 Swell Int 6 Dip Int 7 Swell dip Int Variation type Variation Ph A FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Variation magnitude Phase A Var Ph A rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase A time stamp Variation Ph B FLOAT32 0 00 5 00 xUn Vari...

Page 1067: ...cal data Table 934 PQSS Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 5 of the set value or 0 2 of reference voltage Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Swell 1 04 Dip Interruption 10 3 11 Technical revision history Table 935 PQSS Technical revision history Technical revision Change B Internal improvement C Internal improvement D Internal improvement 10 4 Voltage unbalance PQVUB 10 4 1 Identific...

Page 1068: ... voltage magnitude to the positive sequence voltage magnitude and ratio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude to the mean of the phase voltage magnitude PQVUB provides statistics which can be used to verify the compliance of the power quality with the European standard EN 50160 2000 The statistics over selected period include a freely selectable percentile fo...

Page 1069: ...lected the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the zero sequence voltage magnitude When the Neg to Pos Seq mode is selected the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the negative sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence magnitude When the Zero to Pos Seq mode is selected the voltage unbalance is calculated based on the ratio of the zero sequence voltage magnitude to...

Page 1070: ...Observation period The Observation period module calculates the length of the observation time for the Statistics recorder sub module as well as determines the possible start of a new one A new period can be started by timed activation using calendar time settings Obs period Str year Obs period Str month Obs period Str day and Obs period Str hour The observation period start time settings Obs peri...

Page 1071: ...of the period is determined by the settings Obs period selection and User Def Obs period The OBS_PR_ACT output is an indication signal which exhibits rising edge TRUE when the observation period starts and falling edge FALSE when the observation period ends If the Percentile unbalance Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change when OBS_PR_ACT is active OBS_PR_ACT deactivates immediately 1...

Page 1072: ...Figure 543 Periods for statistics recorder with different trigger modes and period settings The BLOCK input blocks the OBS_PR_ACT output which then disables the maximum value calculation of the Statistics recorder module If the trigger mode is selected Periodic or Continuous and the blocking is deactivated before the next observation period is due to start the scheduled period starts normally Sect...

Page 1073: ...re less than or equal to the calculated percentile The computed output value PCT_UNB_VAL below which the percentile of the values lies is available in the Monitored data view The PCT_UNB_VAL output value is updated at the end of the observation period If the output PCT_UNB_VAL is higher than the defined setting Unbalance pickup val at the end of the observation period an alarm output PCT_UNB_AL is...

Page 1074: ...ome cases the condition of a balance network and load is not met completely which leads to a current and voltage unbalance in the system Providing unbalanced supply voltage has a detrimental effect on load operation For example a small magnitude of a negative sequence voltage applied to an induction motor results in a significant heating of the motor A balanced supply balanced network and balanced...

Page 1075: ...tio of maximum phase voltage magnitude deviation from the mean voltage magnitude to the mean of phase voltage magnitude Usually the ratio of the negative sequence voltage magnitude to the positive sequence voltage magnitude is selected for monitoring the voltage unbalance However other methods may also be used if required 10 4 6 Signals Table 938 PQVUB Input signals Name Type Default Description V...

Page 1076: ...B_VAL is calculated Obs period selection 1 1 Hour 2 12 Hours 3 1 Day 4 7 Days 5 User defined 5 User defined Observation period for unbalance calculation User Def Obs period 1 168 h 1 168 User define observation period for statistic calculation Obs period Str year 2008 2076 2011 Calendar time for observation period start year in YYYY Obs period Str month 0 reserved 1 January 2 February 3 March 4 Ap...

Page 1077: ...ervation period Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 seconds unbalance voltage Time Max Unb Volt Timestamp Time stamp of maximum voltage unbalance Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0 000 3600 000 s Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0 00 150 00 Maximum 3 seconds unbala...

Page 1078: ...e 942 PQVUB Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy 1 5 of the set value or 0 002 Vn Reset ratio Typically 0 96 Section 10 1MAC059074 MB A Power quality measurement functions 1072 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1079: ...olely with the Reset delay time setting The purpose of the delayed reset is to enable fast clearance of intermittent faults for example self sealing insulation faults and severe faults which may produce high asymmetrical fault currents that partially saturate the current transformers It is typical for an intermittent fault that the fault current contains so called drop off periods during which the...

Page 1080: ...off In case 1 the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2 the counter is reset immediately because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1074 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1081: ...urrent is below the set Pickup value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the PICKUP output and the operation timer starts elapsing The reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears When the reset drop off timer elapses the operation timer is reset Since this happens before another pi...

Page 1082: ...s below the set Pickup value and the set hysteresis region The timer input rises when a fault current is detected The definite timer activates the PICKUP output and the operation timer starts elapsing The reset drop off timer starts when the timer input falls that is the fault disappears Another fault situation occurs before the reset drop off timer has elapsed This causes the activation of the TR...

Page 1083: ...ime setting the operation timer is reset in the same way as described in Figure 545 regardless of the BLOCK input The selected blocking mode is Freeze timer 11 2 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 11 2 1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection In inverse time modes the trip time depends on the momentary value of the current the higher the current the faster the trip time Th...

Page 1084: ...level out the inverse time characteristic The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum operating time for the IDMT curve that is the operation time is always at least the Minimum trip time setting Alternatively the IDMT Sat point is used for giving the leveling out point as a multiple of the Pickup value setting Global setting Configuration System IDMT Sat point The default parameter value is...

Page 1085: ...tion time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with the Minimum trip time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1079 Technical Manual ...

Page 1086: ...re 549 Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with IDMT Sat point setting value 11 the Minimum trip time setting is set to minimum Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1080 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1087: ...Sat point setting is set to maximum and the Minimum trip time setting is set to minimum The grey zone in Figure 550 shows the behavior of the curve in case the measured current is outside the guaranteed measuring range Also the maximum measured current of 50 x In gives the leveling out point 50 2 5 20 x I I 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1081 Technical M...

Page 1088: ... Pickup value k set Time multiplier Table 943 Curve parameters for ANSI and IEC IDMT curves Curve name A B C 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse 28 2 0 1217 2 0 2 ANSI Very Inverse 19 61 0 491 2 0 3 ANSI Normal Inverse 0 0086 0 0185 0 02 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 0 0515 0 1140 0 02 6 Long Time Extremely Inverse 64 07 0 250 2 0 7 Long Time Very Inverse 28 55 0 712 2 0 8 Long Time Inverse 0 086 0 185 0 02 9 IE...

Page 1089: ...B C 12 IEC Extremely Inverse 80 0 0 0 2 0 13 IEC Short Time Inverse 0 05 0 0 0 04 14 IEC Long Time Inverse 120 0 0 1 0 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1083 Technical Manual ...

Page 1090: ...A070750 V2 EN Figure 551 ANSI extremely inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1084 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1091: ...A070751 V2 EN Figure 552 ANSI very inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1085 Technical Manual ...

Page 1092: ...A070752 V2 EN Figure 553 ANSI normal inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1086 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1093: ...A070753 V2 EN Figure 554 ANSI moderately inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1087 Technical Manual ...

Page 1094: ...A070817 V2 EN Figure 555 ANSI long time extremely inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1088 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1095: ...A070818 V2 EN Figure 556 ANSI long time very inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1089 Technical Manual ...

Page 1096: ...A070819 V2 EN Figure 557 ANSI long time inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1090 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1097: ...A070820 V2 EN Figure 558 IEC normal inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1091 Technical Manual ...

Page 1098: ...A070821 V2 EN Figure 559 IEC very inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1092 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1099: ...A070822 V2 EN Figure 560 IEC inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1093 Technical Manual ...

Page 1100: ...A070823 V2 EN Figure 561 IEC extremely inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1094 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1101: ...A070824 V2 EN Figure 562 IEC short time inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1095 Technical Manual ...

Page 1102: ...A070825 V2 EN Figure 563 IEC long time inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1096 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1103: ... Measured current I set Pickup value k set Time multiplier 11 2 1 3 RI and RD type inverse time characteristics The RI type simulates the behavior of electromechanical relays The RD type is a ground fault specific characteristic The RI type is calculated using the formula t s k I I 0 339 0 236 A060642 V2 EN Equation 175 The RD type is calculated using the formula t s I k I 5 8 1 35 In A060643 V2 E...

Page 1104: ...t s Trip time in seconds k set Time multiplier I Measured current I set Pickup value Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1098 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1105: ...A070826 V2 EN Figure 564 RI type inverse time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1099 Technical Manual ...

Page 1106: ...A070827 V2 EN Figure 565 RD type inverse time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1100 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1107: ...set Pickup value including hysteresis The integral sum of the inverse time counter is reset if another pickup does not occur during the reset delay If the Type of reset curve setting is selected as Def time reset the current level has no influence on the reset characteristic Inverse reset Inverse reset curves are available only for ANSI and user programmable curves If you use other curve types imm...

Page 1108: ...verse reset curves Curve name D 1 ANSI Extremely Inverse 29 1 2 ANSI Very Inverse 21 6 3 ANSI Normal Inverse 0 46 4 ANSI Moderately Inverse 4 85 6 Long Time Extremely Inverse 30 7 Long Time Very Inverse 13 46 8 Long Time Inverse 4 6 Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1102 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1109: ...A070828 V1 EN Figure 566 ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1103 Technical Manual ...

Page 1110: ...A070829 V1 EN Figure 567 ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1104 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1111: ...A070830 V1 EN Figure 568 ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1105 Technical Manual ...

Page 1112: ...A070831 V1 EN Figure 569 ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1106 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1113: ...A070832 V1 EN Figure 570 ANSI long time extremely inverse reset time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1107 Technical Manual ...

Page 1114: ...A070833 V1 EN Figure 571 ANSI long time very inverse reset time characteristics Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1108 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1115: ...A070834 V1 EN Figure 572 ANSI long time inverse reset time characteristics 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1109 Technical Manual ...

Page 1116: ...me counter is frozen at the value of the moment just before the freezing Freezing of the counter value is chosen when the user does not wish the counter value to count upwards or to be reset This may be the case for example when the inverse time function of a protection relay needs to be blocked to enable the definite time operation of another protection relay for selectivity reasons especially if...

Page 1117: ...or integration starts immediately when the voltage exceeds the set value of the Pickup value setting and the PICKUP output is activated The TRIP output of the component is activated when the cumulative sum of the integrator calculating the overvoltage situation exceeds the value set by the inverse time mode The set value depends on the selected curve type and the setting values used The user deter...

Page 1118: ...C 8215 30C089C80EAD ANSI V1 EN Figure 573 Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set to 0 5 second Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1112 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1119: ...8A 8F07 E110DD63FCCF ANSI V1 EN Figure 574 Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set to 1 second 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1113 Technical Manual ...

Page 1120: ...6E9DC0FE 7457 4317 9480 8CCC6D63AB35 ANSI V1 EN Equation 179 t s trip time in seconds V measured voltage V the set value of Pickup value k the set value of Time multiplier Table 946 Curve coefficients for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves Curve name A B C D E 17 Inverse Curve A 1 1 0 0 1 18 Inverse Curve B 480 32 0 5 0 035 2 19 Inverse Curve C 480 32 0 5 0 035 3 Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A Gener...

Page 1121: ...4044C 052E 4CBD 8247 C6ABE3796FA6 ANSI V1 EN Figure 575 Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1115 Technical Manual ...

Page 1122: ...0E1C2 48C8 4DC7 A84B 174544C09142 ANSI V1 EN Figure 576 Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1116 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1123: ...98DB7 90A3 47F2 AEF9 45FF148CB679 ANSI V1 EN Figure 577 Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1117 Technical Manual ...

Page 1124: ...cents compared to Pickup value For example due to the curve equation B and C the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that when the input voltages are in the range of Pickup value to Curve Sat Relative in percent over Pickup value the equation uses Pickup value 1 0 Curve Sat Relative 100 for the measured voltage Although the curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio V V e...

Page 1125: ...rip time setting defines the minimum trip time possible for the IDMT mode For setting a value for this parameter the user should carefully study the particular IDMT curve 11 3 2 1 Standard inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection The trip times for the standard undervoltage IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A B C D and E The inverse trip time can be calculated with the ...

Page 1126: ...40C3B B483 40E6 9767 69C1536E3CBC ANSI V1 EN Figure 578 Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection Section 11 1MAC059074 MB A General function block features 1120 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1127: ...D0F5F 9265 4D9A A7C0 E274AA3A6BB1 ANSI V1 EN Figure 579 Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block features 615 series ANSI 1121 Technical Manual ...

Page 1128: ...ents compared with Pickup value For example due to the curve equation B the characteristics equation output is saturated in such a way that when input voltages are in the range from Pickup value to Curve Sat Relative in percents under Pickup value the equation uses Pickup value 1 0 Curve Sat Relative 100 for the measured voltage Although the curve A has no discontinuities when the ratio V V exceed...

Page 1129: ...appropriate quality information in the measurement view The frequency protection functions are blocked when the quality is bad thus the timers and the function outputs are reset When the frequency is out of the function block s setting range but within the measurement range the protection blocks are running However the TRIP outputs are blocked until the frequency restores to a valid range 11 5 Fre...

Page 1130: ...set times given in technical data are only valid in the frequency range specified for each function Typical operate time examples at low frequencies are given in Table Table 948 Protection operate time examples at low frequency Function Characteristic Value1 51P 50P Trip delay time 40 ms IFault 1 1 set Pickup value 10 Hz Measurement mode RMS or DFT Measurement mode Peak to Peak Typically 130 ms Ty...

Page 1131: ...ed by using wide peak to peak measurement mode operational from 2 Hz upward with designated start up overcurrent protection function 51P Before the generator is connected with the rest of the network by closing the circuit breaker the designated start up overcurrent function should be either blocked or its start value increased as the Pickup value setting is typically lower than the nominal curren...

Page 1132: ... settings and accurate operation of the low stage which may be due to a considerable amount of harmonics on the primary side currents In such a case the operation can be based solely on the fundamental frequency component of the current In addition the DFT mode has slightly higher CT requirements than the peak to peak mode if used with high and instantaneous stages Peak to peak The peak to peak me...

Page 1133: ...he Measurement mode setting Wide P to P The measurement mode calculates the average from the positive and negative peak values over the 500 ms wide measurement window independently of the Frequency adaptivity setting value Retardation and reset times are longer due to the length of the measurement window The frequency of the fault current affects the operate time The damping of the harmonics is qu...

Page 1134: ... C 0 3 GUID 49CFB460 5B74 43A6 A72C AAD3AF795716 ANSI V1 EN Equation 189 V V a V a V A B C 1 2 3 GUID 7A6B6AAD 8DDC 4663 A72F A3715BF3E56A ANSI V1 EN Equation 190 V V a V a V A B C 2 2 3 GUID 6FAAFCC1 AF25 4A0A 8D9B FC2FD0BCFB21 ANSI V1 EN Equation 191 When VT connection is selected as Delta the positive and negative phase sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase to phase voltages...

Page 1135: ...ltages are calculated from the phase to ground voltages when VT connection is selected as Wye according to the equations V V V AB A B GUID A2287CBF D979 44CD 91ED 8CEBD120F1D8 V1 EN Equation 197 V V V BC B C GUID 752436ED 0955 4C59 80C8 22DACEDE65D7 V1 EN Equation 198 V V V CA C A GUID 4AE4B43A B0A7 41DE 9C84 55527D9F6D78 V1 EN Equation 199 1MAC059074 MB A Section 11 General function block feature...

Page 1136: ...1130 ...

Page 1137: ...curacy limit primary current to the rated primary current For example a protective current transformer of type 5P10 has the accuracy class 5P and the accuracy limit factor 10 For protective current transformers the accuracy class is designed by the highest permissible percentage composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current prescribed for the accuracy class concerned followed by the ...

Page 1138: ...al overcurrent protection does not set high requirements on the accuracy class or on the actual accuracy limit factor Fa of the CTs It is however recommended to select a CT with Fa of at least 20 The nominal primary current I1n should be chosen in such a way that the thermal and dynamic strength of the current measuring input of the protection relay is not exceeded This is always fulfilled when I1...

Page 1139: ...lay that is as long as the time constant of the DC component of the fault current when the current is only slightly higher than the pickup current This depends on the accuracy limit factor of the CT on the remanence flux of the core of the CT and on the trip time setting With inverse time mode of operation the delay should always be considered as being as long as the time constant of the DC compon...

Page 1140: ... application point of view the suitable setting for instantaneous stage 50P 3 in this example is 3 500 A 5 83 I2n I2n is the 1 2 multiple with nominal primary current of the CT For the CT characteristics point of view the criteria given by the current transformer selection formula is fulfilled and also the protection relay setting is considerably below the Fa In this application the CT rated burde...

Page 1141: ... Ω and the accuracy limit factor Fn corresponding to the rated burden is 20 5P20 Thus the internal burden of the current transformer is Sin 5A 2 0 07 Ω 1 75 VA The input impedance of the protection relay at a rated current of 5A is 20 mΩ If the measurement conductors have a resistance of 0 113 Ω the actual burden of the current transformer is Sa 5A 2 0 113 0 020 Ω 3 33 VA Thus the accuracy limit f...

Page 1142: ...manence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density The manufacturer of the CT has to be contacted when an accurate value for the parameter r is needed The value r 0 4 is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not available The required minimum time to saturate Tm in 87T is half fundamental cycle period 10 ms when fn 50Hz Two typical cases are considered for the determi...

Page 1143: ...er assumed to be 50 ms here Assuming a maximum fault current being 30 percent lower than in the bus fault and a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum Ikmax 0 7 10 7 Ir Tdc 50 ms ω 100π Hz Tm 10 ms Kr 1 1 0 4 1 6667 When the values are substituted in the equation the result is Fa K Ik T e r dc T T m dc max 0 9 1 1 40 ω GUID 9B859B2D AC40 4278 8A99 3475442D7C67 V1 EN If the actual burden of the curren...

Page 1144: ...ctor due to oversizing the CT 1500 1000 30 45 In 87T it is important that the accuracy limit factors Fa of the phase current transformers at both sides correspond with each other that is the burdens of the current transformers on both sides are to be as equal as possible If high inrush or pickup currents with high DC components pass through the protected object when it is connected to the network ...

Page 1145: ...Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 13 1 Module slot numbering 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1139 Technical Manual ...

Page 1146: ... D05F958D 8AD5 4EBB 808E B0F9DBA68E05 V2 EN Figure 581 Module slot numbering 1 X000 2 X100 3 X110 4 X120 5 X130 Section 13 1MAC059074 MB A Protection relay s physical connections 1140 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1147: ...rs X100 and X110 The ground lead must be at least a 12 Gauge wire and as short as possible 13 3 Binary and analog connections All binary and analog connections are described in the product specific application manuals 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1141 Technical Manual ...

Page 1148: ...optical fiber connector Always install dust caps on unplugged fiber connectors If contaminated clean optical connectors only with fiber optic cleaning products 13 4 1 Ethernet RJ 45 front connection The protection relay is provided with an RJ 45 connector on the LHMI The connector is intended for configuration and setting purposes The interface on the PC side has to be configured in a way that it ...

Page 1149: ...ng or daisy chain type of network topology In loop type topology a self healing Ethernet loop is closed by a managed switch supporting rapid spanning tree protocol In daisy chain type of topology the network is bus type and it is either without switches where the station bus starts from the station client or with a switch to connect some devices and the protection relays of this product series to ...

Page 1150: ...LD is always the topmost in the communication module Line differential communication cards COM0008 and COM0036 are provided with multimode optical LC connector Line differential communication cards COM0010 and COM0035 are provided with single mode optical LC connector The port cannot be used with any other Ethernet communication network The interface speed is 100 Mbps Use direct link Switches hubs...

Page 1151: ...t after transmission trough full circle 13 4 7 Communication interfaces and protocols The communication protocols supported depend on the optional rear communication module Table 950 Supported station communication interfaces and protocols Interfaces Protocols Ethernet Serial 100BASE TX RJ 45 100BASE FX LC EIA 232 EIA 485 Fiber optic ST IEC 61850 8 1 IEC 61850 9 2 LE 1 MODBUS RTU ASCII MODBUS TCP ...

Page 1152: ...3 RS 485 IRIG B COM0005 RJ 45 ARC COM0006 LC ARC COM0007 RS 485 IRIG B ARC GUID 9942EA65 7B6F 4987 BD1A 9A88B0B222D6 V3 EN Figure 583 Communication module options Section 13 1MAC059074 MB A Protection relay s physical connections 1146 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1153: ...LC RS485 IRIG B COM0013 RJ 45 RS485 IRIG B ARC COM0014 LC RS485 IRIG B ARC COM0023 RJ 45 RS232 485 RS485 ST IRIG B GUID 07821EE0 53E5 44A8 82BF 1C1D652DD21E V2 EN Figure 584 Communication module options 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1147 Technical Manual ...

Page 1154: ...SR and PRP The third port without the LAN A or LAN B label is an interlink port which is used as a redundancy box connector with redundant Ethernet protocols Table 951 Station bus communication interfaces included in communication modules Module ID RJ 45 LC EIA 485 EIA 232 ST COM0001 1 COM0002 1 COM0003 1 COM0005 1 COM0006 1 COM0007 1 COM00081 2 1 1 COM00101 2 1 1 COM0011 1 1 Table continues on ne...

Page 1155: ...gnal activity 1 Depending on the COM module and jumper configuration Table 953 LED descriptions for COM0008 and COM0010 LED Connector Description1 X16 X16 X16 LD link status and activity X1 X1 X1 LAN link status and activity X2 X2 X2 LAN link status and activity RX X5 COM1 2 wire receive activity COM2 4 wire receive activity TX X5 COM1 2 wire transmit activity COM2 4 wire transmit activity RX X5 X...

Page 1156: ...nding on the jumper configuration Table 955 LED descriptions for COM0031 COM0034 and COM0037 LED Connector Description X1 X1 X1 LAN1 link status and activity X2 X2 X2 LAN2 link status and activity X3 X3 X3 LAN3 link status and activity RX X9 COM1 fiber optic receive activity TX X9 COM1 fiber optic transmit activity Table 956 LED descriptions for COM0035 and COM0036 LED Connector Description X1 X1 ...

Page 1157: ...umper locations and connections X4 X6 X5 X8 X9 X7 1 2 3 A070893 V3 EN Figure 586 Jumper connectors on communication module 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1151 Technical Manual ...

Page 1158: ...up and pull down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X4 X5 X7 and X8 to enabled position The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled position The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default Table 958 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X4 1 2 A bias enabled COM2 4 wire TX channel 2 3 A bias disa...

Page 1159: ... recommended to connect to AGND pin in RS 485 connector an additional ground wire which runs inside the shielded serial cable The optional communication modules include support for EIA 485 serial communication X5 connector Depending on the configuration the communication modules can host either two 2 wire ports or one 4 wire port The two 2 wire ports are called COM1 and COM2 Alternatively if there...

Page 1160: ...d The two 2 wire ports are called COM1 and COM2 Alternatively if only one 4 wire port is configured the port is called COM2 The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port Table 960 Configuration options of the two independent communication ports COM1 connector X6 COM2 connector X5 or X12 EIA 232 Optical ST X12 EIA 485 2 wire EIA 485 2 wire X5 EIA 485 4 wire EIA 485 4 wire X5 Section 13 1MAC05907...

Page 1161: ...3 1 2 3 X24 1 2 3 X3 X25 1 2 3 5 4 3 2 1 X 27 X 28 3 2 1 GUID D4044F6B 2DA8 4C14 A491 4772BA108292 V1 EN Figure 587 Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revisions A F 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1155 Technical Manual ...

Page 1162: ...C65FC8 V1 EN Figure 588 Jumper connections on communication module COM0023 revision G COM1 port connection type can be either EIA 232 or EIA 485 Type is selected by setting jumpers X19 X20 X21 and X26 The jumpers are set to EIA 232 by default Section 13 1MAC059074 MB A Protection relay s physical connections 1156 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1163: ... been set to no termination and no biasing as default Table 962 2 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X5 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled1 COM1 Rear connector X6 2 wire connection X6 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled1 X7 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled1 1 Default setting Table 963 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for...

Page 1164: ...nnectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description X13 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled X14 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disabled X15 1 2 2 3 Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled Table 966 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X13 1 2 2 3 A bias enabled A bias disabled COM2 4 wire TX channel X14 1 2 2 3 B bias enabled B bias disab...

Page 1165: ... Pin EIA 232 1 DCD 2 RxD 3 TxD 4 DTR 5 AGND 6 7 RTS 8 CTS Table 969 EIA 485 connections for COM0023 X6 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 1 Rx 6 Rx 7 B Tx 8 A Tx Table 970 EIA 485 connections for COM0023 X5 Pin 2 wire mode 4 wire mode 9 Rx 8 Rx 7 A Tx 6 B Tx 5 AGND isolated ground 4 IRIG B 3 IRIG B 2 1 GND case 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1159 Techni...

Page 1166: ...lel 2 wire serial communication channels can be used at the same time Also optical serial connector can be used in parallel with one 2 wire or 4 wire serial channel The maximum number of devices nodes connected to the bus where the protection relay is being used is 32 and the maximum length of the bus is 1200 meters X8 X9 X7 X3 X6 X5 X15 X24 1 2 3 X 16 3 2 1 1 2 3 GUID FDC31D60 8F9F 4D2A A1A2 F0E5...

Page 1167: ...ion the pull up and pull down resistors are selected by setting jumpers X3 X5 X7 and X8 to enabled position The bus termination is selected by setting jumpers X6 and X9 to enabled position The jumpers have been set to no termination and no biasing as default Table 972 4 wire EIA 485 jumper connectors for COM2 Group Jumper connection Description Notes X3 1 2 A Bias enabled COM2 4 wire TX channel 2 ...

Page 1168: ...e and through capacitor from other nodes The optional communication modules include support for EIA 485 serial communication X5 connector Depending on the configuration the communication modules can host either two 2 wire ports or one 4 wire port The two 2 wire ports are called as COM1 and COM2 Alternatively if there is only one 4 wire port configured the port is called COM2 The fiber optic ST con...

Page 1169: ...cation modules include support for optical ST serial communication X9 connector The fiber optic ST connection uses the COM1 port X15 X24 3 2 1 3 2 1 GUID CA481BBF C1C9 451D BC18 19EC49B8A3A3 V2 EN Figure 590 Jumper connections on communication module COM0032 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1163 Technical Manual ...

Page 1170: ...3 2 GUID 4CAF22E5 1491 44EF BFC7 45017DED68F4 V2 EN Figure 591 Jumper connections on communication module COM0033 Section 13 1MAC059074 MB A Protection relay s physical connections 1164 615 series ANSI Technical Manual ...

Page 1171: ...ommunication module COM0034 Table 975 X9 Optical ST jumper connectors Group Jumper connection Description X15 1 2 2 3 Star topology Loop topology X24 1 2 2 3 Idle state Light on Idle state Light off 1MAC059074 MB A Section 13 Protection relay s physical connections 615 series ANSI 1165 Technical Manual ...

Page 1172: ...1166 ...

Page 1173: ...0 V DC 48 60 110 125 220 250 V DC Maximum interruption time in the auxiliary DC voltage without resetting the relay 50 ms at Vn Auxiliary voltage variation 38 110 of Vn 38 264 V AC 50 120 of Vn 12 72 V DC 80 120 of Vn 38 4 300 V DC Start up threshold 19 2 V DC 24 V DC 80 Burden of auxiliary voltage supply under quiescent Pq operating condition DC 13 0 W nominal 18 0 W max AC 16 0 W nominal 21 0 W ...

Page 1174: ...t available for RET615 3 Ground current and or phase current Table 979 Energizing inputs sensors Description Value Current sensor input Rated current voltage in secondary side 75 mV 9000 mV1 Continuous voltage withstand 125 V Input impedance at 50 60 Hz 2 3 MΩ2 Voltage sensor input Rated voltage 6 kV 30 kV3 Continuous voltage withstand 50 V Input impedance at 50 60 Hz 3 MΩ 1 Equals the current ran...

Page 1175: ...t activation of the binary inputs due to possible external disturbances At the same time the threshold should be set so that the correct operation is not jeopardized in case of undervoltage of the auxiliary voltage Table 981 RTD mA inputs Description Value RTD inputs Supported RTD sensors 100 Ω platinum 250 Ω platinum 100 Ω nickel 120 Ω nickel 250 Ω nickel 10 Ω copper TCR 0 00385 DIN 43760 TCR 0 0...

Page 1176: ...tinuous contact carry 5 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 10 A Make and carry 0 5 s 15 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC 1 A 0 25 A 0 15 A Minimum contact load 10 mA at 5 V AC DC Table 984 Double pole power output relays with TCM function Description Value Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 8 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and ca...

Page 1177: ...986 High speed output HSO with BIO0007 Description Value Rated voltage 250 V AC DC Continuous contact carry 6 A Make and carry for 3 0 s 15 A Make and carry for 0 5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control circuit time constant L R 40 ms at 48 110 220 V DC 5 A 3 A 1 A Trip time 1 ms Reset 20 ms resistive load Table 987 Ethernet interfaces Ethernet interface Protocol Cable Data transfer rate Front...

Page 1178: ...splices and connectors in the path 2 Maximum allowed attenuation caused by connectors and cable together Table 990 Fiber optic protection communication link available in RED615 Connector Fibre type Wave length Typical max length1 Permitted path attenuation2 LC MM 62 5 125 or 50 125 μm 1300 nm 2 km 8 dB LC SM 9 125 μm3 1300 nm 20 km 8 dB 1 Maximum length depends on the cable attenuation and quality...

Page 1179: ... Front side IP 54 Rear side connection terminals IP 10 Left and right side IP 20 Top and bottom IP 20 Table 994 Environmental conditions Description Value Operating temperature range 25 55ºC continuous Short time service temperature range REF615 REG615 REM615 and RET615 40 85ºC 16 h 1 2 RED615 40 70ºC 16 h 1 2 Relative humidity 93 non condensing Atmospheric pressure 12 47 15 37 psi 86 106 kPa Alti...

Page 1180: ...1174 ...

Page 1181: ...Contact discharge 8 kV Air discharge 15 kV Radio frequency interference test 10 V rms f 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 IEC 60255 26 class III 10 V m rms f 80 2700 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 IEC 60255 26 class III 10 V m f 900 MHz ENV 50204 IEC 60255 26 class III 20 V m rms f 80 1000 MHz IEEE C37 90 2 2004 Fast transient disturbance test IEC 61000 4 4 IEC 60255 26 IEEE C37 90 1 2002 All ports 4 kV Surge immun...

Page 1182: ...Common mode 300 V rms Differential mode 150 V rms Conducted common mode disturbances 15 Hz 150 kHz Test level 3 10 1 10 V rms IEC 61000 4 16 Emission tests EN 55011 class A IEC 60255 26 CISPR 11 CISPR 12 Conducted 0 15 0 50 MHz 79 dB µV quasi peak 66 dB µV average 0 5 30 MHz 73 dB µV quasi peak 60 dB µV average Radiated 30 230 MHz 40 dB µV m quasi peak measured at 10 m distance 230 1000 MHz 47 dB ...

Page 1183: ...istance 0 1 Ω 4 A 60 s IEC 60255 27 Table 997 Mechanical tests Description Requirement Reference Vibration tests sinusoidal Class 2 IEC 60068 2 6 test Fc IEC 60255 21 1 Shock and bump test Class 2 IEC 60068 2 27 test Ea shock IEC 60068 2 29 test Eb bump IEC 60255 21 2 Seismic test Class 2 IEC 60255 21 3 Mechanical durability 200 withdrawals and insertions of the plug in unit 200 adjustments of pro...

Page 1184: ...es 3 h 3 h at 25 C 55 C IEC60068 2 14 Storage test 96 h at 40ºC 96 h at 85ºC IEC 60068 2 1 IEC 60068 2 2 IEEE C37 90 2005 1 For relays with an LC communication interface the maximum operating temperature is 70oC 2 For RED615 70oC 16 h Table 999 Product safety Description Reference LV directive 2006 95 EC Standard EN 60255 27 2013 EN 60255 1 2009 Table 1000 EMC compliance Description Reference EMC ...

Page 1185: ...1 EN 60255 26 EN 60255 27 EMC council directive 2004 108 EC EU directive 2002 96 EC 175 IEC 60255 Low voltage directive 2006 95 EC IEC 61850 IEEE C37 90 2005 1MAC059074 MB A Section 16 Applicable standards and regulations 615 series ANSI 1179 Technical Manual ...

Page 1186: ...1180 ...

Page 1187: ... signal integrity CAT 5e An enhanced version of CAT 5 that adds specifications for far end crosstalk CB Circuit breaker CBB Cycle building block COMTRADE Common format for transient data exchange for power systems Defined by the IEEE Standard CPU Central processing unit CT Current transformer CTS Clear to send DAN Doubly attached node DC 1 Direct current 2 Disconnector 3 Double command DCD Data ca...

Page 1188: ... A standard for connecting a family of frame based computer networking technologies into a LAN FLC Full load current FPGA Field programmable gate array FTP File transfer protocol FTPS FTP Secure GFC General fault criteria GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Event GPS Global Positioning System HMI Human machine interface HSO High speed output HSR High availability seamless redundancy HTTPS Hyp...

Page 1189: ...ea network LC Connector type for glass fiber cable LCD Liquid crystal display LED Light emitting diode LHMI Local human machine interface LOG Loss of grid LOM Loss of mains LV Low voltage MAC Media access control MCB Miniature circuit breaker MM 1 Multimode 2 Multimode optical fiber MMS 1 Manufacturing message specification 2 Metering management system MV Medium voltage Modbus A serial communicati...

Page 1190: ...peak mode but with the function picking up on two conditions the peak to peak value is above the set pickup current or the peak value is above two times the set pickup value RAM Random access memory RCA Also known as MTA or base angle Characteristic angle RED615 Line differential protection and control relay REF615 Feeder protection and control relay REM615 Motor protection and control relay RET61...

Page 1191: ...n for representing a three phase power system Instead of representing each of three phases with a separate line or terminal only one conductor is represented TCM Trip circuit monitoring TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCS Trip circuit supervision TLV Type length value Tx Transmit Transmitted UDP User datagram protocol UTC Coordinated univers...

Page 1192: ...1186 ...

Page 1193: ...1187 ...

Page 1194: ......

Page 1195: ......

Page 1196: ...e Coral Springs Florida 33065 USA Phone 1 954 752 6700 Fax 1 954 345 5329 Phone 1 800 222 1946 Customer Service 24 7 www abb com mediumvoltage www abb com substationautomation Copyright 2018 ABB All rights reserved 1MAC059074 MB A ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion 615 series

Reviews:

Related manuals for Relion 615 series

Brands by name

Popular brands

ABB Relion 615 series, Technical Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for Relion 615 series

Reviews:

Related manuals for Relion 615 series

Brands by name

Popular brands